Home

CFW11 - Programming Manual

1. 4 sse oJd eui jo e ueJejeJ jurodies A t E 006504 o A P 26 59204 le E E E AT o gt N br ZEL pup gp 04 Q i 6504 c ME 7 ME ed i e qpu3 did 5 i 5 IG pasoo 2 861 1 79 eui 1 d 4 4 S Oo d Es E vELOd EELOd 0 6904 1 A 82908 46908 5 quedo fe 2 1 lt 1 BEL 9 909 d e ueJejey juiodjec 8 2 eu 17004 80504 4 aoualajay 50504 20908 0 26608 12608 9 qpu3 PID Regulator 46 20 2 PID Regulator 46 20 2 COMMISSIONING Before doing a detailed description of the parameters related to this function a step by step guide for putting the PID into operation will be presented C B n order that the PID function works properly it is fundamental to verify if the inverter is configured correctly to drive the motor at the desired speed Therefore verify the following
2. Co NIN Nh N j a N 2 5 N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N O N N N O N O O gt ES ps nw _ ARA 4 pi 2 a N p 4 4 N Run Stop General Enable __ Fast Stop Run REVRun 3Wire Start 3 WireStop FWD REV LOC REM Decrease EP Mulispeed Romp2 Speed lorque No Ext Alarm No Fault Reset Use Manud Auto Disable DC Link Regul Program Of load User3 DO2Timer Timer Properties Access groups 07 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 40 Digital Input 40 Digital Input Description Those parameters make it possible to configure the functions of the digital inputs according to the listed range Some notes regarding the Digital Input functions are presented next Run Stop In order to assure the correct operation of this function it is necessary to program P0224 and or P0227 in 1 Fast Stop The Run Stop Stop command is executed with nul
3. 92 Flux Regulator Description These parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the parameter P0412 In general the automatic setting is sutticient and the readjustment is not necessary These gains must only be readjusted manually when the flux current signal 10 is unstable oscillating and compromising the system operation NOTE For gains in PO175 gt 12 0 the flux current Id may become unstable Note 19 is observed at the analog outputs and or 4 by setting P0257 22 and or P0260 22 P0178 Rated Flux Adjustable O to 120 96 Factory 100 Range Setting P0179 Maximum Flux Adjustable O to 120 96 Factory 120 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 92 Flux Regulator Description The parameter 0178 is the flux reference while the parameter PO179 defines the maximum value for the flux magnetization current These parameters must not be modified Vector Control P0181 Magnetization Mode Adjustable 0 General Enable Factory 0 1 Run Stop Setting Properties CFG and Encoder Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 92 Flux Regulator Description Table 11 4 Magnetization Mode P0181 0 General Enable Applies magnetizing current after Gene
4. 2 XN 000 5 001 99 18108 9 98104 do JoyoinBey Dq 8 2 eui o1 49jey e ueJejey DGIO 58104 Figure 21 2 PM with encoder vector control block diagram 0202 6 21 3 PM Vector Control 21 2 3 Modified Functions Almost all the functions presented in this manual remain active when the options 6 or 7 are programmed in P0202 The functions no longer active or that suffered any modification are described in the sections 21 3 to 21 9 Neither are the inactive functions e g running the self tuning PO408 nor the parameters associated to those functions e g I f control P0182 and P0183 visualized on the HMI 21 3 PROGRAMMING BASIC INSTRUCTIONS INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN PARAMETERS If any of the combinations listed below occur the CFW 11 goes to the Config state Refer to the section 5 7 Incompatibility between Parameters for the combinations from 1 to 34 35 P0202 programmed for 3 Sensorless 4 Encoder 6 Encoder PM or 7 Sensorless and P0297 0 1 25 kHz 36 P0202 programmed for 7 Sensorless PM and P0297 3 10 kHz or 4 2 0 kHz 21 4 INVERTER MODEL AND ACCESSORIES IDENTIFICATION P0297 Switching Frequency Adjustable 0 1 25 khz Factory 2 Range 2 5 Kak Setting 2 50 khk 3 10 0 krk 4 2 kHz Properties GEG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description
5. 100 and KTY84 P0391 gt P0384 P0385 0 3100 P0385 1 Rc gt 4 kQ PTC PT100 and KTY84 P0392 gt P0387 1 P0373 0 Rue lt 200 P0373 1 Re lt 600 PT100 and KTY84 P0388 lt 20 C P0376 0 Rye lt 200 P0376 1 Re lt 60 Q PT100 and KTY84 P0389 lt 20 C P0379 0 Rue lt 200 P0379 1 Re lt 600 PT100 and KTY84 P0390 lt 20 C P0382 0 Rc lt 200 P0382 1 Re lt 60 Q PT100 and KTY84 P0391 lt 20 C P0385 0 Re lt 200 P0385 1 Re lt 600 PT100 and KTY84 P0392 lt 20 C P0373 0 Re lt 5500 P0373 1 Rie lt 1 65 PT100 and KTY84 P0388 lt P0375 1 P0376 0 Rc lt 5500 P0376 1 lt 1 65 100 84 89 lt 78 1 P0379 0 Rie lt 5500 P0379 1 Rac lt 1 65 T c 100 and KTY84 P0390 P0381 1 P0382 0 Rc lt 5500 P0382 1 8 lt 1 65 100 and KTY84 P0391 lt 0384 1 P0385 0 Rc lt 5500 P0385 1 lt 1 65 PTC PT100 and KTY84 P0392 P0387 1 P0373 0 Rc lt 5500 P0373 1 lt 1 65 PT100 and KTY84 P0388 P0375 1 P0376 0 lt 5500 P0376 1 Ryne lt 1 65 PTC PT100 and KTY84 P0389 P0378 1 P0379 0 lt 5500 P P0379 1 lt 1 65 PT100 KTY84 P0390 lt 0381
6. NOTES Every time that PO408 1 or 2 The parameter P0413 Mechanic time constant Tm will be adjusted to a value close to the motor mechanic time constant Therefore the motor rotor inertia table data valid for WEG motors the inverter rated voltage and current are taken into consideration Vector mode with encoder P0202 4 When using 408 2 Run for one must after finishing the self tuning routine couple the load to the motor and set 408 4 Estimate in order to estimate the value of PO413 In this case P0413 will also consider the driven load VVW mode Voltage Vector WEG P0202 5 In the VVW control self tuning routine only the value of the stator resistance P0409 will be obtained Therefore the self tuning will always be performed without rotating the motor Better self tuning results are obtained with the motor warm 11 24 Vector Control P0409 Motor Stator Resistance Rs Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 ohm Factory 0 000 ohm Range Setting Properties CFG Vector and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning Description Estimated value and automatically adjusted by the self tuning section 11 3 Self tuning This parameter can also be obtained on the motor data sheet item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet NOTE
7. It is the data percentage that will be recorded before the occurrence of the trigger event P0559 Trace Maximum Memory Adjustable O to 100 96 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It defines the maximum of memory that the user wished to reserve for the Trace Function points The setting range from 0 to 100 96 corresponds to a reserve request of to 15 KB for the Trace Function Each point stored by the Trace Function takes 2 bytes of memory This parameter defines indirectly the number of points that the user wishes to store with the Trace Function 19 3 Trace Function 52 The memory area used by the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative When there is a SoftPLC applicative in the inverter the amount of memory actually available for the Trace Function may be smaller than the value adjusted in P0559 The indication of the memory amount actually available is done by the read only parameter P0560 For more details refer to the parameter P0560 description As the factory setting P0559 0 96 In this case there is no memory available for the Trace Function because the available 15 KB are reserved for the SoftPLC applicative P0560 Trace Available Memory Adjustable O to 100 96 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via
8. Adjustable 0 Normal Factory 0 Range 1 Saturated Setting Properties CFG PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator Description Adjust 160 1 in applications where stable torque is desired as in a material winding process in those cases the speed reference is always maintained greater than the speed feedback value aiming at saturating the speed regulator that is keeping its output equal to the value adjusted in PO169 or P0170 during the process If it is used for speed control F022 may occur even if the DC link voltage regulation is active P0185 lt default value P0161 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 0 to 63 9 Factory 7 4 Range Setting P0162 Speed Regulator Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 0 023 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI o Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator Description The speed regulator gains are calculated automatically in function of the parameter P0413 constant When P0413 is changed parameters 161 and 162 are proportionally changed However these gains can be adjusted manually in order to optimize the speed dynamic response The Proportional gain 161 stabilizes abrupt speed or reference changes while the Integral gain 1 62 corrects the error
9. Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter is useful when the motor is equipped with PTC type temperature sensors allowing the configuration of the protection level for the motor overtemperature function The details on the actuation of the available options are in the table 15 4 Refer P0351 1 Fault Alarm also to the section 15 2 Motor Overtemperature Protection Table 15 4 Actions for the parameter P0351 options The overtemperature protection is disabled Faults or alarms for the motor operation in the overtemperature condition will not be generated The inverter will show an alarm A110 and will generate a fault F078 when the motor reaches the overtemperature actuation values Once a fault is generated the inverter will be disabled Only the fault F078 will be generated when the motor reaches the overtemperature protection trip level and the inverter will be disabled Only the alarm A110 will be generated when the motor reaches the protection actuation level and the inverter remains operating 15 11 Faults and Alarms P0352 Fan Control Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI Description O Heatsink fan and internal fan are OFF 1 Heatsink fan and internal fan are 2 Heatsink fan and internal fan are controlled via software 3 Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal
10. Cable Alarm v menm 9 Cable Alarm Description 7 10 10 11 1 11 12 E They program the functions of the digital outputs according to the options presented previously When the condition declared by the function is true the digital output will be activated Example Is Ix function when Is gt Ix then DOx saturated transistor and or relay with the coil energized and when Is lt lx then DOx open transistor and or relay with the coil not energized 13 20 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Some notes regarding the Digital Outputs are presented next Not Used it means that the digital outputs will remain always in a resting state i e DOx open transistor and or relay with the coil not energized Zero Speed it means that the motor speed is below the value adjusted in PO291 Zero Speed Zone Torque gt Tx and Torque lt Tx they are valid only for PO202 3 or 4 Vector Control In those functions Torque corresponds to the motor torque as indicated at parameter PO009 Remote it means that the inverter is operating in Remote situation Run it corresponds to enabled inverter In this moment the IGBTs are commutating and the motor may be at any speed inclusive zero Ready it corresponds to the inverter without fault and without undervoltage No Fault it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault F070 it means that the inverter is not disabled
11. F group of parameters menu Parameter Groups 01 e Adjust specific parameters and functions digital and analog inputs and outputs HMI keys according to the application needs or applications That are simple which allow the use of digital and analog inputs and outputs with their factory settings and the use of the Basic Application 04 parameter group refer to the item 5 2 3 Setting Basic Application Parameters of the CFW 11 user s manual That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory settings use the Menu I O Configuration 07 That need functions as Dynamic Braking 28 and Ride Through 44 access them through the f Operation test 1 Adjust the speed reference PO121 at the rated speed P0402 and run the motor without load 2 With the motor running at the nominal speed P0402 increase the load slowly until reaching the rated current PO401 If any of the faults or symptoms listed next occurs during the execution of steps 1 or 2 try to eliminate it by using the procedures described for each situation If more than one procedure exists test each one separately and in the presented order Inverter output overcurrent FO71 1 Increase the acceleration ramp time PO100 or PO102 2 Increase the speed regulator proportional gain 161 in steps of 1 0 up to the maximum of 20 0 3 Increase the proportional gain of the iq current
12. Time 24V Dlx Reverse Time Motor speed Time Reverse m ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER E P o Increase Digital Inputs d gt Speed Reference eceleration Reset to zero Enabling Minimum d Motor i i i f T 24 Vi Open Dlx Increase gt Time 240 Decrease ER gt Time 24V Dlx Run Stop gt Time Figure 13 6 cont k to m Details on the operation of the digital input functions 13 18 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 13 1 4 Digital Outputs Relays 41 The CFW 11 has 3 relay digital outputs as standard on its control board and 2 more digital outputs of the open collector type that can be added with the accessories IOA 01 or IOB 01 The next parameters configure the functions related to those outputs P0013 DO5 to DO Status Adjustable BitO DOI Factory Range Bit 1 DO2 Setting Bir 2 DOS 017 6 IDOA Bit 4 DO5 Properties RO Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs LJ 4 Digital Outputs Description By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the control board 3 digital outputs to and the 2 digital outputs of the optional board DO4 and DOS The indi
13. O 65xl ND 45 15 5 P0159 Motor Thermal Class 0 Class 5 1 Class 10 45 15 6 1 Class 10 VVW 2 Class 15 Vector 3 Class 20 4 Class 25 5 Class 30 6 Class 35 7 Class 40 8 Class 45 P0160 Speed Regul Configuration O Normal 0 Normal CFG 90 1 16 1 Saturated 21 8 P0161 Speed Prop Gain 0 0 to 63 9 7 0 PM and 90 1 16 Vector and 21 8 0162 Speed Integral Gain 0 000 to 9 999 0 005 PM and 90 1 16 Vector and 21 8 P0163 LOC Reference Offset 999 to 999 0 PM and 90 1 17 Vector and 21 8 0164 REM Reference Offset 999 to 999 0 90 1 17 Vector and 21 8 P0165 Speed Filter 0 012 to 1 000 s 0 0125 90 1 18 Vector and 21 8 P0166 Speed Diff Gain 0 00 to 7 99 0 00 PM and 90 1 18 Vector and 21 8 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0167 Current Prop Gain 0 00 to 1 99 0 50 Vector P0168 Current Integral Gain 0 000 to 1 999 0 010 Vector P0169 Max Torque Curr 0 0 to 350 0 96 25 0 96 PM and 95 28 Vector and 21 10 P0170 Max Torque Curr 0 0 to 350 0 96 25 0 96 PM and 95 28 Vector and 21 10 171 Torque Cur at Nmax 0 0 to 350 0 25 0 Vector 95 29 P0172 TorqueCur at Nmax 0 0 to 350 0 25 0 96 Vector 95 29 P0173 Max Torque Curve 0 Ram
14. VVW 05 43 94 25 0411 Leakage Inductance 0 00 to 99 99 mH 0 00 mH CFG and 05 43 94 26 Vector P0412 T Time Constant 0 000 to 9 999 s 0 000 s Vector 05 43 94 26 P0413 Time Constant 0 00 to 99 99 s 0 00 s Vector 05 43 94 1 27 PO431 Number 2 to 24 6 CFG PM 05 43 94 21 7 P0433 Lg Inductance 0 00 to 100 00 mH 0 00 m CFG PM 05 43 94 21 7 P0434 Ld Inductance 0 00 to 100 00 mH 0 00 m CFG PM 05 43 94 21 7 P0435 Constant 0 0 to 400 0 100 0 CFG PM 05 43 94 21 8 P0438 Iq Prop Gain 0 00 to 1 99 0 80 PM 91 21 9 0439 Iq Integral Gain 0 000 to 1 999 0 005 PM 9 21 9 0440 Id Prop Gain 0 00 to 1 99 0 50 PM 91 21 9 0441 Id Integral Gain 0 000 to 1 999 0 005 PM 9 21 9 P0520 PID Proportional Gain 0 000 to 7 999 1 000 46 20 10 P0521 Integral Gain 0 000 to 7 999 0 043 46 20 10 P0522 PID Differential Gain 0 000 to 3 499 0 000 46 20 10 P0523 PID Ramp Time 0 0 to 999 0 s 3 05 46 20 11 P0524 PID Feedback Sel 0 P0231 1 AI2 P0236 CFG 38 46 20 12 1 AI2 P0236 2 AI3 PO241 3 Al4 P0246 P0525 PID Setpoint 0 0 to 100 0 96 0 0 96 46 20 12 P0527 PID Action lype 0 Direct 0 Direct 46 20 12 1 Reverse P0528 V Scale Factor 9999 1000 46 20 13 P0529 Proc V Decimal Point 0 wxyz 1 wxyz 46 20 13 1 wxy z 2 wx yz 3 w xyz P0530 Proc V Eng Unit 1 32 to 127 37 46 20 14 P0531 Proc V Eng Unit
15. 90173 71 0134 Synchronous speed x 190 P0400 Figure 11 5 Torque limitation actuation curve at maximum speed This function stays inactive when the contents of 171 0172 are higher or equal to the contents of 169 P0170 P0171 and PO172 do also act during optimal braking limiting the maximum output current P0173 Maximum Torque Curve Adjustable 0 Ramp Factory 0 Range 1 Step Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 95 Torque Curr Limit Description It defines how the actuation of the torque limitation curve will be at the field weakening region Refer to the figure 11 5 11 29 Vector Control 11 8 7 DC Link Regulator 96 For the deceleration of high inertia loads with short deceleration times the CFW 11 has available the DC Link Regulation function which avoids the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage in the DC link F022 P0184 DC Link Regulation Mode Adjustable 0 With losses Factory 1 Range 1 Without losses Setting 2 Enable Disable Dlx Properties CFG PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control L 96 DC Link Regulator Description It enables or disables the Optimal Braking function section 11 6 Optimal Braking in the DC voltage regulation according to the next table Table 11 8
16. P e o Eo a gt 2 3 Factory Setting P0252 AOI Gain P0255 AO2 Gain P0258 Gain P0261 AO4 Gain NIN WIN 241071 241071 N NIN eS N Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 1 000 Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs Description They adjust the analog output gains Refer to the figure 13 3 13 8 Speed Reference Total Reference Real Speed Torque Current Reference Torque Current Output Current Process Variable PID Active Current Output Power PID Setpoint Torque Current gt 0 Motor Torque SoftPLC PTC Not Used Not Used Motor lxt Encoder Speed P0696 Value P0697 Value 0698 Value P0699 Value PLCTI Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Function P0251 P0254 P0257 P0260 Signal AO P0253 AO2 P0256 AOS P0259 AO4 P0262 Figure 13 3 Analog output block diagram 13 9 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Table 13 4 Full scale SCALE OF THE ANALOG OUTPUT INDICATIONS Full Scale Speed Reference Total Reference P0134 Real Speed Encoder Speed Torque Current Reference Torque Current 2 Torque Current gt 0 e nomHD Motor Torque 2 0 xl Output Current ESSA Active Current PID Process Varia
17. Signal Adjustable 0 Oto 10 V 20 mA Factory 0 Range 1 4 to 20 mA Setting 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 2010 4 mA P0238 AI2 Signal Type P0248 AIA Signal Adjustable 0 Oto 10 V 20 mA Factory 0 Range 1 4 to 20 mA Setting 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 2010 4 mA 4 4 10 V Properties GEC Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs Description These parameters configure the signal type if it is current or voltage that will be read at each analog input as well as its range Refer to the tables 13 1 and 13 2 for more details on this configuration Table 13 1 DIP Switches related to the analog inputs mer emn P0233 trol B P0238 AI2 mus __ _ P0248 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Table 13 2 Configuration of the analog input signals P0233 P0243 P0238 P0248 Input Signal 0 S 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 41020 mA On P 8919 v Q0to 0 m 3 10 10 V Off When current signals are used at the input the switch corresponding to the desired input must be set in the ON position Inverse reference is obtained with the options 2 and 3 i e maximum speed is obtained with minimum reference 13 1 2 Analog Outputs 39 In the CFW 11
18. active 0 Current limitation of the Ramp Deceleration type Current limitation according to the figure 9 9 b 1 Decel FL ON Eget Active fast current limitation Fast current limitation at the value 1 9 x active omHD t limitation of the R Hold t 1 2 Hold FL OFF Curren d type Current limitation according to the figure 9 9 Inactive fast current limitation 3 Decel FL OFF ine 08 Degelereiten ipe Current limitation according to the figure 9 9 b Inactive fast current limitation Current limitation of the Ramp Hold type It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at the deceleration Working if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135 during the acceleration or the deceleration the speed will no longer be increased acceleration or decreased deceleration When the motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will again accelerate or decelerate Refer to the figure 9 9 a It acts faster than the Ramp Deceleration mode It acts in the motorization and braking modes Current limitation of the Ramp Deceleration type It avoids the stalling of the motor during a torque overload at the acceleration or at constant speed Working if the motor current exceeds the value adjusted in P0135 the input of the speed ramp is set to zero forcing a deceleration W
19. ca R x Wo o 8 gt T 22 22 u p E gt 9t co o Qe 17 o T o 2 5 Hes x9 Dares Pm 5 E 9 o 9 o en 5 So ON 5 re 2 S 3 4 OO 56 8 e 2 1 Ko Reference Refer to the figure 13 8 Figure 21 1 Sensorless PM vector control block diagram P0202 7 21 2 PM Vector Control 21 2 2 PM with Encoder P0202 6 The PM with encoder control presents the advantages described for the Sensorless control plus a speed control or by digital references via HMI Profibus DP bit analog reference via 01 by using the 14 accuracy of 0 01 DeviceNet It requires the 01 or 02 accessory for the interface with the incremental encoder d SOvOd e l sixy peuiq t jueun enbao 704 9 p do 0 9 0 8 04 do bi sf 0 puan jueuin enbio anjon noq gt 581049 ijnbjeq 68104 o sl 330 19 99104 peedg Su e 9910d PO E Lg 22069 OLLOd LXOW 19 69104 l3 29104 19 19104 99
20. DC link connection Dynamic braking resistor connection Pre charge gt Capacitor Motor IGBT inverter RFI filter Feedbacks voltage current ESEE _________________ CONTROL Power supplies for electronics and for interface between power and control Expansion Slot 1 white Encoder Interface Slot 2 yellow Accessories Analog Outputs 2 1 gt AO1 and 2 Digital Outputs 3 TT DOI RLI to DO3 RL3 Human Machine Interface Figure 3 1 CFW 11 block diagram About the CFW 11 A Mounting Supports for surface mounting B Heatsink C Top cover D Fan with fixing support COMM 2 module Anybus F Accessory board module G FLASH memory module H Front cover Keypad HMI N 058 2 USB LED Off without USB connection On blinking USB communication active 3 Status LED Green Normal operation without fault or alarm Yellow In the alarm condition Blinking red In the fault condition Figure 3 3 LEDs and USB connector 3 3 About the CFW 11 3 4 4 1 KEYPAD Keypad HMI Through the keypad HMI it is possible to command the inverter visualize and adjust all the parameters
21. lf the chosen option had been the option 1 2 or 3 in P0408 the keypad HMI will present PO409 Estimating Rs The keypad HMI will also indicate the estimation of the parameters P0411 P0410 and PO412 if the option 1 2 or 3 had been chosen in P0408 When P0408 1 or 3 the keypad HMI will not indicate the PO410 estimation When P0408 3 or 4 the keypad HMI will indicate the P0413 estimation Wait until the end of the Self Tuning routine Once the Self Tuning routine has finished the inverter returns to the monitoring mode Functions Common to All the Control Modes FUNCTIONS COMMON TO ALL THE CONTROL MODES This section describes the functions that are common to all the CFW 11 inverter control modes V f VVW Sensorless and Encoder 12 1 RAMPS 20 The inverter RAMPS functions allow the motor to accelerate and decelerate in a faster or a slower manner P0100 Acceleration Time P0101 Deceleration Time Adjustable 0 0 to 999 05 Factory 20 05 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 20 Ramps Description These parameters define the time to accelerate P0100 lineally O to the maximum speed defined in PO134 and decelerate P0101 lineally from the maximum speed down to 0 Note The setting 0 0 s means that the ramp is disabled P0102 Acceleration Time 2 P0103 Deceleration Time 2
22. 5 75 5 75 S Factory 1 000 Setting Factory 0 00 Setting P0240 AI2 Filter P0245 Al3 Filter P0250 AIA Filter Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI Description 13 4 All Al2 Al4 0 00 to 16 00 s 07 I O CONFIGURATION L_ Analog Inputs OFFSET P0234 AI2 P0239 P0244 Al4 P0249 P0232 AI2 P0237 P0242 P P0247 P0236 P0241 GAIN P0246 E or Factory 0 00s Setting 01 PARAMETER GROUPS L 38 Analog Inputs All P0018 Alx FILTER P0235 AI2 P0240 P0245 Al4 P0250 Figure 13 2 Analog input block diagram Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs The Alx internal value is the result of the following equation Alx OFT x 10 4 For instance Alx 5 V OFFSET 70 96 and Gain 1 000 Ara lxi 2v 100 Alx 2 V means that the motor will rotate in the reverse direction with a reference in module equal to 2 V provided that the function is Speed Reference For the Alx function Maximum Torque Current negative values are clipped at 0 0 96 For the filter parameters P0235 P0240 P0245 and P0250 the adjusted value corresponds to the RC constant used for filtering the signal read at the input P0233 AIT Signal Type P0243
23. 50 96 5 ramp 100 96 S ramp 4 Acceleration Deceleration Time 0100 0102 101 0103 Figure 12 2 5 or linear ramp S ramp reduces mechanic shock during accelerations decelerations 12 2 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0105 15 2 Ramp Selection Adjustable 0 1 Ramp Factory 2 ESZRE Setting 2 Dib 3 Serial USB 4 Anybus CC 5 CANopen DeviceNet Protibus DP 7 PLCI Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 20 Ramps Description It detines the source of the command that will select between the Ramp 1 and the Ramp 2 Notes Ramp 1 means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in 100 and P0101 Ramp 2 means that the acceleration and deceleration ramps are following the values programmed in P0102 and P0103 It is possible to monitor the set of ramps being used in a defined moment at the parameter P0680 Logical status 12 2 SPEED REFERENCES 21 This parameter group makes it possible that the reference values for the motor speed and for the functions JOG JOG and JOG be established It is also possible to define if the reference value will be kept when the inverter is switched off or disabled For more details refer to the figures 13 8 and 13 9 P0120 Speed Reference Backup Adjustable
24. Adjustable 0 0 to 999 0 s Factory 20 05 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 20 Ramps Description Those parameters allow a second ramp to be configured for the motor acceleration PO102 or deceleration 103 which is activated via an external digital command defined by P0105 Once this command is activated the inverter ignores the times of the first ramp PO100 or PO101 and starts obeying the value adjusted at the second ramp Refer the example for external command via Dlx showed next in the figure 12 1 12 1 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 24V Dlx open Run Stop Time 24v 2 ramp Dix Time 02 al 03 1 00 4 M 450101 Motor Speed Time Figure 12 1 Second ramp actuation In this example the commutation to the 2nd ramp PO102 or P0103 is done by means of one of the digital inputs from to DI8 provided that it had been programmed for 2nd ramp function refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs for more details Note The setting 0 0 s means that the ramp is disabled P0104 S Ramp Adjustable 0 Oi Factory 0 Range 5096 Setting 2 100 96 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 20 Ramps Description This parameter allows that the acceleration and deceleration ramps have a nonlinear profile similar to an S as showed in the figure 12 2 next Linear
25. It configures the time for the line phase loss indication F006 If P0357 0 the function remains disabled NOTE The function Phase Loss will be automatically disabled when detected some of the models CFW11 0010 S 2024 CFW11 0006 S 2024FA or CFW11 0007 S 2024 FA Ifthe inverter has single phase power supply it is necessary to adjust P0357 to disable the fault 006 P0359 Motor Current Stabilization Adjustable Factory 0 Setting Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description The parameter P0359 allows enabling the motor current stabilizing function This function eliminates oscillations in the motor current caused by operation at low speeds with little load P0800 Phase U Book 1 Temperature P0801 Phase V Book 1 Temperature P0802 Phase W Book 1 Temperature P0803 Phase U Book 2 Temperature P0804 Phase V Book 2 Temperature P0805 Phase W Book 2 Temperature P0806 Phase U Book 3 Temperature P0807 Phase V Book 3 Temperature P0808 Phase W Book 3 Temperature P0809 Phase U Book 4 Temperature P0810 Phase V Book 4 Temperature P0811 Phase W Book 4 Temperature P0812 Phase U Book 5 Temperature P0813 Phase V Book 5 Temperature Q j 5 gt Q 3 P0814 Phase W Book 5 Temperature Adjustab
26. Sequence for the installation verification and start up a Install the inverter according to the CFW 11 user s manual chapter 3 Installation and Connection wiring all the power and control connection b Prepare the drive system and power up the inverter according to the CFW 11 users manual section 5 1 Prepare for Start up Set the password 000 5 according to the section 5 3 Password Setting in 000 in this manual 21 12 PM Vector Control d Access P0317 and change its content to 1 in order to initiate the Oriented Start up routine Adjust the inverter to operate with the line and the motor of the application The Oriented Start up 2 routine presents the main parameters in a logical sequence on the HMI The programming of those parameters prepares the inverter for the operation with the application line and motor Look at the sequence in the figure 21 4 The programming of the parameters presented in the group 2 causes the automatic modification of the contents of other inverter parameters or internal variables as showed in the figure 21 4 which results in a stable control operation with values suitable to obtain the best motor performance During the Oriented Start up routine the Config Configuration status is indicated on the top left part of the HMI display Parameters related to the motor Program the parameters P0398 P0400 P0435 directly with the motor nameplate data
27. 1 Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 21 Speed References Description This parameter defines if the speed reference backup function is active or inactive If 120 Off inactive then the inverter will not save the speed reference when it is disabled Thus when the inverter is enabled again the speed reference will assume the value of the minimum speed limit PO133 This backup function applies to the references via keypad HMI Serial USB Anybus CC CANopen DeviceNet SoftPLC and PID Setpoint 12 3 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0121 Keypad Reference Adjustable 0 18000 rpm Factory 90 rpm Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI LJ 91 Speed References Description When the and W HMI keys are active P0221 or PO222 0 this parameter sets the value of the motor speed reference The value of PO121 will be kept with the last adjusted value when the inverter is disabled or powered off provided that the parameter 0120 is configured as Active 1 In this case the value of PO121 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected P0122 JOG Speed Reference Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 150 rpm Range Setting 125 rpm Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 21 Speed References Description During the J
28. Adjustable 00 to 59 Factory 0198 00 Range Setting 0199 00 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description Those parameters set the date and time of the CFW 11 real time clock It is important to configure them with the correct date and time so that the fault and alarm record occurs with actual date and time information P0200 Password Adjustable 0 Off Factory 1 Range 1 On Setting 2 Change Password Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description It allows changing the password and or setting its status configuring it as active or inactive For more details on each option refer to the table 5 3 described next Table 5 3 Options for the parameter PO000 P0200 Kind of Action O Inactive It allows parameter changes via HMI regardless of PO000 1 Active It does only allow parameter changes via HMI when the content of PO000 is equal to the password 2 Changed Password It opens a window for changing the password When the option 2 is selected Change password the inverter opens a window for changing the password allowing the selection of a new value for it 5 4 Programming Basic Instructions P0201 Language Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI Description Portugu s English Espa ol Deutsch Factory 0 Setting 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 30 HMI It det
29. Refer to the allowed current for switching frequencies different from the default in the tables available in chapter 8 Technical Specifications of the CFW 11 users manual The inverter switching frequency can be adjusted according to the needs of the application Higher switching frequencies imply in lower motor acoustic noise however the selection of the switching frequency results in a compromise between the motor acoustic noises the losses in the inverter IGBTs and the maximum allowed currents The reduction of the switching frequency reduces the earth leakage current being able to avoid the actuation of the faults F074 Ground Fault or F070 Output Overcurrent Short Circuit Note The option 0 1 25 kHz is only allowed for the V f or VVW control modes P0202 0 1 2 or 5 The option 3 10 kHz and 4 2 0 kHz are not allowed with the Sensorless PM control mode P0202 7 21 4 PM Vector Control 21 5 TORQUE CONTROL It is possible to use the inverter to control the motor torque when in vector mode One of the configurations consists in keeping the speed regulator saturated and the other in selecting between torque and speed control through a digital input Torque control range 10 96 to 180 96 Accuracy 5 96 of the rated torque When the speed regulator is positively or negatively saturated then PO 169 and PO170 limit the torque current respectively The torque in percentage at the motor shaft showed at
30. 12 3 12 3 5 limits 22126 12 5 12 4 Multispeed 361 12 7 12 5 Electronic Potentiometer 371 mene eere 12 9 12 6 Zero Speed Logie 35 4i iiti tetto tete rie e ts tee inta e itn eiua 12 10 12 7 Flying Start Ride Through 441 2 2 222 0 00000000000 eee eene 12 11 NED ZN ie TEIN Ge STORES irritat amr P T UE 12 12 12 7 2 Vector FYING Tatius 12 12 A2 3 E E 12 12 12 7 2 2 0202 4 12 14 12 7 3 VA Ride 12 15 12 7 4 Vector 2222 12 16 12 8 DG Braking 12 19 1295 Speed 48 URINE 12 23 12 10 Search of Zero of the Encoder 2 8 12 24 Chapter 13 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 13 1 l O Contiguration 13 1 Inputs 38 13 1 13 1 2 Analog Outputs 39 t tere rm tent n 13 6 13 1 3 Digital Inputs 401 2 13 11 13 1 4 Digital Outputs Relays 411 2 2 2 2 2 202000020010 13 19 18 2 Local and Remote COMMON sesse sisis aeaii eut 13 28 13 3 3 Wire Command 33 tot t
31. 2 Local Remote Key LOCAL 3 Local Remote Key REMOTE Al Dig 5 Serial USB LOCAL 6 Serial USB REMOTE 7 Anybus CC LOCAL 8 Anybus CC REMOTE 9 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP LOCAL 10 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP REMOTE 12 SofiPLC REMOTE US 14 REMOTE Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 31 Local Command 32 Remote Command Description It defines the origin of the command thot will select between the LOCAL situation and the REMOTE situation where LOCAL Means Local Default situation REMOTE Means Remote Default situation Dlx Refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs 13 28 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0221 Speed Reference Selection LOCAL Situation P0222 Speed Reference Selection REMOTE Situation Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI Description Keypad 1 2 AP 3 AI3 4 5 AI2 gt 0 Sum Als gt 0 6 Sum Als 7 610 8 Multispeed 9 Serial USB 10 Anybus CC 11 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP 12 Sen c 13 PC CFG 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 31 Local Command Factory Setting P0221 0 222 1 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 32 Local Command They define the origin of the Speed R
32. P0005 Motor Frequency Fx P0281 Fx Frequency It is a reference point of the motor frequency selected by the user PLC Refer to the PLC accessory manual 13 22 a N gt Nx Nx P0288 Time ON Relay Transistor OFF SEE Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs b N Nx 029 7 Nx P0288 P0287 Time ON Relay Transistor OFF OFF Relay ON Transistor ON LON Relay OFF Transistor OFF OFF e N 0 Zero Speed f Is gt Ix Speed P0291 Ix P0290 Relay Transistor OFF OFF Relay Transistor OFF OFF Is lt Ix Relay Transistor OFF Ix P0290 h Torque gt Tx Motor Torque P0009 Tx P0293 ON Relay Transistor OFF OFF Figure 13 7 a to d Details on the operation of the digital output functions 13 23 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs i Torque Tx Motor torque P0009 ON ON Relay Transistor OFF Tx P0293 No fault No fault Fault Time Relay Transistor ON OFF i b Fault No fault Fault Time ON Relay Transistor OFF Time k 4 20 mA Reference OK Relay Transistor ON OFF ON I Process Variable gt PVx VPx P0533 Time Process Variable Relay Transistor OFF OFF m Process Variable PVy P0534 Time Process Var
33. PID integral gain DI1 function Run Stop DI3 function Manual Automatic 014 function General Enable Al2 input function Process Variable PID proportional gain int ion 2 522 0 000 PID differential gain 0 Parameters already in the factory default 2 Parameter configured automatically by the inverter A Process 20 7 PID Regulator 46 20 3 SLEEP MODE The sleep mode is a useful resource for saving energy when using the PID regulator Refer to the figure 20 2 many PID applications energy is wasted by keeping the motor turning at the minimum speed when for instance the pressure or the tank level keeps increasing The sleep mode works together with the zero speed disable function In order to activate the sleep mode enable the zero speed disable by programming 217 1 On The disable condition is the same as for the zero speed disable without PID Refer to the section 12 6 Zero Speed Logic However the PO291 setting must be PO133 lt P0291 lt P0134 Refer to the figure 20 2 In order to leave the sleep mode wake up when in the automatic PID mode besides the condition programmed in P0218 it is necessary that the PID error the difference between the setpoint and the process variable be greater than the value programmed in P0535 DANGER While in the sleep mode the motor may turn at any moment because of the process conditions If it is wished to ha
34. unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at Phase V B1 indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current distribution between this phase and the smallest he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value current of the same phase in other book only when A392 10 Phase W book current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current Phase W B1 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value A393 19 Phase U book 2 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current Phase U B2 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value A394 09 Phase V book 2 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current Phase V B2 distribution between this phase and the smallest the current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value current of the same phase in other book only when Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the power unit Bad electric connection between the power unit output and the motor Note In case of fast acceleration or braking one of these alarms may be indicated momentarily disappearing after 3 seconds This is not an
35. 009 is given by x P0401 Tus AOTT 20 96 HD Where lq in Volts is the value read at the analog outputs AOT 4 a Settings for torque control N Torque limitation 1 Via parameters P0169 PO170 the keypad HMI Serial or Fieldbus Refer to the item 11 8 6 Torque Current Limitation 2 Through the analog inputs AI2 AI3 or 4 Refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs option 2 maximum torque current Speed reference 3 Set the speed reference 10 96 or more higher than the working speed This assures that the speed regulator output remains saturated at the maximum value allowed by the torque limit adjustment J NOTE The motor rated current must be equivalent to the inverter rated current in order that the control has the best possible accuracy The torque control with saturated speed regulator has a protection function to limit the motor speed without causing a fault For a winder for instance when the material being wound brakes the regulator leaves the saturated condition and starts controlling the motor speed which will be kept at the speed reference value 21 5 PM Vector Control 21 6 MOTOR DATA 43 AND SELF TUNING 05 AND 94 The parameters for the used motor data setting are listed in this group They must be adjusted according to the motor nameplate data except P0405 P0398 Motor Service Factor P0400 Motor Rated Vo
36. 1 P0382 0 Rc lt 5500 P0382 1 Ric lt 1 65 PT100 and KTY84 P0391 P0385 0 Rc lt 5500 P0385 1 lt 1 65 PT100 KTY84 P0392 lt P0387 1 P0373 0 8 gt 400 P0373 1 Rc gt 1200 100 and KTY84 P0388 gt 20 P0376 0 gt 400 P0376 1 R FIL gt 1200 PT100 and KTY84 P0389 gt 20 C P0379 0 Ry gt 400 PT P0379 1 gt 1200 PT100 and KTY84 P0390 gt 20 P0382 0 5 gt 400 P0382 1 R gt 1200 PT100 and KTY84 P0391 gt 20 C P0385 0 gt 400 P0385 1 R gt 1200 PTC PT100 and KTY84 P0392 gt 20 C 15 19 Faults and Alarms 15 20 Read Only Parameters 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS 09 In order to facilitate the visualization of the main reading variables of the inverter the group 09 Read Only Parameters can be accessed directly It is important to point out that all the parameters of that group can only be visualized on the keypad HMI display and that they do not allow changes by the user P0001 Speed Reference Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description This parameter presents regardless of the origin source adjusted in PO221 or P0222 the value of the speed reference in rpm factory setting The indication unit can be modified
37. 1 Install ground energize and operate the CFW 11 according to this manual and the effective legal safety procedures 2 Use protection equipment according to the established standards 3 Give first aid services DANGER A Always disconnect the input power before touching any electrical component associated to the inverter Many components can remain charged with high voltages or remain in movement fans even after that AC power is disconnected or switched off Wait at least 10 minutes before handling the equipment to assure a total discharge of the capacitors Always connect the equipment frame to the protection earth PE at the suitable connection point J ATTENTION Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostatic discharges Do not touch directly on components or connectors If necessary touch the grounded metallic frame before or use an adequate grounded wrist strap Do not perform any high pot tests with the inverter If it is necessary consult WEG NOTE Frequency Inverter may interfere with other electronic equipment In order to reduce these effects take the precautions recommended in the chapter 3 Installation and Connections of the user s manual NOTE Read the user s manual completely before installing or operating the inverter 1 2 General Information GENERAL INFORMATION 2 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual presents the necessary information for the configur
38. 100 rpm P0289 Ny Speed Adjustable 0 18000 rpm Factory 1800 rpm Range Setting 1500 rpm Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Description They are used in the N gt Nx N gt Nx and N lt Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs 13 26 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0290 Ix Current Adiustable Oo Factory 1Oxl Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI EE DI APR Description It is used in the Is gt Ix and Ix Ix functions of the digital and relay outputs P0291 Zero Speed Zone Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 18 rpm Range Setting 15 rpm Properties Access groups 07 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 35 Zero Speed Logic 41 Digital Outputs Description It specifies the value in rpm 1 96 of the motor rated speed hysteresis below which the actual speed will be considered null for the Zero Speed Disable function This parameter is also used by the functions of the digital and relay outputs and by the PID regulator The hysteresis is 0 22 96 of the motor rated speed P0292 N N Band Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory 18 rpm Range Sett
39. 19 Trace Function 52 10100000000 19 1 Chapter 20 PID Regulator 46 20 1 Description and Definitions 1 1 4 004 0008900 20 1 20 2 COMMISSIONING ERR 20 3 20 3 Sleep a er a e e d e re au tu re edu 20 8 20 4 Monitoring Mode 5 9999 rne nennen 20 8 20 5 Connection of a 2 Wire Transducer eem e eee see eres s 20 9 O Je oe eo 20 9 20 bP 20 16 Chapter 21 PM Vector Control 21 1 Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motors 5 0000 0 0 21 1 21 2 Sensorless PM Control and PM With 220 eme ener 21 1 21 2 Sensorness PM P0202 21 2 21 2 2 PM with Encoder P0202 6 21 2 3 Modified Functions 21 3 Programming Basic Instructions Incompatibility Between Parameters 21 4 21 4 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification 21 4 2 5 Iorgue Cohltol 21 5 21 6 Motor Data 43 Self Tuning 05 and 941 RH 21 6 2 I PNE Vector COMO 21 8 2 50 Speed Regulator 90 cett ERR 21 8 21 7 2 Current Regulator 9 1 E ERE RE HERR REOR 21 9 27
40. 26 Progr Off 27 Load User 1 2 28 Load User 3 29 DO2 Timer 30 Timer 31 Trace Function 0267 015 Function See options in 266 10 JOG CFG 20 31 32 13 12 33 34 36 37 40 44 45 46 P0268 016 Function See options 266 14 Ramp 2 CFG 20 31 32 13 12 33 34 36 37 40 44 45 46 P0269 017 Function See options in 263 O Not Used CFG 20 31 32 13 12 33 34 37 40 44 45 46 P0270 018 Function Se option in 263 0 Not Used CFG 20 31 32 13 12 33 34 37 40 44 45 46 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0275 001 Function RL1 O Not Used 13 No Fault 13 19 1 gt Nx 2 N gt Nx 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 ls gt Ix 7 15 lt 8 Torque gt Tx 9 Torque lt Tx 0 Run 2 Ready 3 No Fault 4 No F070 5 No F071 6 No F006 21 22 7 No F051 54 57 8 No F072 9 4 20 mA OK 20 P0695 Value 2 Forward 22 Proc V gt PVx 23 Proc V lt PW 24 Ride Through 25 Pre Charge OK 26 Fault 27 Time Enab gt Hx 28 SoftPLC 29 Not Used 30 N gt Nx Nt gt Nx 31 F gt Fx 1 32 F gt Fx 2 33 STO 34 No F160 35 No Alarm 36 No Fault Alarm 37 38 No Fault IOE 39 No Alarm IOE 40 No Cable IOE 4 No A cable IOE 42 No F cable IOE Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D eas jus jd pi
41. 95 13 4 P0250 Al4 Filter 0 00 to 16 00 s 0 00 s 38 95 13 4 P0251 AO Function 0 Speed Ref 1 Total Ref 2 Real Speed 3 Torque Cur Ref 4 Torque Current 5 Output Current 6 Process Var 7 Active Current 8 Output Power 9 PID Setpoint 0 Torque Cur 0 1 Motor Torque 2 SoftPLC 3 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Motor lxt 7 Encoder Speed 8 P0696 Value 9 P0697 Value 20 P0698 Value 21 P0699 Value 22 11 23 Id Current 2 Real Speed 39 13 7 P0252 AO Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 39 13 8 P0253 AO Signal Type 0 O to 10 V 20 mA 1 410 20 mA 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 20 to 4 mA 0 0 10 V 20 mA CFG 39 13 10 P0254 Function See options in 251 5 Output Current 39 13 7 P0255 AO2 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 39 13 8 P0256 2 Signal Type See options in 253 0 0 10 V 20 mA CFG 39 13 10 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D ere pitis P0257 Function 4 Torque Cur Torque Current Output Current Process Var Active Current Output Power PID Setpoint 0 Torque Cur 0 1 Motor Torque SoftPLC ot Used Not Used ot Used Motor Ixt Encoder Speed P0696 Value P0697 Value P0698 Value 21 P0699 Value 22
42. Fault Al Cab 15 16 1 Fault Al Cab 2 Fault Cable 3 Alarm Cable 4 Fault Alarm 5 Fault 6 Alarm 7 Alarm Cable P0375 Temper F A Sensor 1 20 to 200 C 130 C 45 5 18 P0376 2 Type Sensor 0 PTC Simple 1 PTC Triple 45 5 17 1 PTC Triple 77 Sensor 2 F A Conf See options in P0374 1 Fault Al Cab CFG 45 5 16 P0378 Temper F A Sensor 2 20 to 200 C 130 45 5 18 0379 Sensor 0 Simple 1 Triple 45 5 17 1 PTC Triple P0380 F A Conf See options in PO374 1 Fault Al Cab CFG 45 5 16 P0381 Temper F A Sensor 20 to 200 C 130 45 5 18 P0382 Sensor 0 PTC Simple 1 Triple 45 5 17 1 PTC Triple P0383 Sensor 4 F A Conf 0 Off 1 Fault Al Cab CFG 45 5 16 1 Fault Al Cab 2 Fault Cable 3 Alarm Cable 4 Fault Alarm 5 Fault 6 Alarm 7 Alarm Cable P0384 Temper F A Sensor 4 20 to 200 C 130 45 5 18 P0385 PTC5 Sensor 0 Simple 1 Triple CFG 45 5 1 PTC Triple 0386 Sensor 5 F A Conf See options in P0383 1 Fault Al Cab CFG 45 5 16 P0387 Temper F A Sensor 5 20 to 200 C 130 C 45 5 18 P0388 Temperature Sensor 1 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0389 Temperature Sensor 2 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0390 Temperature Sensor 3 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0391 Temperature Sensor 4 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0392 Temperatu
43. Inactive 12 24 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0192 Status Encoder Zero Search Adjustable 0 Qu Factory Range 1 Finished Setting Properties RO VVW and Vector Access groups 00 ALL PARAMETERS via HMI Description On the inverter initialization this parameter starts on zero When the value is changed to 1 Concluded it indicates that the zero search function was executed and this function returns to the state of Inactive although P0191 continues equal to one Active 12 25 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 26 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs DIGITAL AND ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS This section presents the parameters for the configuration of the CFW 11 inputs and outputs as well as the parameters for the command of the inverter in the Local or Remote Situations 13 1 CONFIGURATION 07 13 1 1 Analog Inputs 38 Two analog inputs All and AI2 are available in the CFW11 standard configuration and two more can be added with the accessories AI3 and Al4 is available at the 01 or IOB 01 modules The input AI3 is only available at the IOB 01 module NOTE The parameters associated with the AI3 and Al4 analog inputs will be showed on the HMI only when the IOA 01 or IOB 01 module is connected into the slot 1 XC41 With those inputs it is possible for instance the use of an external speed reference or the connection of a sensor for the t
44. PID Regulator AND P0217 for 1 AND P0224 programmed for 0 Keys OR P0227 programmed for 0 Keys Dix 0263 0270 programmed for 29 DO2 Timer without DO2 P0276 programmed for 29 Timer 002 P0276 programmed for 29 Timer without PO263 P0270 programmed for 29 DO2 Timer DIx P0263 P0270 programmed for 302 DO3 Timer without P0277 programmed for 29 Timer P0277 programmed for 29 Timer without PO263 P0270 programmed for 30 DO3 Timer P0224 programmed for 1 Dlx OR P0227 programmed for 1 Dlx AND without Dlx PO263 P0270 programmed for 1 Run Stop AND without PO263 P0270 programmed for 2 General Enable AND without PO263 P0270 programmed for 3 Fast Stop AND without PO263 P0270 programmed for 4 FWD Run AND without Dlx PO263 P0270 programmed for 5 REV Run AND without Dlx 263 0270 programmed for 6 3 Wire Start AND without 263 0270 programmed for 7 3 Wire Stop P0202 programmed with 3 Sensorless or 4 Encoder and P0297 0 1 25 kHz P0297 programmed for or 4 in mechanics B and P0296 adjusted between 500 V and 600 V 3 or 4 in mechanics D and P0296 adjusted between 500 V and 690 V 1 2or 3 in mechanics E F or and P0296 adjusted between 500 V and 690 V and in mechanics of the Modular Drive 5 13 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification
45. Set it according to the motor nameplate data and to the motor cable wiring in the connection box This value cannot be higher than the rated voltage adjusted in PO296 Line Rated Voltage NOTE In order to validate a new 400 setting out of the Oriented Start up Routine it is necessary to cycle the power of the inverter P0401 Motor Rated Current Adjustable Oio s Factory Setting Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Set it according to the used motor nameplate data taking into consideration the motor voltage In the Guided Start up routine the value adjusted in PO401 automatically modifies the parameters related to the motor overload protection according to the table 11 2 P0402 Motor Rated Speed Adjustable to 18000 rpm Factory 1750 rpm Range Setting 1458 rpm Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Set it according to the used motor nameplate data For and VVW controls the setting is from O to 18000 rpm For vector control the setting is from O to 7200 rpm 11 11 Vector Control P0403 Motor Rated Frequency Adjustable 0 to 300 Hz Factory 60 Hz Range Setting 50 Hz Properties GEG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Set it according to the used moto
46. Time Enab gt Hx 28 SoftPLC 29 Not Used 30 N gt Nx Nt gt Nx 31 F gt Fx 1 32 F gt Fx 2 33 STO 34 No F160 35 No Alarm 36 No Fault Alarm 37 to 42 Not Used 0279 DO5 Function See options in P0278 0 Not Used CFG 4 3 19 0281 Fx Frequency 0 0 to 300 0 Hz 4 0 Hz 4 3 25 P0282 Fx Hysteresis 0 0 to 15 0 Hz 2 0 Hz 4 3 25 P0283 002 ON Time 0 0 to 300 0 s 0 0 5 4 3 26 P0284 DO2 OFF Time 0 0 to 300 0 s 0 0 5 4 3 26 P0285 ON Time 0 0 to 300 0 s 0 0 5 4 3 26 P0286 DO3 OFF Time 0 0 to 300 0 s 0 0s 4 3 26 P0287 Nx Ny Hysteresis 900 rpm 18 15 rpm 4 3 26 P0288 Nx Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 120 100 rom 4 3 26 P0289 Ny Speed O to 18000 rpm 1800 1500 rpm 4 3 26 P0290 Current O to 2 1 4 3 27 P0291 Zero Speed Zone 0 to 18000 rpm 18 15 rpm 35 41 46 3 27 P0292 N Band 0 to 18000 rpm 18 15 rpm 4 3 27 P0293 Tx Torque 0 to 200 96 100 96 4 3 27 P0294 Hx Time to 6553 h 4320 h 4 3 28 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D uibs P0295 ND HD Rated Curr 0 3 6A 3 6A 09 42 125A 5A 2 6A 5A 7 55 4 7 7 5 10A 8A 6 10 10 7 8 135 9 16 1 17 13 5 24 19 24 20 28 24 31 25 33 5 28 45 A 36A 45 A 38A 54 45 58 5 47 70 56 70 5A 61A 86A 70A 88A 73A 05 A 86A
47. accuracy in the speed control of 0 5 96 of the rated speed high starting torque and fast dynamic response Another advantage of this control type is the greater robustness against sudden line voltage and load changes avoiding unnecessary overcurrent trips The necessary settings for the good operation of the sensorless vector control are done automatically Therefore the used motor must be connected to the CFW 11 inverter Vector Control peeds 53 N 4 20046 h sn Psn 1300W DM cd YOLOW xn 4 b JopojnBey xnj4 621 92764 89108 19 04104 IXOW 99 oj 49484 19108 99 6910d IXOW 1Y i J Pel ae sn puan n enbioj peeds enbJo KYW XIV 4n0j9 7 88 LOd DOA enjpA H9P EQ S8LOd 59108 68104 88104 99 JoppjnBey PdO 99104 29104 9104 99 peeds 00 0 5 001 do 18108 19 98104 do 06104 8 2 y Of 19491 BIUSIB 9y DIO 3410900 Figure 11 1 Sensorless vector control block diagram 11 2 Vector Control The Vector Control with Encoder presents the same advantages of the sensorless control previously described with the following additional benefits Torque and speed control dow
48. item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 for more details Next press Save After this the Self tuning routine is initiated and the SelfTun status is indicated at the top left part of the keypad HMI The keypad HMI will initiate the routine presenting P0409 Estimating Rs Wait until the end of the Self tuning routine Once the Self tuning routine has finished the inverter returns to the Monitoring Mode and it is ready to operate Figure 10 2 VVW mode Oriented Start up cont 10 7 VVW Control Vector Control VECTOR CONTROL It consists in the control type based on the separation of the motor current into two components Flux producing current oriented with the motor electromagnetic flux Torque producing current perpendicular to the motor flux vector The current is related to the motor electromagnetic flux while the current is directly related to the torque produced at the motor shaft With this strategy one gets the so called decoupling i e one can control the motor flux and torque independently by controlling the and currents respectively Since these currents are represented by vectors that rotate at the synchronous speed when observed from a stationary referential a referential transformation is done so that they are changed to the synchronous referential In the synchronous referential these values become DC values proportional the respective vector a
49. ot Used Run Stop General Enable Fast Stop FWD Run REV Run 3 Wire Start 3 Wire Stop FWD REV LOC REM JOG 1 Increase 2 Decrease 3 Not Used 4 Ramp 2 5 Speed Torque 6 7 No Ext Alarm No Ext Fault Reset PLC Use Manual Auto Not Used Disab FlyStart DC Link Regul Progr Off Load User 1 2 Load User 3 DO2 Timer DO3 Timer 31 Trace Function 4 CON O Oi 4 O O WNHNNNNNNNNN 1 Run Stop CFG 20 31 32 33 34 37 40 44 46 13 12 See options in 263 DI2 Function 8 FWD REV CFG 20 31 32 33 34 37 40 44 46 13 12 P0265 DI3 Function See options in PO263 O Not Used CFG 20 31 32 33 34 37 40 44 45 46 13 12 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D Bii 266 014 Function O Not Used O Not Used 20 31 32 13 12 1 Run Stop 33 34 36 2 General Enable 37 40 44 3 Fast Stop 45 46 4 FWD Run 5 REV Run 6 3 Wire Start 7 3 Wire Stop 8 FWD REV 9 LOC REM 0 JOG Increase 2 Decrease 3 Multispeed 4 Ramp 2 5 Speed Torque 6 7 8 Ex Alarm 9 No Ext Fault 20 Reset 2 PLC Use 22 Manual Auto 23 Not Used 24 Disab FlyStart 25 DC Link Regul
50. week and H to year Serial number c Identification label under the keypad HMI Figure 6 1 a to c Identification labels Once the inverter model identification code is verified one must interpret it in order to understand its meaning Refer to the table present in the section 2 4 Identification Labels for the CFW 11 of the CFW 11 user s manual and in the section 2 6 How to Specify the CFW 11M Model Smart Code of the CFW 11M user s manual 6 1 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification 6 1 INVERTER DATA 42 In this group are the parameters related to the inverter information and characteristics such as inverter model accessories identified by the control circuit software version switching frequency etc P0023 Software Version Adjustable 0 00 to 655 35 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description It indicates the software version contained in the FLASH memory of the microcontroller located on the control board P0027 Accessories Configuration 1 P0028 Accessories Configuration 2 Adjustable 0000h to FFFFh Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description Those parameters identity by means of a hexadecimal code the accessories that were found installed on the control module For the accessories installed
51. 1 in LOC and or PO228 1 in REM Battery Figure 4 1 HMI keys The life expectation of the battery is of approximately 10 years In order to remove it rotate the cover located at the back of the keypad HMI Replace the battery when necessary by another of the CR2032 type NOTE r The battery is necessary only for clock related functions In the event of the battery being discharged or not installed in the keypad HMI the clock time becomes incorrect and the alarm A181 Invalid clock value will be indicated every time the inverter is powered Keypad HMI Cover for battery access Press the cover and rotate it Remove the cover counterclockwise Remove the battery with the help HMI without the battery Install the new battery positioning it of a screwdriver positioned in first at the left side the right side Press the battery for its insertion Put the cover back and rotate it clockwise Figure 4 2 HMI battery replacement NOTE At the end of the battery useful life please do not discard batteries in your waste container but use a battery disposal site Programming Basic Instructions PROGRAMMING BASIC INSTRUCTIONS 5 1 PARAMETER STRUCTURE When the right soft key in the monitoring mode Menu is pressed the first 4 parameter groups are showed on the display An example of the parameter group
52. 115 17 4 0922 Profibus Teleg Sel 1 Std Teleg 1 1 Std Teleg 1 CFG 115 17 4 2 Telegram 100 3 Telegram 101 4 Telegram 102 5 Telegram 103 6 Telegram 104 7 Telegram 105 8 Telegram 106 9 Telegram 107 0944 Fault Message Counter 0 to 65535 RO 09 115 17 4 0947 Fault Number 0 to 65535 RO 09 115 17 4 P0963 Profibus Baud Rate 0 9 6 kbit s RO 09 115 17 4 1 19 2 kbit s 2 93 75 kbit s 187 5 kbit s 4 500 kbit s 5 Not Detected 1500 kbit s 7 3000 kbit s 8 6000 kbit s 9 12000 kbit s 10 Reserved 11 45 45 kbit s P0964 Drive Unit Ident 0 to 65535 RO 09 115 17 4 P0965 Profile Ident Number 0 to 65535 RO 09 115 17 4 0 27 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D ipit jur piis P0967 Control Word 1 it 0 OFF 09 115 1 Coast Stop Bit 2 Quick Stop Bit 3 Disable Oper Bit 4 Reset Ramp Bit 5 Freeze Ramp Bit 6 Disable Setpt Bit 7 Fault Ack Bit 8 Jog 1 Bit 9 Jog 2 Bit 10 No PLC Ctrl Bit 11 15 Reserved P0968 Status Word 1 Bit O N Rdy SwitchON RO 09 115 17 4 Bit 1 N Rdy Operate Bit 2 Oper Disabled Bit 3 No Fault Bit 4 CoastStop Act Bit 5 QuickStop Act Bit 6 SwitchOn NotAct Bit 7 No Warning Bit 8 Speed OutOf Range Bit 9 No Ctrl Requested Bit 10 Speed Not Reached Bit 11 15 Reserved P1000 SoftPLC Status 0 No Applicatio
53. 17A 67 20A 17A 68 22A 19A 69 24 21 70 27 22 71 30 24 72 32 27 73 35A 30A 74 44 75 46A 39 A 76 44 E AES ATA 76 79 73A 61A 80 80A 66A 81 100A 85A 82 107 90 83 108 95 84 125 107 85 130A 108 A 86 150 122 87 147 A 127 88 170A 150A 89 195A 165A 90 216 180A 91 289 240A 92 259 225 93 315A 289A 94 312A 259 95 365A 315A 96 365A 312A 97 435 A 357 98 428 355A 99 472 388 100 700 515 101 1330 A 979A 102 1995 1468 A 66 OFAW 104 3325 2446 Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description This parameter presents the inverter rated current for the normal overload regimen ND and for the heavy overload 8 regimen HD The inverter operation mode if it is ND or HD is defined by the content of P0298 P0296 Line Rated Voltage Adjustable 0 2007 240 Factory According to Range 380 V Setting the inverter 2 400 415 model 3 440 460 V 4 480 V 5 500 525 V 6 550 575 7 600 8 660 690 V Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data 6 8 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Description Setting according to the inverter power supply voltage The adjustable range
54. 2 P0029 Power Hardware Configuration Refer to the section 6 1 Inverter Data 16 5 Read Only Parameters 09 P0030 U Arm IGBT Temperature P0031 V Arm IGBT Temperature P0032 W Arm IGBT Temperature P0033 Rectifier Temperature P0034 Internal Air Temperature Refer to the section 15 3 Protections P0036 Heatsink Fan Speed Adjustable 15000 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the heatsink fan actual speed in revolutions per minute rpm P0037 Motor Overload Status Adjustable 100 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the actual overload percentage of the motor When this parameter reaches 100 the fault Motor Overload 072 will occur P0038 Encoder Speed Adjustable 0 to 65535 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the encoder actual speed in revolutions per minute rpm through a 0 5 second filter 6 6 Read Only Parameters 09 P0039 Encoder Pulses Count Adjustable 40000 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description This parameter shows the counting of the pulses of the encoder The counting can be increased fro
55. 2 32 to 127 32 46 20 14 P0532 Proc V Eng Unit 32 to 127 32 46 20 14 P0533 PVx Value 0 0 to 100 0 96 90 0 96 46 20 14 P0534 PVy Value 0 0 to 100 0 96 10 0 96 46 20 14 P0535 Wake Up Band 0 100 96 0 35 46 20 15 P0536 0525 Autom Setting 0 Off 2On CFG 46 20 15 1 On P0538 Hysteresis VPx VPy 0 0 to 5 0 1 0 46 20 15 0 22 P0550 Trigger Signal Source O Not selected 1 Speed Refer 2 Motor Speed 3 Motor Current 4 DC Link Volt 5 Motor Freq 6 Motor Voltage 7 Motor Torque 8 Process Var 9 Setpoint PID Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms O Not selected 10 11 12 12 AI3 13 P0551 Trigger Level 100 0 to 340 0 96 0 0 96 52 19 1 P0552 Trigger Condition P0550 P0551 5 Fault 52 19 2 1 P0550 lt gt 0551 2 P0550 gt P0551 3 P0550 P0551 4 Alarm 5 Fault 6 Dix P0553 Trace Sampling Period 11065535 1 52 19 3 P0554 Trace Pre Trigger O to 100 96 0 52 19 3 P0559 Max Memory O to 100 96 0 52 19 3 P0560 Trace Avail Memory O to 100 96 RO 52 19 4 P0561 Trace Channel 1 CH1 O Not selected 1 Speed Refer 52 19 4 1 Speed Refer 2 Motor Speed 3 Motor Current 4 DC Link Volt 5 Motor Freq 6 Motor Voltage 7 Motor Torque 8 Process Var 9 S
56. 20 P0698 Value 21 P0699 Value 22 23 Id Current P0257 AOG Function P0260 AO4 Function Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI peed Reference otal Reference eal Speed orque Current Reference orque Current utput Current rocess Variable ctive Current utput Power D Setpoint rque Current gt 0 otor Torque oftPLC ot Used ot Used ot Used otor lxt ncoder Speed 0696 Value 0697 Value 0698 Value 21 P0699 Value 22 Not Used POEM eni 24 to 71 Variables for use in s ROUES TE O CO CO O OO CO ae as Ho mm E NE NEEDED OE E F E E E E technical personnel Refer to the Quic 0 O CONFIGURATION 251 2 0254 5 Factory Setting Factory P0257 2 Setting 0260 5 c situations by qualified Parameter Reference 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs 13 7 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Description These parameters set the functions of the analog outputs according to the table 13 3 Table 13 3 Analog output functions P0251 2 P0254 2 P0257 P0260 AO3 4 7 Not Used 20 D a I 13 14 15 13 14 15 and 22 and 22
57. 25 times the motor nominal current PO401 adjust in the Oriented Start up menu The maximum allowed value for 0398 Motor Service Factor is 1 15 Parameters P0156 P0157 and P0158 Overload Current at 100 96 50 and 5 of the rated speed respectively are automatically adjusted when the parameter PO401 Motor Rated Current and or P0406 Motor Ventilation are adjusted in the Oriented Start up menu If the parameters P0156 P0157 and P0158 are manually adjusted the maximum allowed value for those parameters is 1 05 x 401 15 2 MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION ATTENTION The PTC must have a reinforced insulation against the live parts of the motor and of the installation This protection performs the motor overtemperature protection by means of the alarm A110 and the fault 078 indication The motor must have a PTC type temperature sensor An analog output supplies constant current for the 2 mA while an inverter analog input reads the voltage across the PTC and compares it with the limit values for fault and alarm Refer to the table 15 1 When those values are exceeded the alarm or fault indication occurs The analog outputs AO1 and AO2 ofthe control module as well as the analog outputs existent on the accessory modules AO 1 B and AO2 B can be used to supply the constant current for the PTC Therefore it is necessary to configure the DIP switches of the output for current and to set t
58. 5 14 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification INVERTER MODEL AND ACCESSORIES IDENTIFICATION In order to identity the model of the inverter verity the code existent on the product identification labels the complete one located at the side of the inverter or the abbreviated one under the keypad HMI The figures below show examples of those labels meg CFW11 model gt moD BRCFW110242148Z E 03H WEG part number 11270533 SERIAL 1234567890 OP 12345678 MAX 45 113 Inverter net weight gt Input rated data voltage number of phases rated currents for operation with ND and HD overload regimens and frequency Current specifications for operation with 3 normal overload regimen ND Current specifications for operation with heavy overload regimen HD FABRICADO NO BRASIL HECHO EN BRASIL MADE IN BRAZIL d 0 IND CONT EQ 242A 211A LISTED 2599 7 Manufacturing date 03 corresponds to week and H to year Serial Number lt Maximum environment temperature Output rated data voltage number of phases rated currents for normal overload regimen ND and heavy overload regimen HD over load currents for 1 min and 3 s and frequency range a Identification label at the side of the inverter for the models in cabinet CFW 11 CFW11M model WEG part number
59. 580 V Supply voltage 500 575 V P0296 6 Ud 605 V Supply voltage 600 V P0296 7 Ud 696 V Supply voltage 660 690 V P0296 8 Phase loss in the input power supply Pre charge circuit failure Parameter P0296 was set to a value above of the power supply rated voltage F022 DC Bus Overvoltage DC bus overvoltage condition occurred a The input voltage is too high and the DC bus voltage surpassed the maximum permitted value Ud gt 400 V For 220 230 V input models 0296 0 Ud gt 800 V For 380 480 V input models 0296 1 2 3 or 4 Ud gt 1000 V For 500 600 V input models PO296 5 6 and 7 Ud gt 1200 V For 660 690 V P0296 8 Inertia of the driven load is too high or deceleration time is too short Wrong settings for parameters P0151 or P0153 or 185 2030 8 Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module U Short circuit between motor phases U and V or U W Power Module U Fault 2034 03 Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module V Short circuit between motor phases V and U or V and W Power Module V Fault F038 13 Desaturation of IGBT occured in Power Module W Short circuit between motor phases W and U or W and V Power Module W Fault F042 9 Desaturation of Dynamic Braking IGBT occured Short circuit between the connection cables of the DB IGBT Fault dynamic braking resistor A046 Load is too high for the used mot
60. 690 V 575 V 0296 6 0 to 690 V 600 V 0296 7 O to 690 V 690 V 296 8 P0191 Encoder Zero Search 0 Of 0 Of VVW 12 24 On and Vector P0192 Status Encoder Zero Search 0 Off 0 Off RO V f VVW 12 25 1 Finished and Vector P0193 Day of the Week 0 Sunday 0 Sunday 30 5 3 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday P0194 Day 01 to 31 01 z 30 5 3 P0195 Month 01 to 12 01 30 5 3 0196 Year 00 to 99 06 30 5 4 P0197 Hour 00 to 23 00 30 5 4 0198 Minutes 00 to 59 00 30 5 4 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms iure jus niis COE cor P0199 Seconds 0 0 to 59 P0200 Password 2 Change Pass P0201 Language Portugu s English Espa ol Deutsch Fran ais 0 Portugu s 30 5 5 P0202 Type of Control V f 60 Hz V f 50 V f Sensorless Encoder VYW Encoder PM Sensorless PM 0 V f 60 Hz CFG 05 23 24 25 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 9 5 P0203 Special Function Sel one PID Regulator 0 None CFG 46 20 10 P0204 Load Save Parameters ot Used ot Used Reset P0045 Reset P0043 Reset 44 Load 60Hz Load 50Hz Load User 1 ser 2 Load User 3 0 Save User 1 1 Save User 2 2 Save User 3 Won r 0 Not Used 06 7 1 P0205 Rea
61. 7 ncompatibility between Parameters STO STO t indicates that the Safety Stop is active the 24Vdc voltage from the safety relays coils has been removed P0007 Motor Voltage Adjustable 2000 V Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the line voltage estimated in the output of the inverter in Volts V P0009 Motor Torque Adjustable 1000 0 to 1000 0 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the torque developed by the motor calculated as follows 16 3 Read Only Parameters 09 P0009 Inx 100 Y P0410 x POI 1 P0202 3 oso goza in or VVW the adjusts are P0178 100 and P0190 0 95 x P0400 2 P0202 3 x P0178 p P0190 x N Y 1 forN lt P0400 N P0190 0190 Sinc f Sinc rN gt N P0400 P0400 Where N a Motor synchronous speed N Motor actual speed Motor torque current Rated motor torque current P0010 Output Power Adjustable 0 0 to 6553 5 kW Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the electric power in the inverter output This power is determined through the formula P0010 1 732 x P0003 x P0007
62. 73 FueRegulater 92 sos 21 9 21 7 4 Torque Current Limitation 95 2 1 0 000000000 ee 21 10 21 7 5 DG link Regulator 96 tet et rat e d RR ag 21 11 21 7 6 Flying Start Ride Through 441 22022 21 11 21 4 DC Braking A7 erre 21 12 21 7 8 Encoder Zero Position 22 2 9 21 12 21 8 PM Vector Control Mode 222 2 2 2 lt enne 21 12 21 9 Faulis aind Alarms octo A uere n eere Ut eue ts Uo sages ie eee 21 17 21 10 Read only Parameters 09 teet ts 21 17 2 111 Speed UM UII E 21 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Access to Parameters 0 to 9999 P0001 Speed Reference 0 to 18000 rpm RO 09 16 1 P0002 Motor Speed O to 18000 rpm RO 09 16 1 P0003 Motor Current 0 0 to 4500 0 A RO 09 16 2 P0004 DC Link Voltage U 0 to 2000 V RO 09 16 2 P0005 Motor Frequency 0 0 to 1020 0 Hz RO 09 16 2 P0006 VFD Status 0 Ready RO 09 16 2 1 Run 2 Undervoltage 3 Fault 4 Self Tuning 5 Configuration 6 DC Braking 7 STO P0007 Motor Voltage 0 to 2000 V RO 09 16 3 P0009 Motor Torque 1000 0 to 1000 0 RO 09 16 3 and 21 17 P0010 Output Power 0 0 to 6553 5 kw RO 09 16 4 P0011 Output Cos phi 0 00 to 1 00 RO 09 16 5
63. 9 E d r MOD UP11 01 REV C MAT 12345678 12345678 PESOMWEIGHT 158kg 350 56 Inverter net weigh Input rated data voltage number of phases rated currents for operation with ND and HD 574 890VDC overload regimens and frequency ND 1865A 1622A 60 5 35 517 705A Current specifications for operation with normal overload regimen ND Current specifications for operation with heavy overload regimen HD 1370A 418A 627A 836A 758 1025VDC 0 0 7 1 VDC V C 3 480A 427A 470A 640A 390A 340A 60 5 35 510 680 50 60Hz 0 300Hz FABRICADO NO BRASIL HECHO EN BRASIL MADE IN BRAZIL Gu IND CONT EQ 2599 Hz Manufacturing date dio 42 corresponds to week and H to year SERIALE 1234567890 4 3 Serial Number 45 113 F Maximum environment temperature Output rated data voltage number of phases rated currents for normal overload regimen ND and heavy overload regimen HD over load currents for 1 min and 3 s and frequency range b CFW 11M identification label which is attached inside the panel where the inverter is installed CFW11 model BRCFW110242T4SZ WEG part number gt 11270533 lt SERIAL 1234567980 lt 5 Manufacturing date 03 corresponds to
64. BASIC APPLICATION torque boost Presented in details in the CFW 11 user s manual at section 5 2 3 Setting Basic Application Parameters SELF TUNING Access parameter P0408 and estimated parameters Parameters related to functions of parameter copy via FLASH Memory Module keypad HMI and BACKUP PARAMETERS software update CONFIGURATION Groups related to digital and analog inputs and outputs 08 FAULT HISTORY Parameters with information on the 10 last faults o READ ONLY PARAMS Parameters used only for reading 5 3 PASSWORD SETTING IN P0000 POOOO Access to Parameters Adjustable O to 9999 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 00 ALL PARAMETERS via HMI In order to be able to change the content of the parameters it is necessary to set correctly the password in P0000 as indicated below Otherwise the content of the parameters can only be visualized It is possible to customize the password by means of PO200 Refer to the description of this parameter in the section 5 4 HMI of this manual Action Result Display Indication Monitoring Mode Press Menu right soft key The group 00 ALL PARAMETERS is already selected Press Select The parameter Access to Parameters P0000 0 is already selected Press Select In order to set the password press until the number 5 appears on the display 21 PARAMETER GROUPS me ORIENTED START UP 83
65. Description This parameter defines the value of the maximum output voltage Its default value is defined for the condition of the nominal supply voltage The voltage reference used in the Maximum Output Voltage regulator is directly proportional to the supply voltage If the supply voltage increases the output voltage can increase up to the value adjusted in the parameter P0400 Nominal Motor Voltage If the supply voltage decreases the output voltage will decrease in the same proportion Parameters from 0175 to 189 are inactive 21 7 4 Torque Current Limitation 95 P0169 Maximum Torque Current P0170 Maximum Torque Current Adjustable 0 0 to 350 0 Factory 125 0 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 95 Torque Curr Limit Description These parameters limit the value of the motor current component that produces positive torque P0169 and negative torque PO170 The setting is expressed in percentage of the motor rated current P0401 In case that any Analog Input Alx is programmed for the option 2 Maximum Torque Current 169 and 170 become inactive and the current limitation will be given by the Alx In this case the limitation value can be monitored at the parameter correspondent to the programmed Alx P0018 P0021 In the torque limitation co
66. Display Indication Seq Action Result Display Indication If necessary change the content of P0400 according to the motor rated voltage Therefore press Select This change corrects the output voltage by the factor x P0400 P0296 If necessary change the content of PO401 according to the motor rated current Therefore press Select This change will affect P0156 P0157 P0158 and P0410 If necessary change the content of 402 according to the motor rated speed Therefore press Select This change will affect P0122 to P0131 133 P0134 P0182 PO208 P0288 and P0289 f necessary change the content of P0403 according to the motor rated frequency Therefore press Select If necessary change the content of P0404 according to the motor rated power Therefore press Select This change will affect P0410 If necessary change the content of PO406 according 1o the motor ventilation type Therefore press 7 2 This change will affect P0156 P0157 158 P0399 and P0407 If necessary change the content of P0407 according to the motor rated power factor Therefore press Select At this point the keypad HMI presents the option for running the Self tuning Whenever it is possible one must run the Thus press Select to access the parameter P0408 and then to select the option 001 No Rotation Refer to the
67. HMI 52 Trace Function Description It shows the amount of memory available for storing Trace Function points The range from O to 100 96 indicates that from O to 15 KB are available for the Trace Function Sharing of memory with the SoftPLC The memory for the Trace Function is shared with the memory for the SoftPLC applicative If P1000 0 there is no SoftPLC applicative it is possible to use all the memory area for the Trace Function In this case P0559 P0560 If P1000 gt 0 there is SoftPLC applicative in the inverter PO560 will show the smallest value between P0559 and the actual available memory that will be 100 96 minus the memory used by the SoftPLC applicative In order to be able to use the Trace Function the user must adjust P0559 with a value greater than O 96 and equal or less than the P0560 indication If P0559 gt P0560 and the user wishes to use more memory for the Trace Function then the SofPLC applicative must be erased by means of the parameter P1001 CN NOTE If P0559 gt P0560 then distortion in the observed signals may occur Function then the SoftPLC applicative must be erased by means of the parameter P1001 P0561 CH1 Trace channel 1 P0562 CH2 Trace channel 2 P0563 CH3 Trace channel 3 19 4 Trace Function 52 P0564 CH4 Trace channel 4 Adjustable Range Not selected Factory P0561 1 Speed Reference Setting 0562 2 Motor Speed
68. IGBT W Bl High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 1 W phase F307 00 Overtemperature at IGBT W BI Overtemperature fault measured with sensor NTC of the book 1 W phase he temperature GBT A309 19 igh Temperature at IGBT U B2 F310 10 Overtemperature at IGBT U B2 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT Overtemperature fault measured with h the 2 U phase he temperature sensor NTC of the book 2 U phase IGBT A312 09 igh Temperature at IGBT VB2 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 2 V phase 2313 19 Overtemperature at IGBT VB2 Overtemperature fault measured with he temperature sensor NTC of the book 2 V phase IGBT A315 19 High Temperature at IGBT W B2 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 2 W phase 16 4 Overtemperature at IGBT W B2 Overtemperature fault measured with sensor NTC of the book 2 W phase he temperature GBT A318 09 igh Temperature at IGBT U B3 F319 09 Overtemperature at IGBT U B3 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT Overtemperature fault measured with h the 3 U phase he temperature sensor NTC of the book 3 U phase IGBT A321 09 igh Tempera
69. Programming Basic Instructions Sel Parameler le Uc eter deed re ern tdt rete tn 5 1 5 2 Groups Accessed the Option Menu in the Monitoring 5 2 5 3 Password Setting ini eio tt t ROO RE RR ERR RR OR RERO ERREUR 5 2 5 4 HMI 30 ccc 5 3 5 5 Daltexapd Time carted 5 9 5 6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings 22 2 2 5 10 5 7 Incompatibility Between Parameters sse eene enne nenne nennen nennen 5 12 Chapter 6 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification 6 1 Inverter Data 42 Summary Chapter 7 Starting Up and Settings 721 Backop Parameters 06 cies 05s tete ttti in e date e RR ende 7 1 Chapter 8 Available Control Types Ball COMO immessi ee eme 8 1 9 Scalar Control V f Ol Vi I IE 9 2 9 2 Adjustable 2 4 tet te eei eae edt ede i 9 6 9 3 VA Current Limitation 26 cotes tote 9 7 9 4 VA DG Voeliage Limitation 27 inis citer 9 10 9 5 Start up in the Control 400000 00202 00000 000 9 13 Chapter 10 VVW Control omissam 10 3 10 2 Motor Data 31 9 10 3 10 3 VVW Control Mode riis e
70. The P0409 setting determines the value of the current regulator integral gain PO168 The parameter P0168 is recalculated every time the content of P0409 is modified via keypad HMI P0410 Motor Magnetizing Current I Adjustable Factory Setting Dor Properties V f VVW and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning Description It is the motor magnetizing current value which is automatically adjusted by the self tuning section 11 3 Self tuning Its value can also be obtained on the motor data sheet item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet It can be estimated by the self tuning routine when 408 2 Run for or obtained from an internal table based in standard WEG motors when P0408 1 No rotation When a standard WEG motor is not used and it is not possible to run the self tuning with PO408 2 Run for then adjust 410 with a value equal to the motor no load current before initiating the self tuning For 202 4 vector mode with encoder the value P0410 determines the motor flux therefore it must be properly adjusted If it is low the motor will operate with a reduced flux compared to the rated condition having consequently its torque capability reduced 11 25 Vector Control P0411 Motor Flux Leakage Inductance
71. Unit 3 Adjustable 32 to 127 Factory P0530 37 Range Setting 0531 32 P0532 32 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description The process variable engineering unit is composed of three characters which will be applied to the indication of the parameters P0040 and P0041 The parameter P0530 defines the left most character P0531 the center and P0532 the right most The characters that can be chosen correspond to the ASCII code 32 to 127 Examples A B 2 a b z 0 1 9 To indicate bar To indicate 96 P0530 b 98 530 37 P0531 97 0531 32 P0532 r 114 0532 32 P0533 PVx Process Variable P0534 PVy Process Variable Adjustable 0 0 to 100 0 96 Factory P0533 90 0 96 Range Setting P0534 10 0 96 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description Those parameters are used in the functions of the digital relay outputs with the purpose of signalizing alarm and they will indicate Process Variable gt VPx and Process Variable VPy The values are in percentage of the process variable full scale 1 0 529 P0040 P5058 100 96 PID Regulator 46 P0535 Wake Up Band Adjustable O to 100 96 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L 46
72. V 20 mA to O 3 2010 4 mA P0234 All Offset 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 38 95 13 4 P0235 Filter 0 00 to 16 00 s 0 00 s 38 95 13 4 P0236 12 Signal Function See options in P0231 0 Speed Ref CFG 38 95 13 2 P0237 AI2 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 38 95 13 4 P0238 AI2 Signal 0 0 to 10 V 20 mA 0 0 38 95 13 5 1 41020 mA 10 20 2 10 V 20 mA to O 20 to 4 mA 4 10to 10V P0239 Al2 Offset 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 38 95 13 4 240 2 Filter 0 00 to 16 00 s 0 00 s 38 95 134 P0241 AI3 Signal Function See options in P0231 0 Speed Ref CFG 38 95 13 2 P0242 AI3 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 38 95 13 4 PO243 AI3 Signal Type 0 10 V 20 mA 0 0 38 95 13 5 1 410 20 10 V 20 mA 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 2010 4 mA P0244 AI3 Offset 100 00 to 100 00 96 0 00 96 38 95 13 4 P0245 Filter 0 00 to 16 00 s 0 00 s 38 95 13 4 P0246 Signal Function 0 Speed Ref O Speed Ref CFG 38 95 13 3 1 N Ramp Ref 2 Max Torque Cur 3 Process Var 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 PLC Use Use P0247 Al4 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms 1 000 38 95 13 4 P0248 Al4 Signal Type 0 Oto 10 V 20mA 1 4 to 20 mA 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 20 to 4 mA 4 10 10 0 0 10 V 20 mA CFG 38 95 13 5 P0249 Al4 Offset 100 00 to 100 00 0 00 38
73. Voltage V function of sU the motor 4 gt E AF load Figure 9 6 V f curve with slip compensation For the adjustment of the parameter 0138 to compensate the motor slip a Run the motor with no load at approximately half the working speed b Measure the motor or equipment speed with a tachometer c Apply rated load to the equipment C d Increase the content of P0138 until the speed reaches the value measured before with no load P0139 Output Current Filter Active Adjustable 0 0 to 16 0 s Factory 0 25 Range Setting Properties V t and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 V t Control Description It sets the active current filter time constant It is used in the Automatic Torque Boost and Slip Compensation functions Refer to the figures 9 3 and 9 5 It sets the response time of the Slip Compensation and of the Automatic Torque Boost Refer to the figures 9 3 and 9 5 9 4 Scalar Control V f P0140 Dwell Time at Start Adjustable 0 0 to 10 0 s Factory 0 05 Range Setting P0141 Dwell Speed at Start Adjustable 300 rpm Factory 90 rpm Range Setting Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 V t Control Description 0140 sets the time during which the speed is kept constant during the acceleration Refer to the figure 9 7 0141 sets the speed step during th
74. according to that curve It is possible to adjust this curve to standard 50 Hz or 60 Hz motors or to special ones through the adjustable V f curve Refer to the block diagram at the figure 9 1 The advantage of the V f control is that due to its simplicity just a few settings are necessary The start up is fast and simple and the factory settings require generally few or no modifications 0202 of Control 202 0 or 1 V f V A PWM P0136 Total Reference Speed Refer to figure 13 8 V 4 P0202 2 Adjustable 0146 P0145 Speed V Reference Output Current e9 P0137 Automatic Torque BOOST Slip Compensation Speed active P0139 Figure 9 1 V f control block diagram The V f or scalar control is recommended for the following cases Operation of several motors with the same inverter multimotor operation The motor rated current is less than 1 3 of the inverter rated current The inverter is for test purposes enabled without motor or with a small motor and no load The scalar control can also be used in applications that do neither require fast dynamic response nor accuracy in the speed regulation and also do not require high starting torque the speed error is a function of the motor slip and by programming the parameter P0138 Slip Compensation it is possible to get a accuracy of approximately 1 96 at the rated speed with the load
75. an area of the control module EEPROM memory or the other way around to load the contents of that area into the parameters It also allows resetting the Time Enabled P0043 kWh P0044 and Fan Enabled Time 0045 counters The table 7 1 describes the actions performed by each option 7 1 Starting up and Settings 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 11 12 Table 7 1 Parameter 204 options Action Not Used no action Reset P0045 resets the enabled fan hour counter Reset P0043 resets the enabled hours counter Reset P0044 resets the kWh counter Load 60 Hz loads the 60 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters Load 50 Hz loads the 50 Hz factory settings into the inverter parameters Load User 1 loads the User 1 parameters into the current inverter parameters Load User 2 loads the User 2 parameters into the current inverter parameters Load User 3 loads the User 3 parameters into the current inverter parameters Save User 1 saves the current inverter parameters into the User 1 parameter memory Save User 2 saves the current inverter parameters into the User 2 parameter memory Save User 3 saves the current inverter parameters into the User 3 parameter memory User zi Memory 1 Q SP Current P0204 5 or 6 inverter ET Factory parameters Setting 29 User m User Memory 3 Memory 2 Figure 7 1 Parameter transfer In order to load parameters from User 1 User 2 and or User to the CFW 11
76. are estimated with the application of voltages and currents to the motor The parameters related to the regulators used by the vector control as well as other control parameters are adjusted automatically in function of the motor parameters estimated through the self tuning routine The best self tuning results are obtained with a preheated motor The parameter P0408 controls the self tuning routine Depending on the chosen option some parameters be obtained from tables that are valid for WEG motors In the option PO408 1 No Rotation the motor remains stopped throughout the self tuning The magnetizing current value P0410 is obtained from a table valid for WEG motors up to 12 poles In the option 408 2 Run for the value of P0410 is estimated with the motor rotating and the load decoupled from the motor shaft In the option PO408 3 Run for the value of PO413 Mechanic time constant is estimated with the motor rotating It must be done preferably with the load coupled to the motor Vector Control 6 NOTE B Every time that PO408 1 or 2 the parameter P0413 Mechanic time constant T_ will be adjusted for a value close to the motor rotor mechanic time constant Therefore the motor rotor inertia table data valid for WEG motors the inverter rated voltage and current are taken into consideration 0408 2 Run for in the vector with encoder mode P0202 4 After finishing the
77. between the reference and the speed and improves the torque response at low speeds as well 11 16 Vector Control Procedure for Manual Optimization of the Speed Regulator 1 Select the acceleration PO100 and or deceleration PO101 time according to the application 2 Adjust the speed reference for 75 96 of the maximum value 3 Configure an analog output AOx for Real Speed by programming P0251 P0254 P0257 or P0260 in 2 4 Disable the speed ramp Run Stop Stop and wait until the motor stops 5 Enable the speed ramp Run Stop Run Observe with an oscilloscope the motor speed signal at the chosen analog output 6 Verity among the options of the figure 11 4 which waveform best represents the observed signal N V Small integral gain P0162 e b Optimized speed c High integral gain PO162 or high proportional gain PO161 regulator or small proportional gain PO161 Figure 11 4 a to c Speed regulators response types 7 Adjust PO161 and PO162 according to the response type presented in the figure 11 4 a Reduce the proportional gain PO161 and or increase the integral gain PO162 b Speed regulator is optimized C Increase the proportional gain and or reduce the integral gain In the sensorless vector control mode the maximum typical values for proportional gain PO161 must not be greater than 9 0 If that happens strange behaviors of the motor may be observed such as motor remains still
78. bits s 1 19200 bits s 2 38400 bits s 3 57600 bits s P0311 Serial Bytes Config O 8 bits no 1 3 8 bits no 2 CFG 113 17 1 1 8 bits 1 2 8 bits odd 1 3 8 bits no 2 4 8 bits even 2 5 8 bits odd 2 P0312 Serial Protocol a TP 2 Modbus RTU CFG 113 17 1 2 Modbus P0313 Comm Error Action 0 0 Off 11 17 4 1 Ramp Stop 2 General Disab 3 Go to LOC 4 LOC Keep Enab 5 Cause Fault P0314 Serial Watchdog 0 0 to 999 0 s 0 05 113 17 1 0316 Serial Interf Status 0 Off RO 09 113 17 1 2 Watchdog Error P0317 Oriented Start up 0 No 0 02 10 6 Yes 11 32 P0318 Copy Function MemCard 0 Off 0 Off CFG 06 7 2 and VFD MemCard 11 32 2 MemCard VFD P0319 Copy Function HMI 0 Off 0 Off 06 7 3 VFD 5 HMI 2 HMI VFD P0320 FlyStart Ride Through 0 Off 0 Off CFG 44 12 11 Flying Start 2 FS RT 3 Ride Through P0321 DC Link Power Loss 78 to 282 V 252 V PO296 0 Vector 44 12 18 308 to 616 V 436 V 0296 1 and 308 to 616 V 459 V 0296 2 21 11 308 to 616 V 505 0296 3 308 to 616 V 551 V P0296 4 425 to 737 V 602 V 0296 5 425 to 737 V 660 V PO296 6 486 to 885 V 689 PO296 7 486 to 885 V 792 V P0296 8 P0322 DC Link Ride Through 178 to 282 V 245 V PO296 0 Vector 44 12 18 308 to 616 V 423 V 296 1 and 308 to 616 V 446 V P0296 2 21 11 308 to 616 V 490 V 0296 3 30
79. defined by 3 4 x P0402 Output speed Output speed aden inu chess sree 0133 Speed Reference Speed Reference 10V 0133 P0134 Figure 12 3 a Speed limits considering the Dead Zone inactive PO230 0 Output speed P0134 Ly P0134 Output speed P0133 P0133 Speed Reference Speed Reference 410V 0 P0133 ss 20 mA V YA ii ete teet 20 mA P0134 2 20 4 mA Figure 12 3 b Speed limits considering the Dead Zone active P0O230 1 12 6 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 4 MULTISPEED 36 The MULTISPEED function is used when one wishes to have up to 8 predefined fixed speeds which are commanded through the digital inputs DI4 DI5 and DI6 P0124 Multispeed Reference 1 Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory 90 rpm Range Setting 75 rpm P0125 Multispeed Reference 2 Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 300 rpm Range Setting 250 rpm P0126 Multispeed Reference 3 Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 600 rpm Range Setting 500 rpm P0127 Multispeed Reference 4 Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 900 rpm Range Setting 750 rpm P0128 Multispeed Reference 5 Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 1200 rpm Range Setting 1000 rpm P0129 Multispeed Reference 6 Adjustable 0 18000 rpm Factory 1500 rpm Range Setting 1250 rpm P0130 Mu
80. depends on the inverter model according to the table 6 8 which also presents the factory default value iy NOTE When adjusted via the keypad HMI this parameter may change automatically the following parameters P0151 P0153 P0185 P0190 P0321 P0322 P0323 and P0400 NOTE When changed from P0296 5 6 or 7 to P0296 8 or vice versa following parameters could be changed automatically P0029 P0135 P0156 P0157 P0158 P0290 P0295 P0297 V P0401 and P0410 J Table 6 8 0296 setting according to the CFW 11 inverter model Inverter Model Adjustable Range Renee Setting 200 240 V 200 240 V 1 380 V 2 400 415V 3 440 460 V 380 480 V 4 480 V 5 500 525 V 500 600 V 6 550 575 V 7 600 V 660 690 V 3 660 690 V 40 0 P0297 Switching Frequency Adjustable 0 1 25 n Factory 2 Range 1 2 5 Hn Setting 2 50 ilz 3 10 0 kay 4 2 0 kHz Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description Refer to the allowed current for switching frequencies different from the default in the tables available in chapter 8 Technical Specifications of the CFW 11 user s manual The inverter switching frequency can be adjusted according to the needs of the application Higher switching frequencies imply in lower motor acoustic noise however the selection of the switching frequency r
81. fault or alarm actuation levels and the level that allows their reset Sensor 1 temperature fault Sensor 2 temperature fau Sensor 3 temperature fau Sensor 4 temperature fau Sensor 5 temperature fau Sensor 1 temperature alarm Sensor 2 temperature alarm Sensor 3 temperature alarm Sensor 4 temperature alarm Sensor 1 broken cab Sensor 2 broken cab Sensor 3 broken cab uU Sensor 5 temperature alarm 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 Sensor 4 broken cab A200 Sensor 5 broken cab Table 15 9 Fault and alarm actuation levels Description 7 Aduation _____ Q P0373 0 Re gt 1 3 P0373 1 Re gt 4 PT100 and KTY84 P0388 gt P0375 P0376 0 Rae gt 1 3 P0376 1 Re gt 4 PT100 and KTY84 P0389 gt P0378 P0379 0 Rae gt 1 30 P0379 1 gt 4 100 and KTY84 P0390 gt P0381 P0382 0 8 gt 1 3 P0382 1 gt 4 100 84 P0391 gt P0384 P0385 0 8 gt 1 3 P0385 1 Rc gt 4 PT100 and KTYB4 P0392 gt P0387 P0373 0 8 gt 1 3 P0373 1 1 gt 4 PT100 and KTY84 P0388 gt P0375 1 P0376 0 Rae 1 30 P0376 1 gt 4 100 84 89 gt 78 0379 0 Lge P0379 1 Rc gt 4 PTC PT100 and KTY84 P0390 gt P0381 1 P0382 0 gt 13 P0382 1 Rc gt 4
82. feeding current so that the developed torque is smooth The CFW 11 is prepared to drive Wmagnet line motors which present a salient pole construction interior magnets Flat pole motors surface magnets and motors from other manufactures can be used upon consultation Main characteristics of the Wmagnet motor line Lq inductance bigger than the Ld because of the rotor saliencies that generate the reluctance torque Field weakening range broad 1 2 x the nominal speed More protection of the magnets against centrifugal force Higher efficiency than the induction motor it does not present RI losses in the rotor which allows higher temperature rise less volume and less weight If compared to an equivalent induction motor the Wmagnet motor volume can be up to 47 96 less resulting in a high volume torque ratio and a reduction of 36 96 in the weight For an identical torque power ratio by reducing the frame size the ventilation system is also reduced The Wmagnet motors can be used where speed variation with constant torque and high efficiency are required for instance with compressors exhausting fans pumps and conveyors They can also be used in lifts where the precise control at low speeds smooth torque low vibration and low noise levels are fundamental 21 2 SENSORLESS PM CONTROL AND PM WITH ENCODER The vector control developed for driving the Wmagnet motor line has a structure very similar to the one used f
83. flow and the maximum output flow A formula for calculating the PO521 initial value in function of the system response time is presented next 521 0 02 1 Where t time in seconds P0523 PID Ramp Time Adjustable 0 0 to 999 0 s Factory 3 05 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description This parameter adjusts the ramp time of the setpoint used in the PID regulator function The ramp prevents abrupt setpoint transitions to reach the PID regulator The factory setting time 3 0 s is normally adequate for the majority of the applications as those listed in the table 20 3 20 11 PID Regulator 46 P0524 PID Feedback Selection Adjustable 0 1 1 2 Setting 2 8 3 4 Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description It selects the regulator feedback input process variable After choosing the feedback input the function of the selected input must be programmed at P0231 for P0236 for AI2 PO241 for AI3 or PO246 for P0525 Keypad PID Setpoint Adjustable 0 0 to 100 0 Factory 0 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L 46 PID Regulator Description This parameter allows the setting of the PID Regulator setpoint through the HMI keys provided that 221 0
84. from rpm to another unit through P0209 P0210 and P0211 as well as the scale by means of P0208 and P0212 It is also possible to change the speed reference PO121 through this parameter when P0221 or PO222 0 P0002 Motor Speed Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description This parameter indicates the motor actual speed value in rpm factory setting with a 0 5 second filter The indication unit can be modified from rpm to another unit through P0209 P0210 and P0211 as well as the scale by means of P0208 and PO212 It is also possible to change the speed reference PO121 through this parameter when P0221 or PO222 0 Read Only Parameters 09 P0003 Motor Current Adjustable 0 0 to 4500 0 A Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the inverter output current in Amps A P0004 DC Link Voltage U Adjustable 2000 V Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the DC Link actual voltage in volts 5 Motor Frequency Adjustable 0 0 to 1020 0 Hz Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the inverter output frequency in Hertz Hz P0006 I
85. generate the total reference refer to the figure 13 8 For the JOG option refer to the previous parameter description 12 3 SPEED LIMITS 22 The parameters of this group have the purpose of acting as motor speed limits P0132 Maximum Overspeed Level Adjustable O to 100 96 Factory 10 Range Setting Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 22 Speed Limits Description This parameter sets the highest speed allowed for the motor to operate and must be adjusted as a percentage of the maximum speed limit PO134 When the actual speed exceeds the value of PO134 P0132 longer than 20 ms the CFW 11 will disable the PWM pulses and indicate the fault F150 In order to disable this function set 132 100 96 12 5 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0133 Minimum Speed Reference Limit Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 90 rom Range Setting 75 rom P0134 Maximum Speed Reference Limit Adjustable 0 18000 rpm Factory 1800 rpm Range Setting 1500 rpm Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 22 Speed Limits Description They define the maximum minimum values for the motor speed reference when the inverter is enabled They are valid for any type of reference signal For details on the actuation of P0133 refer to the parameter P0230 Dead Zone of the Analog Inputs NOTE The maximum allowed speed is limited at the value
86. i 1 2 23 2 ucc CC For Anybus CC communication modules slot 4 PLC11 module and for the FLASH memory module the P028 identification code will depend on the combination of these accessories as presented in the next table lolo Ci N N D Table 6 2 Formation of the two first codes for P0028 parameter Anybus CC modules 01 Active Module 10 Passive Module PLC module FLASH Memory Module 2 Hexadecimal Code 1 Hexadecimal Code Bit 7 indicates the presence of the PLC module 0 without PLC module 1 2with PLC module 2 Bit 6 indicates the presence of the FLASH memory module 0 without memory module 1 2with memory module G Bits 5 and 4 indicate the presence of Anybus CC modules as follows Table 6 3 Module types 5 4 Nome O OO 1 PROFIBUS DP 05 DEVICENET 05 ETHERNET IP 05 15 22 05 5 485 05 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Bits 3 2 1 and O are fixed in 0000 and form always the code 0 in hexadecimal Example For inverter equipped with the IOA 01 ENC 02 RS 485 01 PROFIBUS DP 05 modules and the FLASH memory module the hexadecimal code presented in the parameters P0027 and P0028 is respectively FDC2 and CE50 table 6 4 Table 6 4 Example of the two first characters
87. in the slots 1 and 2 the identification code is informed at the parameter P0027 In case of modules connected in the slots 3 4 or 5 the code will be shown through the parameter P0028 The next table shows the codes shown in those parameters regarding the main CFW 11 accessories Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Table 6 1 CFW 11 accessory identification codes E NNNM MM IOA 01 Module with 2 14 bit analog inputs 2 digital inputs 2 14 bit analog Identification Code P0027 P0028 outputs in voltage or current 2 open collector digital outputs Module with 2 isolated analog inputs 2 digital inputs 2 isolated analog IOB 01 Y pen outputs in voltage or current 2 open collector digital outputs IOC 01 Module with 8 isolated digital inputs and 4 relay outputs lOC 02 Module with 8 isolated digital inputs and 8 open collector type digital outputs IOC 03 Module with 8 isolated digital inputs and 7 digital outputs of 500 mA 8 i IOE 01 PTC temperature transducer module IOE 02 PT110 temperature transducer module IOE 03 KTY84 temperature transducer module ENC 01 Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc 100 kHz with encoder signal repeater ENC 02 Incremental encoder module 5 to 12 Vdc 100 kHz RS 485 01 RS 485 serial communication module RS 232 01 RS 232C serial communication module RS 232C serial communication module with keys for programming the RS 232 02 microcontroller FLASH memory
88. mode P0202 5 only in the vector sensorless mode 202 3 only in the vector with encoder mode P0202 4 only when available in the Modular Drive he HMI only in the control modes P0202 6 or 7 2 3 General Information 2 4 About the CFW 11 ABOUT THE CFW 11 3 1 ABOUT THE CFW 11 The CFW 11 is a high performance Frequency Inverter that makes it possible the control of speed and torque of three phase AC induction motors The principal characteristic of this product is the Vectrue technology which presents the following advantages Scalar Control V f VVW or vector control programmable in the same product The Vector control can be programmed as sensorless which means that standard motors without the need of encoder or vector control with motor encoder The sensorless vector control allows high torque and fast response even at very slow speeds or during starting 4 The Optimal Braking function for the vector control allows a controlled motor braking eliminating in some applications the braking resistor The vector control Self Tuning function allows the automatic setting of the regulators and control parameters from the identification also automatic of the motor and load parameters 3 1 About the CFW 11 Power Supply Three phase Bank rectifier SuperDrive WLP software HMI remote Digital Inputs DI1 to 016 Analog Inputs and AI2 3 2
89. of the Ride Through function can be visualized at the outputs DO1 RL1 DO2 RL2 DO3 RL3 004 and or DOS P0275 to P0279 provided that they have been programmed 24 Ride Through P0331 Voltage Ramp Adjustable 0 2 to 60 0 s Factory 2 05 Range Setting Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 44 FlyStart RideThru Description This parameter sets the necessary time for the output voltage to reach the rated voltage value It is used by the Flying Start function as well as by the Ride Through function both in V f mode together with the parameter P0332 12 15 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0332 Dead Time Adjustable 0 1 to 10 0 s Factory 1 05 Range Setting Properties and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI FlyStart RideThru Description The parameter P0332 sets the minimum time that the inverter will wait to activate the motor again which is necessary for the motor demagnetization In the Ride Through function case the time is counted starting from the line drop However in the Flying Start function actuation the counting begins after the Run Stop Run command is given For the correct operation this time must be adjusted to twice the motor rotor constant refer to the table 11 7 in the item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 12 7 4 Vector Ride Through Different from the V f mode in the vector mode the Rid
90. ols Adjustable 0 00 to 99 99 mH Factory 0 00 mH Range Setting Properties CFG and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning Description The value is automatically adjusted by the self tuning section 11 3 Self tuning This parameter can also calculated from the motor data sheet item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet NOTE When adjusted via the keypad HMI this parameter will change the parameter PO167 automatically P0412 Lr Rr Constant Rotor Time Constant Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 s Factory 0 0005 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning Description This parameter is automatically adjusted during the self tuning This parameter can also be calculated from the motor data sheet item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet The P0412 setting determines the flux regulator gains PO175 and 0176 The value of this parameter interferes the speed accuracy in the sensorless vector control It may also affect the motor torque on the vector with encoder Normally the self tuning is performed with the motor cold Depending on the motor the P0412 value may vary mor
91. or 222 0 and if it is operating in Automatic mode In case it is operating in Manual mode the reference via keypad HMI is adjusted at the parameter P0121 The value of P0525 is kept at the last adjusted value backup even disabling or removing power from the inverter with 120 1 Active In this case the value of P0525 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected P0527 PID Action Type Adjustable 0 Direct Factory 0 Range 1 Reverse Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description The type of PID action must be selected as Direct when it is necessary that the motor speed be increased so that the process variable be increased Otherwise Reverse must be selected Table 20 4 PID action selection Motor Speed Process Variable Select ncreases That characteristic varies according to the process but the direct action is more used 20 12 PID Regulator 46 In temperature or level control processes the setting of the type of action will depend on the configuration For instance at the level control if the inverter acts on the motor that extracts fluid from the reservoir the action will be reverse because when the level increases the inverter must increase the motor speed so that it diminishes In case the inverter acts on the motor that puts fluid into the reservoir the act
92. or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more Two or more D D D D P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 P0263 0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for P0270 programmed for 0270 programmed for D 5 D 4 D 7 D 6 P0263 P0270 programmed for REV Run P0263 P0270 programmed for FWD Run x PO263 P0270 programmed for 3 Wire Stop 4 FWD Run 5 REV Run 6 3 Wire Start 7 3 Wire Stop 8 FWD REY 9 LOC REM 1 Increase 2 Decrease 14 2 15 Speed Torque 22 Manval Automatic 24 Disable Flying Start 25 DC Link Regulator 26 Programming Off 27 Load User 1 2 28 Load User 3 29 DO2 Timer 30 Timer 4 FWD Run without Dlx PO263 P0270 programmed fo
93. parameter P0357 For frame sizes F and G P0357 0 disables the fault Pre charge circuit fault A010 2 high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC Surrounding air temperature is too high gt 50 C 122 F Rectifier High temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules and output current is too high Temperature It may be disabled by setting PO353 2 or 3 Blocked or defective fan Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust F011 2 An overtemperature fault was detected by the NTC Surrounding air temperature is too high gt 50 C 122 F Rectifier temperature sensors located in the rectifier modules and output current is too high Overtemperature Blocked or defective fan Inverter heatsink is completely covered with dust F021 DC bus undervoltage condition occurred The input voltage is too low and the DC bus voltage DC Bus Undervoltage HAN dropped below the minimum permitted value monitor the value at Parameter 004 Ud lt 223 V For a 200 240 V three phase input voltage Ud lt 170 V For a 200 240 V single phase input voltage models CFW1 1 52 or CFW1 1 2 P0296 0 Ud lt 385 V For a 380 V input voltage PO296 1 Ud 405 V For a 400 415 V input voltage 0296 2 Ud lt 446 For a 440 460 V input voltage P0296 3 Ud lt 487 V For a 480 V input voltage PO296 4 Ud 530 V Supply voltage 500 525 V P0296 5 Ud
94. programming for the digital and analog inputs and outputs use the Menu Basic Application Refer to the item 5 2 3 Setting Basic Application Parameters of the CFW 11 user s manual That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory settings use the Menu I O Configuration That need functions as Flying Start Ride Through DC Braking Dynamic Braking etc access and modify P those functions parameters by means of the Menu Parameter Groups 9 14 VVW Control VVW CONTROL The VVW Voltage Vector WEG control mode uses a control method with intermediate performance between V f and Sensorless Vector Refer to the figure 10 1 block diagram The main advantage compared to the V f control is the better speed regulation with higher torque capability at low speeds frequencies below 5 Hz allowing a sensible improvement of the inverter performance in permanent regimen Comparing to the Sensorless Vector the settings are simpler and easier The VVW control uses the stator current measurement the stator resistance value that can be obtained with the self tuning routine and the induction motor nameplate data to perform automatically the torque estimation the output voltage compensation and consequently the slip compensation replacing the function of the parameters P0137 and P0138 In order to obtain a good speed regulation in permanent regimen the slip frequen
95. rated speed applying a current step equal to the motor rated current When it is not possible to estimate P0413 using the self tuning function in applications of cranes position control and others adjust P0413 via keypad HMI Consult item 11 8 1 Speed Regulator 11 27 Vector Control 11 8 6 Torque Current Limitation 95 The parameters placed in this group define the torque limitation values P0169 Maximum Torque Current P0170 Maximum Torque Current Adjustable 0 0 to 350 0 Factory 125 0 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 95 Torque Curr Limit Description These parameters limit the motor current component that produces P0169 or PO170 torque The adjustment is expressed as a percentage of the motor nominal torque current The positive torque occurs when the motor drives the load in the clockwise direction or the load drives the motor in he counterclockwise direction The negative torque occurs when the motor drives the load in the counterclockwise direction or the load drives the motor in the clockwise direction f P0169 or PO170 is adjusted too low there might not be enough torque for the motor to activate the load If the value adjusted in the parameters is too high overload or overcurrent fault may occur n case that any Analog Input Alx be programmed for option 2 Maximum Torque C
96. regulator P0438 in steps of 0 10 up to the maximum of 1 50 4 Verity the P0435 setting 5 Reduce in 5 96 the maximum output voltage 190 6 Reduce the load 21 13 PM Vector Control 21 14 DC bus overvoltage F022 1 Adjust P0185 as suggested in the table 11 9 Motor overspeed F150 1 Adjust the speed regulator gains according to the description in the item 11 8 1 Speed Regulator 2 Increase the iq proportional gain PO438 in steps of 0 10 up to the maximum of 1 50 Speed oscillation 1 Follow the procedure for the speed regulator optimization described in the item 11 8 1 Speed Regulator Motor vibration it generally occurs when P0202 7 1 Reduce the id proportional gain PO440 in steps of 0 05 down to the minimum of 0 2 2 Reduce the iq proportional gain P0438 in steps of 0 05 down to the minimum of 0 8 3 Reduce the speed proportional gain PO161 in steps of 1 0 down to the minimum of 4 5 Seq Action Result Display Indication Monitoring Mode Press Menu right soft key The group 00 ALL PARAMETERS is already selected The group 01 PARAMETER GROUPS is selected The group 02 ORIENTED START UP is then selected Press Selec The parameter Oriented Start up P0317 No is already selected Press Selec The content of P0317 000 No is showed The content of the parameter is changed to
97. self tuning routine couple the load to the motor and set 408 4 Estimate In this case P0413 will be estimated taking into account also the driven load If the option PO408 2 Run for _ is executed with the load coupled to the motor an incorrect value of P0410 may be estimated This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 rotor time constant Tr and for P0413 mechanic time constant T_ Overcurrent fault F071 may also occur during the inverter operation Note The term load includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft for instance gearbox inertia disk etc In the option PO408 4 Estimate the self tuning routine estimates only the P0413 Mechanic time constant T value with the motor rotating It must be done preferably with the load coupled to the motor During its execution the self tuning routine can be canceled by pressing the key provided that V the values of P0409 through P0413 be all different from zero J For more details on the self tuning parameters refer to the item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 in this manual ES Alternatives for the acquisition of the motor parameters Instead of running the self tuning it is possible to obtain the values for P0409 to P0412 in the following manner From the motor test data sheet that can be supplied by its manufacturer Refer to the section 11 7 Motor Data of this manual Manually by
98. settings Torque boost 0136 and P0137 and slip compensation PO138 if it were in the V f control mode Having run the self tuning if it were in the vector mode Acceleration and deceleration ramps PO100 to P0103 and current limit P0135 for and VVW control or PO169 PO170 for vector control Configuring the PID Function 1 To select the especial function PID Regulator PO203 1 When the PID function is enabled by setting PO203 1 via HMI the following parameters are changed automatically E 205 10 Reading Parameter Selection 1 Setpoint PID P0206 9 Reading Parameter Selection 2 Process Var 207 2 Reading Parameter Selection 3 Motor Speed 223 0 FORWARD REVERSE Selection LOCAL Situation Always FORWARD 0225 0 JOG Selection LOCAL Situation Disabled 226 0 FORWARD REVERSE Selection REMOTE Situation Always FORWARD 228 0 JOG Selection REMOTE Situation Disabled 236 3 AI2 Signal Function Process Variable P0265 22 013 Function Manual Automatic A A A The DI3 function defined by the parameter P0265 works in the following manner Table 20 1 operation mode for 265 22 0 0 V 1 24V 2 To define the type of PID action thot the process requires direct or reverse The control action must be direct P0527 0 when it is necessary that the speed increases for the process variable to in
99. structure is presented in the table 5 1 The number and the name of the groups may change depending on the used software version NOTE The inverter leaves the factory with the keypad HMI language frequency V f 50 60 Hz mode and voltage adjusted according to the market The reset to the factory default may change the content of the parameters related to the frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz In the detailed description some parameters present values in parentheses which must be adjusted in the inverter for using the 50 Hz frequency Table 5 1 CFW 11 parameter groups structure Monitoring ALL PARAMETERS 0 PARAMETER GROUPS Vector Control Torque Curr Limit ND IN IN IN IN IN JON BS Co N2 Analog Outputs 45 Skip Speed Communication 3 02 3 4 05 06 PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION 0 08 FAULTHISTORY Cid 09 READ ONLY PARAMS 5 1 w w w Co o o IAI ID gt a N o NON gt JA I Co o o Programming Basic Instructions 5 2 GROUPS ACCESSED IN THE OPTION MENU IN THE MONITORING MODE In the monitoring mode access the groups of the option Menu by pressing the right soft key Table 5 2 Parameter groups accessed in the option menu of the monitoring mode ALPMAMETHS Parameters for simple applications ramps minimum and maximum speed maximum current and
100. to visualize the status of the 01 module 4 digital outputs the status of the 8 digital outputs of module IOC 02 or the status of the 7 digital outputs of the module IOC 03 The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0 representing respectively the Active and Inactive states of the outputs The state of each output is considered as one digit in the sequence where 06 represents the least significant digit Note When the 01 module is used the indications of bits DO10 to DO13 stay inactive When the IOC 03 module is used the indication of bit DO13 stay inactive 18 2 Trace Function 52 TRACE FUNCTION 52 19 1 TRACE FUNCTION The trace function is used to record variables of interest from the CFW 11 as current voltage speed when a particular event occurs in the system e g alarm fault high current etc This system event for starting the data recording process is called trigger The stored variables can be visualized as graphs through the SuperDrive G2 executed by a PC connected via USB or Serial to the CFW 11 The parameters related to this function are presented next P0550 Trigger Signal Source Adjustable 0 Not selected Factory 0 Range 1 Speed Reference Setting 2 Motor Speed 3 Motor Current 4 DC Link Voltage 5 Motor Frequency 6 Motor Voltage 7 Motor Torque 8 Process Variable 9 PID Setpoint 10 All A 12 13 Al4 Properties A
101. value M Problem with the hoist type load of P0134 x 100 96 P0132 for more than 20 ms 0 32 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes FLASH Memory Module Fault FLASH Memory Module fault MMF 01 Defective FLASH memory module Check the connection of the FLASH memory module A152 Alarm indicating that the internal air temperature is Surrounding air temperature too high 750 C 122 F Internal Air High too high and excessive output current Temperature Note Defective internal fan if installed It may be disabled by setting PO353 1 or 3 For the CFW 11M and the frame sizes E F and G ER UR pP 5 F153 Tauli High temperature gt 45 inside the cabinet Internal Air Overtemperature 156 1200 Only 1 sensor indicates temperature below 30 C Surrounding air temperature x 30 C 22 F Undertemperature F156 Undertemperature fault below 30 C 22 F in Surrounding air temperature x 30 C 22 F Undertemperature the IGBTs or rectifier measured by the temperature sensors F160 Safety Stop relay fault One of the relays is defective or it does not have 24 V Safety Stop Relays applied to its coil F161 Refer to the PLC11 01 Module programming manual Timeout PLC11C
102. variation Scalar Control V f 9 1 V f CONTROL 23 P0136 Manual Torque Boost Adjustable 0109 Factory 1 Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 V t Control Description It acts at low speeds increasing the inverter output voltage in order to compensate the voltage drop across the motor stator resistance with the purpose of keeping the torque constant The optimum setting is the lowest value of PO136 that allows a satisfactory starting of the motor Values higher than the necessary will increase the motor current at low speeds being able to lead the inverter to a fault F048 2051 2071 F072 F078 or F183 or alarm A046 A047 050 or A110 condition Output Voltage A Nominal 1 2 Nominal 0136 0 gt Speed Naro Fo Figure 9 2 Effect of PO136 on curve PO202 0 or 1 P0137 Automatic Torque Boost Adjustable 0 00 to 1 00 Factory 0 00 Range Setting Properties 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 V f Control Description The Automatic Torque Boost compensates the voltage drop on the stator resistance in function of the motor active current The criteria for adjusting PO137 are the same as for the parameter P0136 9 2 Scalar Control V f P0007 P0136 Voltage Applied to Speed Reference y QH the Motor 0137 Active Outpu
103. 0001 refer to the figure 12 8 12 16 Functions Common to All the Control Modes Return P0323 Loss P0321 Ride Through P0322 hs d ye 4 Undervoltage 75 Le Tz F021 Un t0 tl 12 13 14 15 Figure 12 8 Ride Through function actuation in vector mode R O Line loss A Line loss detection 12 Undervoltage actuation F021 without Ride Through 3 Line return A A A 4 Line return detection 5 Undervoltage actuation F021 with Ride Through A If the line voltage produces an voltage between the values adjusted in P0322 and P0323 the fault F0150 may occur the values of P0321 P0322 and P0323 must be readjusted NOTE or When one of the functions Ride Through or Flying Start is activated the parameter P0357 Line Phase Loss Time is ignored regardless of the adjusted time 42 Cautions with the application All the drive system components must be dimensioned to withstand the application transitory conditions NOTE The Ride Through function activation occurs when the power supply voltage is lower than the value P0321 1 35 U VAC x 1 35 12 17 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0321 DC Link Power Loss Adjustable 178 to 282 V Factory 0296 0 252 V Range 308 to 616 V Setting 0296 1 436 V 3
104. 0012 018 to Status Bit O DII RO 09 40 13 11 Bit 1 DI2 Bit 2 DI3 Bit 3 014 Bit 4 DI5 Bit 5 016 Bit 6 DI7 Bit 7 018 P0013 DO5 to DOI Status Bit 0 DO RO 09 41 13 19 Bit 002 Bit2 DO3 Bit 3 004 Bit4 DOS 0014 Value 0 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 39 3 6 P0015 2 Value 0 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 39 3 6 P0016 Value 100 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 39 3 6 P0017 AO4 Value 100 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 39 3 6 P0018 All Value 100 00 to 100 00 RO 09 38 95 3 1 P0019 AI2 Value 100 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 38 95 3 1 P0020 AI3 Value 100 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 38 95 3 1 P0021 Value 100 00 to 100 00 96 RO 09 38 95 3 1 P0023 Software Version 0 00 to 655 35 RO 09 42 6 2 P0025 DI16 to 019 Status Bit O DI9 RO 09 40 8 1 Bit 1 Bit 2 0111 Bit 3 0112 Bit 4 0113 Bit 5 0114 Bit 6 0115 Bit 7 DI16 P0026 DO13 to DO6 Status Bit 0 206 RO 09 41 18 2 Bit 007 Bit 2 008 Bit 3 009 Bit 4 0010 Bit 5 0011 Bit 6 0012 Bit7 DO13 P0027 Accessories Config 1 0000 to FFFFh RO 09 42 6 2 0028 Accessories Config 2 0000h to FFFFh RO 09 42 6 2 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0029 Power Hardware Config it O to 5 Rated Current 09 42 6 and 7 R
105. 0158 is the value from which the inverter starts considering that the motor is operating with overload The bigger the difference between the motor current and the overload current the faster FO72 trip will occur The parameter PO156 Motor Overload Current at 100 96 of its Rated Speed must be adjusted 5 96 higher than the motor rated current PO401 The overload current is given as a function of the speed being applied to the motor according to the overload curve The parameter P0156 P0157 and P0158 are the three points used to form the motor overload curve as presented in the figure 15 2 P0401 110 P0156 105 Pec M olm eee 98 TP MM C 65 n 05 50 100 96 Rated Speed Curve for a motor with separated ventilation Curve for a Self ventilated motor Figure 15 2 Overload protection levels With the setting of the overload current curve it is possible to set an overload value that varies according to the operation speed of the motor factory setting improving the protection for self ventilated motors or a constant overload level for any speed applied to the motor motors with separated ventilation 15 5 Faults and Alarms This curve is adjusted automatically when P0406 Motor Ventilation Type is set during the Oriented Start up routine refer to this parameter description in the section 11 7 Motor Data P0159 Motor Thermal C
106. 0707 TX CAN Telegrams 0 to 65535 RO 09 112 17 2 P0708 Bus Off Counter O to 65535 RO 09 112 17 2 P0709 CAN Lost Messages 0 to 65535 RO 09 112 17 2 0 24 P0710 DNet I O instances 0 ODVA Basic 2W 1 ODVA Extend 2W 2 Manut Spec 2W 3 Manut Spec 3W 4 Manut Spec 4W 5 Manuf Spec 5W 6 Manvf Spec 6W Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms 0 ODVA Basic 2W PO711 DNet Read Word 3 to 1499 2 7 2 PO712 DNet Read Word 4 to 1499 2 7 2 P0713 DNet Read Word 5 to 1499 2 7 2 PO714 Read Word 6 to 1499 2 7 2 0715 DNet Write Word 3 to 1499 2 7 2 P0716 DNet Write Word 4 to 1499 2 7 2 PO717 DNet Write Word 5 to 1499 2 7 2 P0718 DNet Write Word 6 to 1499 2 7 2 PO719 DNet Network Status 0 Offline RO 09 112 7 2 1 OnLine NotConn 2 OnLine Conn 3 Conn Timed out 4 Link Failure 5 Auto Baud 0720 DNet Master Status 0 Run RO 09 112 17 2 Idle PO721 CANopen Comm Status 0 Disabled RO 09 112 17 2 Reserved 2 Comm Enabled 3 ErrorCtrl Enab 4 Guarding Error 5 HeartbeatError 0722 CANopen Node State 0 Disabled RO 09 112 17 2 nitialization 2 Stopped 3 Operational 4 PreOperational P0723 Anybus Identification 0 Disabled RO 09 114 17 2 RS232 2 RS422 3 USB 4 Serial
107. 08 to 616 V P0296 2 459 V 308 to 616 V 296 3 505 V 308 to 616 V P0296 4 551 V 425 to 737 V P0296 5 602 V 425 to 737 V 296 6 660 V 486 to 885 V 296 7 689 V 486 to 885 V P0296 8 792 V P0322 DC Link Ride Through Adjustable 178 to 282 V Factory P0296 0 245 V Range 308 to 616 V Setting 0296 1 423 V 308 to 616 V P0296 2 446 V 308 to 616 V P0296 3 490 V 308 to 616 V 296 4 535 V 425 to 737 V 0296 5 585 V 425 to 737 V P0296 6 640 V 486 to 885 V 0296 7 668 V 486 to 885 V P0296 8 768 V P0323 DC Link Power Back Adjustable 178 to 282 V Factory 0296 0 267 V Range 308 to 616 V Setting 0296 1 462 V 308 to 616 V 0296 2 486 V 308 to 616 V DOS 55558 308 to 616 V 0296 4 583 V 425 we 7S7 V 0296 5 638 V 425 o 0296 6 699 V 486 to 885 V 0296 7 729 V 486 to 885 V 0296 8 838 V Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 44 FlyStart RideThru Description P0321 defines the U voltage level under which the line loss will be detected P0322 defines the voltage level that the inverter will try to keep regulated so that the motor keeps operating P0323 defines the U voltage level at which the inverter will identify the return of the line and from where the motor must be reaccelerated NOTE These parameters work together with the parameters P0325 and P0326 for the Ride Through in vector co
108. 1 or P0185 at the maximum value 400 V P0296 0 800 V PO296 1 2 or 4 1000 V PO296 5 6 or 7 or 1200 V P0296 8 according to the case in order to prevent the activation of the DC voltage regulation before the dynamic braking P0154 Dynamic Braking Resistor Adjustable 0 0 to 500 0 ohm Factory 0 0 ohm Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 28 Dynamic Braking Description Adjust this parameter with the ohmic value of the used braking resistor If 154 0 the braking resistor overload protection is disabled It must be programmed in zero if no braking resistor is used 14 2 Dynamic Braking P0155 Dynamic Braking Resistor Power Adjustable 0 02 to 650 00 kW Factory 2 60 kW Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 28 Dynamic Braking Description This parameter adjusts the trip level of the braking resistor overload protection It must be set according to the used braking resistor rated power in kW Operation if the average power dissipated on the braking resistor exceeds the value adjusted in P0155 for 2 minutes the inverter will be disabled with FO77 DB Resistor Overload In order to get more details on the selection of the braking resistor refer to the item 3 2 3 2 Dynamic Braking of the user s manual 14 3 Dynamic Braking 14 4 15 1 Faults and Alarms FAULTS AND ALARMS
109. 10 Overload fault at book 1 U phase IGBT Overload at IGBT U B1 A348 49 Overload alarm at book 1 V phase IGBT High Load at IGBT V B1 F349 9 Overload fault at book 1 V phase IGBT Overload at IGBT V B1 A351 49 Overload alarm at book 1 W phase IGBT High Load at IGBT W B1 F352 19 Overload fault at book 1 W phase IGBT Overload at IGBT W B1 A354 89 Overload alarm at book 2 U phase IGBT High Load at IGBT U B2 F355 0 Overload fault at book 2 U phase IGBT Overload at IGBT U B2 A357 19 Overload alarm at book 2 V phase IGBT High Load at IGBT V B2 F358 9 Overload fault at book 2 V phase IGBT Overload at IGBT V B2 A360 49 Overload alarm at book 2 W phase IGBT High Load at IGBT W B2 2361 19 Overload fault at book 2 W phase IGBT Overload at IGBT W B2 A363 19 Overload alarm at book 3 U phase IGBT High Load at IGBT U B3 F364 09 Overload fault at book 3 U phase IGBT Overload at IGBT U B3 A366 19 Overload alarm at book 3 V phase IGBT High Load at IGBT V B3 Temperature gt 40 or 45 C depending on the model Refer to the section 3 1 Installation Environment of the CFW 11M user s manual 0 36 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes F367 09 Overload fault at book 3 V phase IGBT High current at the inverter output see figure 8 1 of the Overload at IGBT V B3 CFW 11M user s manual 369 19 Overload alarm at
110. 11 12 13 14 All the models from frame size CFW110086T2 CFW110105T2 CFW110045T4 CFW110058T4 CFW110070T4 CFW110088T4 All the models of frame sizes D and E All the models of frame sizes A B and C With a Profibus DB module connected into the slot 3 XC43 CFW110370T4 CFW11047714 1 6 in frame size F and all the frame size G models All the models of the frame size G All the models of the frame size E With 01 02 or 03 modules connected into the slot 1 XC41 All the models of the CFW 11M All the models with a SoftPLC applicative All the models of frame sizes F and G All the models of frame sizes D E F G and CFW 11M Long motor cables with more than 100 meters 328 08 ft will have a high leakage capacitance to the ground The circulation of leakage currents through these capacitances may activate the ground fault protection after the inverter is enabled and consequently the occurrence of fault F074 NOTE The range from P0750 to P0799 is destined to the SoftPLC applicative user faults and alarms 0 39 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms 0 40 Safety Notices SAFETY NOTICES This Manual contains the information necessary for the correct use of the CFW 11 Frequency Inverter It has been developed to be used by qualified personnel with suitable training or technical qualification for operating this type of equipment 1 1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THIS M
111. 12 14 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 7 3 V f Ride Through The Ride Through function in the V f mode will disable the output pulses IGBT of the inverter as soon as the input voltage reaches a value below the undervoltage level The undervoltage fault F021 does not occur and the DC link voltage will decrease slowly until the line voltage returns If the line takes too long to return more than 2 seconds the inverter may indicate F021 DC Link Undervoltage If the line voltage returns before a fault the inverter will enable the pulses again imposing the speed reference instantaneously as in the Flying Start function and applying a voltage ramp with the time defined by P0331 Refer to the figures 12 7 a and b Line Returns DC Link Voltage c eere ee te s et F021 Level DC Link Voltage Line Returns O IM SA Enabled Output Pulses Enabled _ Output Pulses Disabled P0331 0332 Time adjusted in P0332 Output Volt 1 utput Voltage 10331 0 Output Voltage Disabled Output Speed P0002 T Output Speed P0002 rpm a with the line returning before the time adjusted in POS32 b with the line returning after the time adjusted in PO332 but before 2 s for P0332 lt 1 s or before 2 x P0332 for PO332 gt 1 s Figure 12 7 a and b Ride Through actuation in V f mode The actuation
112. 12 5 bar Thus the operation range to 15 bar represents 60 96 of the setpoint If it is necessary to adjust PO237 Considering gap of 10 96 for the process variable measurement range MR 1 1 x OR 16 5 it must be adjusted at O to 16 5 bar Therefore the parameter PO237 must be set FS 25 P0237 1 52 MR 16 5 Thus a setpoint of 100 96 represents 16 5 bar i e the operation range in percentage stays from O to 90 9 96 OR 15 16 5 If offset adjustment is necessary the parameter P0239 must be configured according to the detailed description of the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs If it is wished to change the indication of the process variable on the keypad HMI the parameters P0528 and P0529 must be adjusted according to the transducer full scale and to the defined P0237 value Refer to the description of those parameters at the section 20 6 Parameters The parameters P0530 to P0532 can be configured to set the process variable engineering unit Example If a reading of 25 0 bar is wished for the motor maximum speed set 0528 250 0529 1 wxy z P0530 b P0531 a P0532 r 5 To set the reference setpoint to define the operation mode local remote at the parameter P0220 and the reference source at parameters 221 and P0222 according to the desired situation In case the setpoint is defined via keypad HMI set P0525 according to the equation below Set
113. 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 14 and RO P0803 Phase U Book 2 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 15 and RO P0804 Phase V Book 2 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 15 and RO P0805 Phase W Book 2 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 15 and RO 0 26 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms PO806 Phase U Book Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW and RO P0807 Phase V Book Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO PO808 Phase W Book 3 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0809 Phase U Book 4 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0810 Phase V Book 4 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0811 Phase W Book 4 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0812 Phase U Book 5 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0813 Phase V Book 5 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0814 Phase W Book 5 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 09 45 5 15 and RO P0832 DIM1 Function 0 Not Used 0 Not Used CFW 45 40 5 15 1 No Ext Fault IPS 2 No Refrig Fault 3 No Br Overt Fault 4 No Rect Overt F 5 No Rect Temp Al 6 No Rect Fault P0833 DIM2 Function See options in P0832 0 Not Used CFW 11M 45 40 15 15 P0834 DIM1 DIM2 Status Bit O DIM CFW 11M 09 40 15 16 Bit 1 DIM2 and RO PO918 Profibus Address 1 to 126 1
114. 1800 rpm or 3600 rpm Other values are possible for special motors P0433 Lq Inductance P0434 Ld Inductance Adjustable 0 to 100 00 mH Factory 0 00 mH Range Setting Properties PM Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Adjust them according to the motor nameplate data If these pieces of information are not available keep the default value NOTE The use of the default value causes It increases the output current because the motor in those conditions does not produce the reluctance torque The increase ofthe output current may cause increase in the motor temperature 2 It prevents the motor operation in the field weakening region 21 7 PM Vector Control P0435 Ke Constant Adjustable 0 to 400 0 Factory 100 0 V rpm Range Setting Properties CFG and PM Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Note ke is the generated voltage constant It is a characteristic of the motor which determines the voltage generated as a function of the motor speed The used engineering unit is V krpm Volts 1000 rpm Description Values obtained from the motor nameplate data NOTE If this information is not available it can be obtained by using the next procedure Run the motor without load adjusting PO121 1000 rpm After reaching that speed read the 0007 indication Disable the inverter and program in P0435 the
115. 2 Remote Command Description They define the origin of the JOG command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation P0229 Stop Mode Selection Adjustable 0 Ramp to Stop Factory 0 Range 1 Coast to Stop Setting 2 Gast siop 3 By Ramp with Iq 4 Fast Stop with 10 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 31 Local Command L 32 Remote Command Description It defines the motor stop mode when the inverter receives the Stop command The table 13 12 describes the options of this parameter Table 13 12 Stop mode selection P0229 Description 0 Ramp to Stop The inverter will apply the ramp programmed in P0101 and or P0103 1 Coast to Stop The motor will run free until stopping 2 Fast Stop The inverter will apply a null ramp time 0 0 second in order to stop the motor in the shortest possible time The inverter will apply the deceleration ramp programmed in P0101 or P0103 will reset the torque current reference The inverter will apply a null ramp time 0 0 second in order to stop the motor in the shortest possible time and will reset the torque current reference 3 By Ramp with Ig reset 4 Fast Stop with 10 reset a N NOTE When the control modes V f or VVW are selected the use of the option 2 Fast Stop is not recommended NOTE D When the Coast to St
116. 25 175hp 130kW 26 180hp 132kW 27 200hp 150kW 28 220hp 160kW 29 250hp 185kW 30 270hp 200kW 31 300hp 220kW 32 350hp 260kW 33 380hp 280kW 34 400hp 300kW 35 430hp 315kW 36 440hp 330kW 37 450hp 335kW 38 475hp 355kW 39 500hp 375kW 40 540hp 400kW 41 600hp 450kW 42 620hp 460kW 43 670hp 500kW 44 700hp 525kW 45 760 570kW 46 800hp 600kW 47 850hp 630kW 48 900hp 670kW 49 1000hp 736kW 50 1100hp 810kW 51 1250hp 920kW 52 1400hp 1030kW 53 1500hp 1110kW 54 1600hp 1180kW 55 1800hp 1330kW 56 2000hp 1480kW 57 2300hp 1700kW 58 2500hp 1840kW 0 21 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D il didus is piis 57 P0405 Encoder Pulses Number 100 to 9999 ppr RES ppr 05 43 94 11 13 0406 Motor Ventilation 0 Self Vent Self Vent m 05 43 94 11 14 1 Separate Vent 2 Optimal Flux 3 Extended Protection P0407 Motor Rated Power Fac 0 50 to 0 99 0 68 CFG and 05 43 94 10 4 VYW P0408 Run Self Tuning 0 No 0 VVW 05 43 94 11 23 1 No Rotation 2 Run for 3 Run for Tn 4 Estimate T P0409 Stator Resistance 0 000 to 9 999 ohm 0 000 ohm CFG VVW 05 43 94 25 PM and and Vector 21 7 0410 Magnetization Current 0 to 1 25
117. 329 value not optimized Operation analysis I 2 3 The frequency equal to the adjustment 134 is applied with a current equal to 0 9xP0401 control The frequency is reduced down to zero using the ramp given by P0329 x P0412 If the speed is not found during this frequency scan a new scan in the opposite speed direction is initiated in which the frequency goes from PO134 to zero After this second scan the FS is finished and the control mode changes to vector sensorless The figure 12 6 c shows the speed reference when the FS function is initiated with the motor shaft already running in the desired direction or with stopped shaft and an already optimized P0329 Operation analysis 1 The frequency equal to the adjustment 0134 is applied with a current equal to 0 9xP0401 control 2 The frequency is reduced using the ramp given by P0329 x P0412 until reaching the motor speed 3 In this moment the control mode changes to vector sensorless In order that the motor speed is found in the first scan proceed with the P0329 setting in the following manner 1 Increase P0329 using 1 0 steps 2 Enable the inverter and observe the motor shaft movement during the FS process 3 If the shaft rotates in both directions stop the motor and repeat the steps 1 and 2 NOTE The used parameters are P0327 to P0329 lt gt B i When the general enable c
118. 4 PM vector mode oriented Start up cont 21 16 PM Vector Control 21 9 FAULTS AND ALARMS When the control mode is PM with encoder PO202 6 fault reset will only be accepted with stopped motor Except for the F079 Encoder fault reset which could occur with the motor shaft in movement however the motor must be stopped in order to avoid operation problems after the fault reset 21 10 READ ONLY PARAMETERS 09 P0009 Motor Torque Adjustable 1000 0 to 1000 0 96 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the torque developed by the motor as a percentage of the motor rated current PO401 By using the analog output or AO2 modulus or AO4 programmed to show the torque current reference Iq the motor torque can be calculated through the following formula Tas 10 x P0401 x 20 li Where in Volts is the inverter HD current P0295 21 11 SPEED LIMITS P0134 Maximum Speed Reference Limit NOTE The maximum allowed speed is automatically set in the value defined by P0134 X 636 P0435 Table 21 2 Maximum dc link voltage P0296 220 230 V 380 V 480 V 500 V 600 V 660 690 V 400 V 800 V 1000 V 1200 V 21 17 WEG Equipamentos El tricos S A Jaragu do Sul SC Brazil Phone 55 47 3276 4000 Fax 55 47 3276 4020 S o Paulo SP Brazil Pho
119. 4 2 For more details refer to this parameter description in the item 11 8 7 DC Link Regulator of this manual JOG and JOG those are functions valid only for PO202 3 or 4 Disables Flying Start it is valid for PO202 4 By applying 24 V to the digital input programmed for this purpose the Flying Start function is disabled By applying V the Flying Start function is enabled again provided that PO320 be equal to 1 or 2 Refer to the section 12 7 Flying Start Ride Through Load User 1 2 this function allows the selection of the user memory 1 or 2 in a similar process than P0204 7 or 8 with the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the Dlx programmed for this function When the state of the Dlx changes from low level to high level transition from O V to 24 V the user memory 1 is loaded provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the parameter memory 1 204 10 When the sate of the Dlx changes from high level to low level transition from 24 V to O V the user memory 2 is loaded provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the parameter memory 2 PO204 11 Inverter Parameters P0263 to P0270 Di 27 01 24 V 7 M 0204 10 Dlx 24 V DIx 0 V 0204 11 Dk 0V PO263 to 0270 Dix 27 Figure 13 4 Details on the worki
120. 40 Auto Reset Time Adjustable Oto 255 5 Factory Os Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description When fault occurs except F067 Incorrect Encoder Motor Wiring and F099 Invalid Current Offset the inverter can reset itself automatically after the time set in PO340 has elapsed gt The faults 51 F078 F156 F301 F304 F307 F310 F313 F316 F319 F322 F325 F328 F331 F334 F337 F340 and F343 allow a conditional Reset i e the Reset will only occur if the temperature gets back to the normal operation range 15 8 Faults and Alarms If after Auto Reset the same fault is repeated three times consecutively the Auto Reset function will be disabled A fault is considered consecutive if it happens again within 30 seconds after the Auto Reset Therefore if a fault occurs four consecutive times the inverter will remain disabled general disable and the fault will remain being indicated If PO340 x 2 auto reset will not occur P0342 Motor Unbalanced Current Detection Adjustable 0 On Factory 0 Range Setting Properties en Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter enables the motor unbalanced current detection which will be responsible for the 076 fault actuation This function will be enabled to actuate when t
121. 427 A 340A 470 A 380A 811 A 646A 29 893 A 722A 30 1216 1216 31 1339 1083 32 1622 1292 33 1786 A 1444 A 34 2028 1615 35 2232 1805 36 2 2 37 640A 515A 38 1216A 979 A 39 1824 A 1468 40 2432 1957 41 3040 2446 A 42 600A 515A 43 1140A 979 A 44 1710 1468 45 2280 1957 46 2850 2446 A 47 105 88 A 48 142A 115A 49 180A 142A 50 211 180 51 242 211 52 312 A 242A 53 370A 312A 54 477 A 370A 55 515 477 56 601 515 57 720 560A 58 2 9 2 7 59 4 2 3 8 N 60 7 5 61 8 5 7 62 10 9 63 11 9 64 12 10 65 15 1 66 17 17 67 20A 17A Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms 68 22 19 69 24 21 70 27 22 71 30A 24A 72 32 27 73 74 444 36 A 75 46 39 76 44 77 54A 46 78 63A 53A 79 73A 61 80 80A 66A 81 100 85 82 107 90A 83 108 95 84 125 107 85 130A 108A 86 150 122 87 147 127 88 170 150A 89 195A 165A 90 216 180 91 289 A 240A 92 259 225 93 315A 289 94 312 259 95 365A 315A 96 3
122. 499 0 CFG 4 7 3 P0737 Anybus Write Word 6 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 P0738 Anybus Write Word 7 O to 1499 0 CFG 4 7 3 0739 Write Word 8 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0740 Profibus Comm Status 0 Disabled RO 09 115 1 Access Error 2 Offline 3 Config Error 4 Param Error 5 Clear Mode 6 Online 0741 Profibus Data Profile 0 PROFldrive 1 Manufacturer CFG 7 3 1 Manvfacturer 0742 Profibus Reading Word 3 010 1199 0 5 7 3 P0743 Profibus Reading Word 4 010 1199 0 5 7 3 P0744 Profibus Reading Word 5 Oto 1199 0 5 7 3 P0745 Profibus Reading Word 6 Oto 1199 0 5 7 3 P0746 Profibus Reading Word 7 010 1199 0 5 7 3 0747 Profibus Reading Word 8 010 1199 0 5 7 3 P0748 Profibus Reading Word 9 0101199 0 5 7 3 0749 Profibus Reading Word 10 0101199 0 5 7 3 P0750 Profibus Writing Word 3 010 1199 0 5 7 4 P0751 Profibus Writing Word 4 010 1199 0 5 7 4 P0752 Profibus Writing Word 5 010 1199 0 5 7 4 P0753 Profibus Writing Word 6 Oto 1199 0 5 7 4 P0754 Profibus Writing Word 7 Oto 1199 0 5 7 4 P0755 Profibus Writing Word 8 Oto 1199 0 5 7 4 P0756 Profibus Writing Word 9 010 1199 0 5 7 4 P0757 Profibus Writing Word 10 Oto 1199 0 5 7 4 799 Delay Update 0 0 to 999 0 0 0 5 7 5 PO800 U Book 1 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 14 and RO P0801 Phase V Book 1 Temper 20 0 to 150 0 C CFW 11M 09 45 5 14 and RO P0802 Phase W Book 1 Temper 20 0 to
123. 65A 312A 97 357 98 428 A 355 99 472 A 388A 100 700 515 101 1330 979 102 1995 1468 103 2660 1957 104 3325 A 2446 0296 Line Rated Voltage 0 200 240 V According to inverter CFG 42 6 8 1 380 V model 2 400 415V 3 440 460 V 4 480 V 5 500 525 6 550 575 7 600 V 8 660 690V P0297 Switching Frequency 0 1 25 kHz 2 5 0 kHz CFG 42 6 9 and 1 2 5 kHz 21 4 2 5 0 kHz 3 10 0 kHz 4 2 0 kHz P0298 Application 0 Normal Duty ND 0 Normal Duty CFG 42 6 10 1 Heavy Duty HD ND P0299 DC Braking Start Time 0 0 to 15 0 5 0 05 VVW 47 2 20 Sless 00 DC Braking Stop Time 0 0 to 15 05 0 05 VVW 47 2 20 and Sless P0301 DC Braking Speed O to 450 rpm 30 rpm VVW 47 2 22 and Sless P0302 DC Braking Voltage 0 0 to 10 0 96 2 0 96 V f and VVW 47 2 22 P0303 Skip Speed 1 O to 18000 rpm 600 rpm 48 2 23 P0304 Skip Speed 2 0 to 18000 rpm 900 rpm 48 2 23 P0305 Skip Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 1200 rpm 48 2 23 P0306 Skip Band 0 to 750 rpm 0 rpm 48 2 23 P0308 Serial Address to 247 CFG 113 17 1 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D irse jar bus niis iy rete com te P0310 Serial Baud Rate 0 9600 bits s 0 9600
124. 767 RO 09 111 17 1 P0684 CO DN DP Control See options in P0682 RO 09 111 17 1 P0685 P0686 CO DN DP Speed Ref Anybus CC Control 32768 to 32767 See options 682 RO RO 09 111 09 111 17 1 17 2 P0687 Anybus CC Speed Ref 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 17 2 P0695 DOx Value Bit 0 DO Bit 1 DO2 Bit 2 Bit 3 DO4 Bit 4 DOS RO 09 111 17 5 P0696 AOx Value 1 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 7 5 P0697 AOx Value 2 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 7 5 P0698 AOx Value 3 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 7 5 P0699 AOx Value 4 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 7 5 P0700 CAN Protocol 1 CANopen 2 DeviceNet 2 DeviceNet CFG 112 7 1 P0701 CAN Address Oto 127 63 CFG 112 7 1 P0702 CAN Baud Rate 1 Mbps Auto Reserved 2 500 Kbps Auto 3 250 Kbps 4 125 Kbps 5 100 Kbps Auto 50 Kbps Auto 20 Kbps Auto 8 10 Kbps Auto 0 1 Mbps Auto CFG 112 7 1 703 Bus Off Reset 0 Manual 1 Automatic 1 Automatic CFG 112 17 1 P0705 CAN Controller Status 0 Disabled 1 0 Auto baud 2 CAN Enabled 3 Warning 4 Error Passive Bus Off 6 No Bus Power RO 09 112 17 1 P0706 RX CAN Telegrams to 65535 RO 09 112 17 1 P
125. 8 to 616 V 535 V 0296 4 425 to 737 V 585 0296 5 425 737 640 V 0296 6 486 to 885 V 668 V 0296 7 486 to 885 V 768 V 0296 8 P0323 DC Link Power Back 178 to 282 V 267 V 296 0 Vector 44 12 18 308 to 616 V 462 V P0296 1 and 308 to 616 V 486 V 0296 2 21 11 308 to 616 V 535 0296 3 308 to 616 V 583 V PO296 4 425 to 737 V 638 PO296 5 425 to 737 V 699 V P0296 6 486 to 885 V 729 V 0296 7 486 to 885 V 838 V 0296 8 P0325 Ride Through P Gain 0 0 to 63 9 22 8 PM and 44 12 19 Vector and 21 11 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0326 Ride Through Gain 0 000 to 9 999 0 128 PM and 2 Vector a 21 12 P0327 ES Current Ramp 1 0 000 to 1 000 s 0 070 s Sless 44 2 13 P0328 Flying Start Filter 0 000 to 1 000 s 0 085 s Sless 44 2 13 P0329 Frequency Ramp ES 2 0 to 50 0 6 0 Sless 44 2 13 P0331 Voltage Ramp 0 2 to 60 0 s 2 0s V f and VVW 44 2 15 P0332 Dead Time 0 1 to 10 0s 1 0s V f and VVW 44 2 16 P0340 Auto Reset Time Oto 255 5 05 45 15 8 0342 Motor Unbal Curr Conf 0 Off 0 Off CFG 45 15 9 2 P0343 Ground Fault Config 0 Off On GFG 45 15 9 1 P0344 Current Lim Conf 0 Hold FL ON 3 Decel FL OFF CFG V f and 26 9 7 1 Decel FL ON VVW 2 Hold FL OFF 3 Decel FL OFF P0348 Motor Overload Conf 0 Off 1 Fault Alarm CFG 45 15 9 1 Fault Alarm 2 Fau
126. 9 P0262 Output Signal O to 20 mA Off 41020 mA 20 to 0 mA For AO1 AO2 when current signals are used the switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in the OFF position For AO3 and AO4 when current signals are used the outputs AO3 and AO4 must be used For voltage signals use the outputs AO3 V and 4 V The switch corresponding to the desired output must be set in ON only in order to use range from 10 V to 10V 13 1 3 Digital Inputs 40 The CFW 11 has 6 digital inputs in the standard version and 2 more can be added with the IOA 01 and IOB 01 accessories The parameters that configure those inputs are presented next P0012 DI8 to DI1 Status Adjustable BitO DIT Factory Range Bit 1 DI2 Setting Bir 2 DIIS Bit 3 014 Bit 4 DI5 Bit 5 016 Bit 6 017 Bit 7 DI8 Properties RO Access groups 07 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 40 Digital Inputs 40 Digital Inputs Description By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 6 control board digital inputs 011 to 016 and of the 2 accessory digital inputs DI7 and DI8 as well 13 11 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0 representing respectively the Active and Inactive states of the inputs The state of each input is considered as one digit in the seque
127. 96 unbalance in the current Phase U B5 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value A403 09 Phase V book 5 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 unbalance in the current Phase V B5 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its nominal value A404 9 Phase W book 5 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at t indicates 20 unbalance in the current Phase W 5 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its nominal value 0 38 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes F406 09 Indications related to the settings of parameters M Braking module cooling failure Overtemperature P0832 and P0833 The load inertia is too high or the deceleration ramp is Brake Module too fast The load at the motor shaft is too high F408 09 Pump failure water cooled drive systems Refrigeration System Fault Cabinet ventilation failure Note Check the fan control system used in the application 410 09 Open DIMI DIM2 Check the fan control system use
128. ANUAL The following safety notices are used in this manual d DANGER A The procedures recommended in this warning have the purpose of protecting the user against dead serious injuries and considerable material damage J ATTENTION The procedures recommended in this warning have the purpose of avoiding material damage J or The information mentioned in this warning is important for the proper understanding and good operation of the product 1 2 SAFETY NOTICES ON THE PRODUCT The following symbols are attached to the product serving as safety notices High voltages are present Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge Do not touch them Mandatory connection to the protective earth PE Connection of the shield to the ground Hot surface OFS 1 1 Safety Notices 1 3 PRELIMINARY RECOMMENDATIONS DANGER Only qualified personnel familiar with the CFW 11 Frequency Inverter and associated equipment should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of this equipment These personnel must follow all the safety instructions included in this Manual and or defined by local regulations Failure to comply with these instructions may result in life threatening and or equipment damage For the purposes of this manual qualified personnel are those trained to be able to
129. Alarm A090 on the keypad HMI display when the programmed digital input is open 0 V If 24 V is applied to the input the alarm message will disappear automatically from the keypad HMI display The motor keeps working normally regardless of the state of that input Manual Automatic it allows selecting the CFW 11 speed reference between the reference defined by P0221 P0222 Manual mode Dix open and the reference defined by the PID regulator Automatic mode Dlx with 24 V Refer to the chapter 20 PID Regulator for more details PLC use When this option is selected it will not take any action for the CFW 11 It can be used as a remote input for the PLC11 board or for communication networks 13 15 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs a RUN STOP Acceleration ramp Decelerafion ramp Motor speed Time 24V Dix Open Time Note All the digital inputs programmed for General Enable Fast Stop Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON state so that the CFW 11 operates as described above b GENERAL ENABLE Motor runs free coasts a Acceleration ramp As Motor speed 24 V fame Dix Open gt Time Note All the digital inputs programmed for Run Stop Fast Stop Forward Run or Reverse Run must be in the ON state so that the CFW 11 operates as described above c NO EXTERNAL FAULT Motor runs free coasts d Motor speed d FWD REV F
130. C 03 module is connected into the slot 1 XC41 connector P0025 DI9 to DI16 Status Adjustable Bit 0 DI9 Factory Range Bit 1 Setting Bit2 Bis DMZ Bir DNS Bit5 0114 Rie DMS Bit 7 0116 Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 071 CONFIGURATION via HMI 40 Digital Inputs m 40 Digital Inputs SoftPLC 50 Description By means of this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 8 digital inputs DI9 to DI16 of the IOC 01 IOC 02 or IOC 03 module The indication is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0 representing respectively the Active and Inactive states of the inputs The state of each input is considered as one digit in the sequence where DI9 represents the least significant digit 18 2 2 Digital Outputs 41 At the IOC 01 4 relay contact digital outputs NO relay contact are available DO6 to 009 At the IOC 02 8 open collector type digital outputs are available 006 to DO13 The module IOC 03 provides 7 digital outputs type PNP galvanically isolated of 500 mA each P0026 DO6 to DO13 Status Adjustable BitO DO6 Factory Range Bit 1 DOZ Setting 2 DOs 81 8 IDO Bit4 0010 979 Dig Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 07 CONFIGURATION via 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Description By means of this parameter it is possible
131. CHANGED PARAMETERS Speed Reference 1 rem Ready CLOC Bren Access to Parameters ENS Programming Basic Instructions Action Result Display Indication When the number 5 Ready SLOC appears press Save EEEE Access to Parameters Brem If the setting was performed correctly the display must show Access to Parameters 0000 5 Press Return left soft key Speed Reference FOGGL rem Press Return PARAME PS 82 ORIENTED START UP 83 CHANGED PARAMETERS Select The display returns to Monitoring Mode Figure 5 1 Sequence for allowing parameter changes via PO000 5 4 HMI 30 In the group 30 are the parameters related to the presentation of information on the keypad HMI display See next the detailed description of the possible settings for those parameters P0193 Day of the Week Adjustable 0 Sunday Factory 0 Range 1 Monday Setting 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 6 Saturday P0194 Day Adjustable Range 011031 P0195 Month Factory 01 Setting Adjustable Range 12 Factory 01 Setting Programming Basic Instructions P0196 Year Adjustable 00 to 99 Factory 06 Range Setting P0197 Hour Adjustable 00 to 23 Factory 00 Range Setting P0198 Minutes P0199 Seconds
132. DC link regulation modes P0184 0 With losses The Optimal Braking is active as described at P0185 This assures the minimum possible decelera Optimal Braking tion time without using dynamic or regenerative braking Automatic control of the deceleration ramp The Optimal Braking is inactive The deceleration ramp is automatically adjusted in order to keep the DC link below the level adjusted in P0185 This procedure avoids the overvoltage fault at the DC link F022 It can also be used with eccen tric loads Dix 24 V Braking actuates as described for 184 1 2 Enable Disable via Dlx Dlx The Without Losses Braking stays inactive The DC link voltage will be controlled by the parameter P0153 Dynamic Braking 1 Without losses 11 30 Vector Control P0185 DC Link Voltage Regulation Level Adjustable 339 to 400 V Factory P0296 0 400 V Range 585 to 800 V Setting 0296 1 800 V 585 to 800 V 0296 2 800 V 585 to 800 V P0296 3 800 V 585 to 800 V P0296 4 800 V 809 to 1000 V P0296 5 1000 V 809 to 1000 V 0296 6 1000 V 924 to 1200 V 0296 7 1000 V 924 to 1200 V P0296 8 1200 V Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 96 DC Link Regulator Description This parameter defines the DC link voltage regulation level during the braking During the braking the time of the deceleration ramp is automatically extended thus a
133. Description It indicates the energy consumed by the motor It indicates up to 65535 kWh and then it gets back to zero By setting PO204 4 the value of the parameter P0044 is reset to zero This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter The content of P0044 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected NOTE The value indicated in this parameter is calculated indirectly and must not be used to measure the energy consumption P0045 Fan Enabled Time Adjustable to 65535 h Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the total number of hours that the heatsink fan remained enabled It indicates up to 65535 hours and then it gets back to zero By setting PO204 2 the value of the parameter P0045 is reset to zero This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter The content of P0045 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected P0048 Present Alarm P0049 Present Fault Adjustable 0 to 999 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Read Only Parameters 09 Description They indicate the alarm 0048 or fault 49 number that occasionally be present at the inverter In order to understand the meaning of the codes used for faults and alarms refer to the cha
134. FW 11 A162 Incompatible PLC Firmware A163 It indicates that the All current 4 20 mA or 20 4 mA Broken cable Break Detect reference is out of the 4 to 20 mA range Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip 164 It indicates that the AI2 current 4 20 mA 20 4 mA Broken AI2 cable Break Detect Al2 reference is out of the 4 to 20 mA range Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip A165 It indicates that the AI3 current 4 20 mA or 20 4 Broken AI3 cable Break Detect AI3 reference is out of the 4 to 20 mA range Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip A166 It indicates that the Al4 current 4 20 mA or 20 4 mA Broken AI4 cable Break Detect Al4 reference is out of the 4 to 20 mA range Bad contact at the signal connection to the terminal strip 2174 Heatsink left fan speed fault Dirt on the blades and in the bearings of the fan Left Fan Speed Fault Defective fan Defective fan power supply connection F175 0 Heatsink center fan speed fault Dirt on the blades and in the bearings of the fan Center Fan Speed Fault Defective fan Defective fan power supply connection 2176 Heatsink right fan speed fault Dirt on the blades and in the bearings of the fan Right Fan Speed Fault Defective fan Defective fan power supply connection 177 Fan replacement alarm P0045 gt 50000 hours Maximum number of operating hours for the heatsink fan Fan Replacement Note has been reach
135. Frequency P0404 Motor Rated Power P0406 Motor Ventilation Refer to the section 11 7 Motor Data for more information P0407 Motor Rated Power Factor Adjustable 0 50 to 0 99 Factory 0 68 Range Setting Properties VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description It is the motor power factor setting according to the motor nameplate data cos This parameter is important for the VVW control operation The inaccurate setting will imply in incorrect calculation of the slip compensation The default value of this parameter is adjusted automatically when the parameter P0404 is changed The suggested value is valid for three phase IV pole WEG motors For other motor types the setting must be done manually P0408 Run Self Tuning P0409 Motor Stator Resistance Rs P0410 Motor Magnetizing Current I Refer to the item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 for more information 10 3 VVW CONTROL MODE START UP NOTE Read the whole CFW 11 user s manual before installing powering or operating the inverter Sequence for installation verification powering and start up a Install the inverter according to the chapter 3 Installation and Connection of the CFW 11 user s manual wiring all the power and control connections 10 4 VVW Control b Prepare the inverter and apply power according to the section 5 1 Prepar
136. High temperature alarm measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 4 W phase IGBT 2334 19 Overtemperature at IGBT W B4 Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 4 W phase IGBT A336 19 igh Temperature at IGBT U BS High temperature alarm measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 5 U phase IGBT 2337 19 Overtemperature at IGBT U B5 the temperature GBT Overtemperature fault measured with sensor NTC of the book 5 U phase A339 19 igh Temperature at IGBT V B5 High temperature alarm measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 5 V phase IGBT F340 10 Overtemperature at IGBT V B5 the temperature GBT Overtemperature fault measured with sensor NTC of the book 5 V phase A342 49 High Temperature at IGBT W B5 43 10 Overtemperature at IGBT W B5 High temperature alarm measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 5 W phase IGBT Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 5 W phase IGBT High ambient temperature and high output current Blocked or defective fan Fins of the book heatsink too dirty impairing the air flow High current at the inverter output see figure 8 1 of the CFW 11M user s manual A345 0 Overload alarm at book 1 U phase IGBT High Load at IGBT U B1 F346
137. It presents a navigation manner similar to the one used in cell phones with options to access the parameters sequentially or by means of groups menu S Left Soft key Function defined by the text directly above on the display M 2 1 Increases parameter contents 2 Increases the speed 3 Selects the previous group of the Parameter Group list 7 Controls the motor speed direction Active when 0223 2 or 3 in LOC and or P0226 2 or 3 in REM Selects between LOCAL or REMOTE situation Active when PO220 2 or 3 N Right Soft key Function defined by the text directly above on the display J 1 Decreases the parameter contents 2 Decreases the speed 3 Selects the next group of the Parameter Group list j Accelerates the motor following the acceleration ramp Active when 0224 0 in LOC or 0227 in REM J Decelerates the motor following the deceleration ramp down to stop Active when P0224 0 in LOC or 227 0 in REM It accelerates motor following the acceleration ramp up to the speed defined in PO122 It keeps the motor at this speed as long as pressed When released it decelerates the motor following the deceleration ramp down to stop Active when al the conditions below were fulfilled 1 Run Stop Stop 2 General Enable Active 3 PO225
138. METER 37 The ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER E P function allows that the speed reference be adjusted by means of 2 digital inputs one for incrementing it and another for decrementing it In order to enable this function the speed reference must first be configured to be via by setting PO221 7 and or P0222 7 After this function has been enabled it is only necessary to program two of the digital inputs P0263 to PO270 in 11 Increase and 12 Decrease E P The operation of this function can be observed in the next figure It is important to point out that the increase of the speed reference is done with the application of 24 V at the digital inputs whereas the decrease is done with the application of O V In order to reset the reference 24 V must be applied at the INCREASE input and O V at the DECREASE input simultaneously while the CFW 11 inverter is disabled Increase Digital Inputs Speed Reference Decrease Enabling Minimum Time Dix Increase open H Reset lt Time Dlx Decrease Time 24V B Dlx Run Stop Figure 12 5 Electronic potentiometer function 12 9 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 6 ZERO SPEED LOGIC 35 This function allows the configuration of a speed in which the inverter will enter a stop condition disable itself It is recommended to use this function whe
139. Motor Current DC Link Voltage 0564 0 otor Frequency otor Voltage otor Torque ocess Variable D Setpoint lt lt lt COND gt gt gt gt oH 14 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description They select the signals that will be recorded at the channels 1 to 4 of the Trace Function The options are the same that are available at 550 By selecting the Not Selected option the total memory available for the Trace function is distributed between the active channels P0571 Start Trace Function Adjustable E Or Factory 0 Range On Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It initiates the waiting for the Trace Function trigger Since it is a parameter that can be changed with the motor running it is not necessary to press Save on the keypad HMI for the trigger waiting to initiate This parameter does not have effect if there is no active channel or if there is no memory ovailable for the Trace Function P0560 P0571 returns automatically to O for safety reasons if any of the parameters between P0550 and P0564 is changed P0572 Day Month Trace Triggered Adjustable 00 00 to 31 12 Factory Range Setting Trace Function 52 P0573 Year Trace
140. Motors Automation Energy Transmission amp Distribution Coatings Frequency Inverter CFW 11 V3 1X Programming Manual BEEN 2 is Programming Manual series CFW 11 Language English Document Number 0899 5620 05 software Version 3 1X Publication Date 03 2012 Summary Chapter 0 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Quick Parameter Relerenc NETTE TT 0 1 Quick Fault and Alarm Reference measann e e na AVAKIAN 0 30 Chapter 1 Safety Notices Safety Notices int hiss MORBO e 1 1 12 Safety Notices on the 1 1 3 Preliminar Recommendaliors ausit us tto i e toute teu E MD MIEL MEE 1 2 Chapter 2 General Information 2 1 About this Manual Mesue situ e e esta 2 1 2 2 Terminology and 5 50 000 2 1 2 2 1 Terms and Definitions Used in the 2 eene 2 1 22 2 Numerical Otis es ulta ete tas 2 3 2 2 3 Symbols for the Parameter Properties Description 2 20202 29 2 3 Chapter 3 About the CFW 11 3 1 About the CFW 11 Y 3 1 Chapter 4 Keypad HMI A Keypad UU er eee ee reer 4 1 Chapter 5
141. Not Used 23 Id Current 24 Current 25 Id Current 26 Iq Current 27 lsa Current 28 Isb Current 29 Current 30 Imr Current 31 Imr Current 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 32 Ud Voltage 33 Uq Voltage 34 Flux Angle 35 Usal rec 36 lxt Output 37 Rotor speed 38 Phi Angle 39 Usd_rec 40 Usq_rec 41 Flux_al 42 Flux 6 43 Stator Speed 44 Slip 45 Flux reference 46 Real Flux 47 Reg ud 48 Not Used 49 Total Curr wlt 50 Is Current 51 lactive 52 sR 53 TR 54 PfeR 55 Pfe 56 Pgap 57 58 Fslip 59 m nc 60 m AST 61 m_ 62 m LINHA 63 BOOST 64 SINPHI 65 SINPHI120 66 Ib 67 Ic 68 69 70 ZERO V 71 P0676 Value 2 Real Speed Use P0258 Gain 0 000 to 9 999 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms 1 000 13 8 AO3 Signal Type P0259 P0260 ACA Function 0 0 to 20 mA 1 4 to 20 mA 2 20 to 0 mA 3 20 to 4 mA 4 0 10 5 10 0 6 10to l10V 4 0 10 39 39 13 10 13 7 P0260 AO4Fundion See 5 257 5 39 137 261 P0262 AOA Gain 0 000 to 9 999 5 Output Current 1 000 39 13 8 See options in 259 AO4 Signal 4 0 10 39 13 10 P0263 P0264 DII Function
142. O 08 6 1 P0058 Third Fault 010 999 RO 08 16 9 P0059 Third Fault Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 0060 J Third Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0061 Third Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 P0062 Fourth Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0063 Fourth Flt Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 0064 Fourth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0065 Fourth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 P0066 Fifth Faul 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0067 Fifth Fault Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 P0068 Fifth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0069 Fifth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 0070 Sixth Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 0071 Sixth Fault Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 POO72 Sixth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0073 Sixth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 1 0074 Seventh Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0075 Seventh Flt Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 0076 Seventh Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 0077 Seventh Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 0078 Eighth Fault O to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0079 Eighth Flt Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 Eighth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0081 Eighth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0082 Ninth Fault O to 999 16 9 P0083 Ninth Faul
143. OE 03 module temperature sensor No Broken Cable Alarm It means that the inverter is not in the broken cable alarm condition detected at any of the IOE 01 02 or IOE 03 module temperature sensors No Alarm and No Broken Cable Alarm lt means that the inverter is not in the motor high temperature alarm condition and it is not in the broken cable alarm condition detected at any of the 01 IOE 02 or IOE O3 module temperature sensors No IOE Fault and No Broken Cable Alarm means that the inverter is not disabled by motor high temperature fault and it is not in the broken cable alarm condition detected at any of the 01 02 or IOE 03 module temperature sensors Definitions of the symbols used in the function P0002 Motor Speed N P0001 Speed Reference Nx P0288 Nx Speed It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user Ny P0289 Ny Speed It is a reference point of the speed selected by the user Ix P0290 Ix Current It is a reference point of the current selected by the user Is P0003 Motor Current Torque 0009 Motor Torque Tx P0293 Tx Torque It is a reference point of the torque selected by the user PVx P0533 PVx Process Variable It is a reference point selected by the user PVy P0534 PVy Process Variable It is a reference point selected by the user Nt Total Reference refer to the figure 13 8 Hx P0294 Hx Time F
144. OG command the motor accelerates up to the value defined in PO122 following the adjusted acceleration ramp The source of the JOG command is defined in the parameters P0225 Local Situation or PO228 Remote Situation If the JOG command source has been defined for the digital inputs 011 to 018 one of these inputs must be programmed as presented in the table 12 1 Table 12 1 JOG command via digital input selection Digital Input For more details refer to the figure 13 6 h The speed direction is defined by the parameters P0223 or P0226 The JOG command is effective only with the motor stopped For the JOG refer to the description below 12 4 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0122 JOG Speed Reference P0123 JOG Speed Reference Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 150 rpm Range Setting 125 rpm Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 21 Speed References Description The JOG or JOG commands are always carried out via digital inputs Dlx input must be programmed for JOG and another for JOG as presented in the table 12 2 next Table 12 2 Selection of the JOG and JOG commands via digital inputs CIE 267 17 D ___ gm apes During the JOG or JOG commands the values of PO122 and P0123 are respectively added or subtracted from the speed reference to
145. Outputs Lt 41 Digital Outputs Description It is used in the digital output and relay functions F gt Fx F gt Fx 13 25 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0283 P Toy On Time P0284 002 Off Time P0285 DO3 On Time P0286 DO3 Off Time Adjustable 0 0 to 300 0 s Factory 0 05 Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs H 41 Digital Outputs Description Those parameters are used in relay outputs 2 and 3 Timer functions they adjust the time for the activation or deactivation of the relay after a transition of the digital input programmed for this function as detailed in the parameters of the previous section Thus after Dlx transition for activating or deactivating the programmed relay it is necessary that this remains in On Off for at least the time adjusted in the parameters 283 0285 284 0286 Otherwise the timer will be reset Refer to the figure 13 5 P0287 Hysteresis for Nx and Adjustable 900 rpm Factory 18 rpm Range Setting 15 rpm Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Description It is used in the gt Nx and lt Ny functions of the digital and relay outputs P0288 Nx Speed Adjustable 0 18000 rpm Factory 120 rpm Range Setting
146. Outputs Value 1 P0697 Analog Outputs Value 2 P0698 Analog Outputs Value P0699 Analog Outputs Value 4 P0799 I O Update Delay Those parameters are used for monitoring and controlling the CFW 11 inverter by means of communication interfaces For a detailed description refer to the communication manual of the used interface These manuals are supplied in electronic format on the CD ROM that comes with the product P Communication 49 SoftPLC 50 SOFTPLC 50 18 1 SOFTPLC The SoftPLC function allows the frequency inverter to assume PLC Programmable Logical Controller functions For more details regarding the programming of those functions in the CFW 11 refer to the CFW 11 SoftPLC manual The parameters related to the SoftPLC are described next NOTE Parameters P1010 to P1019 be visualized the Monitoring Mode Refer to the sections 5 4 HMI and 5 6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings NOTE or When P1011 is a writing parameter and is programmed in PO205 206 or PO207 then its contents can be changed in the Monitoring Menu Refer to the section 5 6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings by using the HMI a gt or 18 2 CONFIGURATION 07 The next digital inputs and outputs are for the SoftPLC exclusive use 18 2 1 Digital Inputs 40 The next parameters will be visualized on the HMI when the IOC 01 IOC 02 or IO
147. P REV 11 Polarity 12 SoftPLC FWD 13 SoftPLC REV OONAAKRWN O 14 Al2 Polarity 15 PLC11 FWD 16 PLC11 REV Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting Year Properties Groups Setting P0224 LOC Run Stop Sel 0 1 0 Keys 0 1 Keys 31 33 110 13 30 Dix 2 Serial USB 3 Anybus CC 4 CANop DNet DP 5 SoftPLC 6 PLCTI 0225 LOC JOG Selection 0 Disable 1 JOG Key CFG 31 110 13 31 1 JOG Key 2 Dix 3 Serial USB 4 Anybus CC 5 CANop DNet DP 6 SoftPLC 7 P0226 FWD REV Sel See options in PO223 4 Dix CFG 32 33 110 13 30 P0227 REM Run Stop Sel See options in P0224 1 Dk CFG 32 33 110 13 30 P0228 JOG Selection See options 225 2 Dix CFG 32 110 13 31 229 Stop Mode Selection Ramp to Stop 0 Ramp to Stop CFG 31 32 33 13 31 Coast to Stop 34 2 Fast Stop 3 By Ramp with Ig 4 Fast Stop with lq P0230 Dead Zone Als 0 Off 0 Off 38 13 1 On P0231 AI Signal Function 0 Speed Ref 0 Speed Ref CFG 38 95 13 2 Ramp Ref 2 Max Torque Cur 3 Process Var 4 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 PLC Use P0232 All Gain 0 000 to 9 999 1 000 38 95 13 4 P0233 Signal 0 10 V 20 mA 0 0 38 95 13 5 1 4 to 20 mA V 20 mA 2 10
148. P0317 001 Yes Press Save At this moment the Oriented Start up routine is initiated and the Config status is indicated at the top left part of the keypad HMI The parameter Language P0201 English is already selected If necessary change the language by pressing Selec next and to select the language and then press Save WU PM Vector Control Set the content of PO202 pressing Selec Next press until selecting the option 007 Sensorless PM or 006 PM with Encoder Then press Save If necessary change the content of P0296 according to the used line voltage Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0151 P0153 P0185 P0321 P0322 P0323 and P0400 f necessary change the content of P0298 according to the inverter application Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0156 P0157 P0158 P0169 P0170 401 and P0404 The actuation time and level of the IGBTs overload protection will also be affected Th If necessary adjust the content of P0398 according to the motor service factor Therefore press Selec This change will affect the current value and the time for the actuation of the motor overload function bos If necessary change the content of PO400 according to the rated motor voltage Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0190 Figure 21 4 PM vector mode orien
149. PID Regulator Description The parameter P0535 works together with the parameter P0218 Condition to Leave the Zero Speed Disable giving the additional condition for leaving the Zero Speed Disable Therefore it is necessary that the PID error the difference between the setpoint and the process variable be higher than the value programmed in P0535 so that the inverter runs the motor again P0536 P0525 Automatic Setting Adjustable 0 Or Factory 1 Range Setting Properties GEG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description When the PID regulator setpoint is via keypad HMI 221 0222 0 P0536 1 On commutating from manual to automatic the value of the process variable P0040 will be loaded into P0525 Therefore PID oscillations during the commutation from manual to automatic are avoided P0538 Hysteresis VPx VPy Adjustable 0 0 to 5 0 96 Factory 1 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via 46 PID Regulator Description The programmed hysteresis value will be used in the following digital and relay output functions Function 2 22 Process Variable gt Vpx and PO2xy 23 Process Variable lt Where P0533 P0538 P0534 P0538 and PO2xy 0275 P0280 20 15 PID Regulator 46 20 7 ACADEMIC PID The controller implemente
150. RAMETER GROUPS 27 DC Volt Limit 9 12 Scalar Control V f Description It is the actuation level of the DC link voltage limitation function for the V f mode N Setting 0151 value a The P0151 factory setting leaves inactive the DC link voltage limitation function for the V f mode In order to activate it one must reduce the value of P0151 as suggested in the table 9 2 Table 9 2 Recommended actuation levels for the DC link regulation 220 230 380V 400 415 V 440 460V 480V 500 525V 550 575 600V 660 690 V P0206 0 1 P0151 375 V m ar xy a a b In case DC link overvoltage F022 keeps happening during the deceleration reduce the value of PO151 gradually or increase the deceleration ramp time PO101 and or P0103 Ifthe supply line is permanently at a voltage level that results in a DC link voltage higher than the 151 setting it will not be possible to decelerate the motor In this case reduce the line voltage or increase the value of the PO151 setting d If even with the procedures above it is not possible to decelerate the motor in the necessary time use the dynamic braking Refer to the chapter 14 Dynamic Braking n um n 7 P0152 DC Link Voltage Regulator Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 00 to 9 99 Factory 1 50 Range Setting Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUP
151. Rated Voltage and P0297 Switching Frequency at the Inverter B If inverters and B drive different motors verify the Inverter B motor parameters 8 In order to copy the contents of the Inverter A parameters to other inverters repeat the same procedures 5 to 7 described previously INVERTER INVERTER A B Parameters Parameters HMI HMI INV y d 2 EEPROM EEPROM HMI HMI Figure 7 2 Parameter copy from Inverter A to the Inverter NOTE As long as the keypad HMI is performing the reading or the writing procedure it will not be possible to operate it 7 5 Starting up and Settings 7 6 Available Control Types AVAILABLE CONTROL TYPES 8 1 CONTROL TYPES The inverter feeds the motor with variable voltage current and frequency by means of whose the control of the motor speed is obtained The values applied to the motor follow a control strategy which depends on the selected type of control and on the inverter parameter settings Choose the control type in function of the static and dynamic torque and speed requirements of the driven load Control modes and their main characteristics V f scalar control it is the simplest control mode by imposed voltage frequency with an open loop speed regulation or with slip compensation programmable it allows multimotor operation VVW Voltage Vector WEG it allows a static speed
152. Reference 0 to 18000 rpm 150 125 rpm 21 2 4 P0123 JOG Reference 0 to 18000 rpm 150 125 rpm Vector 21 2 5 0124 Multispeed Ref 1 O to 18000 rpm 90 75 rpm 21 36 2 7 0125 Multispeed Ref 2 0 18000 300 250 21 36 2 7 0126 Multispeed Ref 3 0 to 18000 rpm 600 500 rom 21 36 2 7 PO127 Multispeed Ref 4 0 to 18000 rpm 900 750 rom 21 36 2 7 P0128 ultispeed Ref 5 0 to 18000 rpm 200 1000 rpm 21 36 2 7 P0129 ultispeed Ref 6 0 to 18000 rpm 500 1250 rpm 21 36 2 7 P0130 ultispeed Ref 7 O to 18000 rpm 800 1500 rpm 21 36 2 7 P0131 ultispeed Ref 8 O to 18000 rpm 650 1375 rpm 21 36 2 7 P0132 ax Overspeed Level O to 100 96 10 96 CFG 22 45 2 5 P0133 inimum Speed 0 to 18000 rpm 90 75 rpm 04 22 2 6 P0134 aximum Speed O to 18000 rpm 800 1500 rpm 04 22 2 6 and 21 17 P0135 Max Output Current 0 2 to 2 274 cus VVW 04 26 9 7 0136 Manual Torque Boost 0109 1 V t 04 23 9 2 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D sut ius a ae 0137 Autom Torque Boost 0 00 to 1 00 0 00 P0138 Slip Compensation 10 0 to 10 0 0 0 96 ui x P0139 Output Current Filter 0 0 to 16 0 s 0 25 and VVW 23 25 9 4 PO140 Dwell Time At Start 0 0 to 10 0 s 0 05 and VVW 23 25 9 5 P0141 Dwell Speed At Start 010 300 rpm 90 rpm V f and VVW 23 25 9 5 P0142 Max Out
153. S VUE hdc L 127 V DC Volt Limit Description It defines the DC Link Voltage Regulator proportional gain refer to the figure 9 12 P0152 multiplies the DC link voltage error i e Error actual DC link voltage P0151 and it is normally used to prevent overvoltage in applications with eccentric loads 9 5 START UP IN THE V f CONTROL MODE NOTE Read the whole CFW 11 user s manual before installing powering or operating the inverter Sequence for installation verification powering and start up a Install the inverter according to the chapter 3 Installation and Connection of the CFW 11 user s manual wiring all the power and control connections 9 13 Scalar Control V f b Prepare the inverter and apply power according to the section 5 1 Prepare for Start Up of the CFW 11 user s manual c Adjust the password P0000 5 according to the section 5 3 Password Setting in POOOO of this manual d Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor execute the Oriented Start up routine according to the item 5 2 2 Oriented Start Up of the CFW 11 user s manual Refer to the section 11 7 Motor Data of this manual e Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application program the digital and analog inputs and outputs HMI keys etc according to the application needs N For applications That are simple which can use the factory settings
154. Server 5 Bluetooth 6 Zigbee 7 Reserved 8 Reserved 9 Reserved 0 5485 1 Reserved 2 Reserved 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Profibus DP 7 DeviceNet 8 9 EtherNet IP 20 CC Link 21 Modbus TCP 22 Modbus RTU 23 Profinet IO 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 0724 Anybus Comm Status 0 Disabled RO 09 114 17 2 1 Not Supported 2 Access Error 3 Offline 4 Online 0 25 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms D ay piis iat P0725 Anybus Address O to 255 114 17 2 P0726 Anybus Baud Rate 010 3 114 17 2 0727 Anybus I O Words 2 2 Words 2 2 Words CFG 114 17 3 3 3 Words 4 4 Words 5 5 Words 6 6 Words 7 7 Words 8 8 Words 9 PLC11 Board 0728 Anybus Read Word 3 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0729 Anybus Read Word 4 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0730 Read Word 5 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0731 Anybus Read Word 6 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0732 Anybus Read Word 7 01 1499 0 CFG 4 7 3 P0733 Read Word 8 O to 1499 0 4 7 3 0734 Anybus Write Word 3 01 1499 0 CFG 4 7 3 P0735 Write Word 4 01 1499 0 CFG 4 7 3 P0736 Anybus Write Word 5 O to 1
155. Stator Resistance Rs P0410 Motor Magnetizing Current Im P0411 Motor Flux Leakage Inductance ols P0412 Lr Rr Constant Rotor Time Constant T P0413 Tn Constant Mechanical Time Constant Self Tuning function parameters Refer to the item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 11 14 Vector Control 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to 0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet Being in the possession of the motor equivalent circuit data it is possible to calculate the value to be programmed in the parameters from P0409 to P0412 instead of using the self tuning to obtain them Input data Motor data sheet Nominal voltage informed in the motor data in Volts f Nominal frequency informed in the motor data in Hz resistance of the motor stator per phase in Ohms R resistance of the motor rotor per phase in Ohms stator inductive reactance in Ohms X rotor inductive reactance in Ohms X magnetizing inductive reactance in Ohms motor no load current angular speed 2xr xf P0400 x R P0409 V V xl x 0 95 P0410 P0400 P0400 x X X x X X X P0411 P0400 x X X P0412 X XR 11 15 Vector Control 11 8 VECTOR CONTROL 29 11 8 1 Speed Regulator 90 The parameters related to the CFW 11 speed regulator are presented in this group P0160 Speed Regulator Configuration
156. The other function RIDE THROUGH allows the recovery of the inverter without being disabled by undervoltage when a failure in the voltage supply occurs Since these functions work in different manners depending on the used control mode V f or Vector they will be described in full detail next for each one of the modes P0320 Flying Start Ride Through Adjustable 0 Factory 0 Range 1 Flying Start Setting 2 Flying Start Ride Through 3 Ride Through Properties CFG and PM Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 44 FlyStart RideThru Description The parameter P0320 selects the functions Flying Start and Ride Through use More details in the subsequent sections 12 11 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 7 1 V f Flying Start In the V f mode the inverter imposes a fixed frequency at the start defined by the speed reference and applies a voltage ramp defined at the parameter P0331 The Flying Start function will be activated after the time adjusted in PO332 elapses to allow the motor demagnetization every time a Run command is driven 12 7 2 Vector Flying Start 12 7 2 1 202 3 The behavior of the Flying Start function FS in the sensorless mode during acceleration and reacceleration can be understood from the figure 12 6 The figure 12 6 b shows the behavior of the speed reference when the FS function is started with stopped motor shaft and small P0
157. The troubleshooting structure of the inverter is based on the indication of faults and alarms In a fault event IGBTs firing pulses are disabled and the motor coasts to stop The alarm works as a warning to the user that critical operation conditions are occurring and a fault may occur if the situation does not change Refer to the CFW 11 user s manual chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance and the section Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms of this manual to obtain more information regarding the Faults and Alarms MOTOR OVERLOAD PROTECTION The Motor Overload protection is based on the use of curves that simulate the heating and cooling of the motor in overload events according to IEC 60947 4 2 and UL 508C standards The fault and alarm codes for the motor overload protection are F072 and A046 respectively The motor overload is given in function of the reference value In x SF motor rated current multiplied by the service factor which is the maximum value at which the protection must not actuate because the motor is able to operate indefinitely with this current value without suffering damages However for that protection to act in an appropriate manner the thermal image of the motor which corresponds to the heating up and cooling down times of the motor is estimated The thermal image in its turn depends on the motor thermal constant which is estimated based on the motor power and number of poles The therma
158. Triggered Adjustable 00 to 99 Factory Range Setting P0574 Hour Trace Triggered Adjustable 00 00 to 23 59 Factory Range Setting P0575 Second Trace Triggered Adjustable 00 to 59 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description P0572 to P0575 record the date and hour of the trigger occurrence These parameters and the points acquired by the Trace Function are not saved when the inverter is powered off There are two possibilities for PO572 to P0575 being null No acquisition was performed after the inverter power on or Trace happened without keypad HMI connected to the inverter no RTC P0576 Trace Function Status Adjustable 0 Oi Factory Range 1 Waiting Setting 2 Triggered 3 Concluded Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It indicates if the Trace function has been initiated if there has been already a trigger and if the signals have already been completely acquired 19 6 PID Regulator 46 PID REGULATOR 46 20 1 DESCRIPTION AND DEFINITIONS The CFW 11 has the special function PID REGULATOR which can be used to control a closed loop process This function places a proportional integral and derivative regulator superposed to the normal CFW 11 speed control Refer to the block diagram in the figure 20 1 The process cont
159. When the DC link voltage reaches the level adjusted in PO151 a command is sent to the ramp block which inhibits the motor speed variation ramp hold Refer to the figures 9 10 and 9 11 With this function an optimized deceleration time minimum possible for the driven load is obtained The use is recommended for loads running with high inertia moment referenced to the motor shaft or loads with medium inertia which require short deceleration ramps DC link Error Error lt 0 Ramp Hold inactive Voltage 0 Error gt 0 Ramp Hold active B Ramp Hold P0151 Input Output Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Figure 9 10 Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram Scalar Control V f DC Link Voltage P0004 22 Overvoltage P0151 lt DC Link Regulation Nominal U Time Output Speed Time Figure 9 11 Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Hold function 2 Ramp Acceleration It is effective in any situation regardless of the motor speed condition accelerating decelerating or at constant speed Working the DC link voltage is compared with the value adjusted in PO151 the difference between these signals is multiplied by the proportional gain 0152 and the result is added to the ramp output Refer to the figures 9 12 and 9 13 In a similar manner as the Ramp Hold with this function an optimized deceleration time minimum p
160. Word 6 P0719 DeviceNet Network Status P0720 DeviceNet Master Status C 3 3 2 gt Q o 3 9 P0721 CANopen Communication Status P0722 CANopen Node Status Ho a 7 a 3 Q 2 EJ a 5 T 9 nu F gt 2 5 3 o a o a o a 7 C o 9 the CANopen communication manual or to the DeviceNet communication manual supplied in electronic format the CD ROM that comes with the product gt 2 lt w c o 2 m gt 0686 Anybus CC Control Word P0687 Anybus CC Speed Reference P0723 Anybus Identification P0724 Anybus Communication Status P0725 Anybus Address P0726 Anybus Baud Rate E N P0727 Anybus I O Words P0728 Anybus Reading Word 3 P0729 Anybus Reading Word 4 P0730 Reading Word 5 P0731 Anybus Reading Word 6 P0732 Anybus Reading Word 7 P0733 Anybus Reading Word 8 P0734 Anybus Writing Word 3 P0735 Anybus Writing Word 4 P0736 Anybus Writing Word 5 P0737 Anybus Writing Word 6 P0738 Anybus Writing Word 7 3 3 2 gt Q o 29 P0739 Anybus Writing Word 8 Those are param
161. a full scale of at least 1 1 times the highest value to be controlled Example If a 20 bar pressure has to be controlled a sensor with a full scale of at least 22 bar 1 1 x 20 must be chosen Once the sensor has been defined the type of signal to be read at the input if current or voltage must be selected and the corresponding switch S1 or S2 be set for that selection In this guide it will be assumed that the sensor signal will be 4 to 20 mA configuring P0238 1 and S1 32 ON Afterwards the gain P0237 and the offset P0239 of the feedback signal can be adjusted so that the process variable be read at the analog input with the highest possible resolution without saturation In this case adjust the parameters P0237 and P0239 according to the following example NOTE In order to avoid the saturation of the feedback analog input during regulation overshoots the signal must range from O to 90 96 0 to 9 V 4 to 18 mA This adaptation can be done by changing the gain of the analog input selected as feedback 20 4 PID Regulator 46 Example Full scale of the transducer maximum output value 25 bar FS 25 Operation range range of interest 010 15 bar OR 15 Opting to maintain PO237 1 000 and P0239 0 factory setting which is the most common for most of the applications P0525 50 96 Keypad PID setpoint will be equivalent to the used sensor full scale value i e 0 5 x F5
162. able alarm Shorted temperature sensor Sensor 5 Cable Alarm F228 Refer to the RS 232 5 485 Serial communication manual Serial Communication Timeout F229 Refer to the Anybus CC communication manual Anybus Offline F230 Anybus Access Error F233 Refer to the CANopen communication manual and or the DeviceNet communication manual CAN Bus Power Failure F234 Bus Off F235 Refer to the CANopen communication manual CANopen Communication Error F236 Master Idle F237 DeviceNet Connect Timeout F238 Profibus DP Interface in Clear Mode F239 9 Offline Profibus DP nterface F240 9 Profibus DP Module Access Error Refer to the Profibus DP communication manual 0 34 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes 19 igh temperature at IGBT High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 1 U phase 2301 09 Overtemperature IGBT Overtemperature fault measured with he temperature sensor NTC of the book 1 U phase IGBT A303 19 igh Temperature at IGBT VB High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 1 V phase F304 10 Overtemperature at IGBT VB Overtemperature fault measured with he temperature sensor NTC of the book 1 V phase IGBT A306 19 High Temperature at
163. ad HMI display in the monitoring mode The options that present the symbol at the end indicate that the variable will be displayed in absolute numerical values The options ended with the symbol configure the variable to be displayed as a bar graph in percentage values More details on this programming can be seen in the section 5 6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings P0208 Reference Scale Factor Adjustable 1 to 18000 Factory 1800 Range Setting 1500 P0212 Reference Decimal Point Adjustable 0 wxyz Factory 0 Range 1 wxyz Setting 2 wx yz 3 w xyz Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description They define how the Speed Reference P0001 and the Motor Speed P0002 will be presented when the motor runs at the synchronous speed In order to indicate the value in rpm P0208 must be adjusted at the motor synchronous speed according to the next table Table 5 4 Synchronous speed reference in rpm Frequency Number of Motor Poles Synchronous Speed in rpm 3000 1500 D NNI 1000 3600 1800 1200 In order to indicate values in other units use the following formulas Speed x P0208 P0002 908 Synchronous Speed x 10 P0212 Reference x P0208 P0001 dn Synchronous Speed 10 02 2 5 6 Programming Basic Instructions Where Reference Speed refer
164. al Enable Open Figure 12 12 DC braking operation via general disabling V f mode For the V f scalar control mode there is a dead time motor rotates free before starting the DC braking This time is necessary to the demagnetization of the motor and it is proportional to its speed During the DC braking the inverter indicates the DCbreak status at the keypad HMI top left corner During the braking process if the inverter is enabled the braking is interrupted and the inverter will operate normally again 12 21 Functions Common to All the Control Modes ATTENTION The DC Braking may continue active after the motor has already stopped Be careful with the motor thermal sizing for short period cyclic braking P0301 DC Braking Speed Adjustable 450 rpm Factory 30 rpm Range Setting Properties V f VVW and Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 47 DC Braking Description This parameter establishes the beginning point for the DC braking application at stopping Refer to the figures 12 11 a and b P0302 DC Braking Voltage Adjustable 0 0 to 10 0 Factory 2 0 Range Setting Properties and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI Description This parameter adjusts the DC voltage braking torque applied to the motor during the braking The adjustment must be done by increasing gradually the P0302 value which var
165. al air fault and alarm 3 IGBTs fault Internal air fault CRG 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 45 Protections Factory 0 Setting Faults and Alarms Description The overtemperature protection is carried out by means of the measurement of the temperature with the IGBTs and power board internal air NTCs being able to generate alarms and faults In order to configure the desired protection set PO353 according to the table below Table 15 6 Options of the parameter P0353 Enables fault F051 IGBT Overtemperature and alarm A050 IGBT High Temperature Enables fault F153 Internal Air Overtemperature and alarm A152 Internal Air High Temperature It enables the rectifier overtemperature alarm 10 S F A Air F A Enables fault F051 and alarm A050 for IGBTs overtemperature S F A Air F Enables only fault F153 for internal air overtemperature It enables the rectifier overtemperature alarm 10 Enables only fault F051 for IGBT overtemperature Enables fault F153 and alarm A152 for internal air overtemperature S F Air F A Enables only fault F051 for IGBT overtemperature Enables only fault F153 for internal air overtemperature S F Air F P0354 Heatsink Fan Protection Adjustable 0 On Factory 1 Range feu Setting Properties GEC Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI Description When the heatsink f
166. ale Reading Parameter 2 P0215 Full Scale Reading Parameter 3 Adjustable 0 0 to 200 0 96 Factory 100 0 96 Range Setting Properties GEG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description Those parameters configure the full scale of the reading variables 1 2 and 3 selected through P0205 P0206 and P0207 when they were programmed to be presented as bar graphs P0216 HMI Display Contrast Adjustable 0 to 37 Factory 27 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS Description It allows setting the keypad HMI display contrast level Higher values configure a higher contrast level Programming Basic Instructions 5 5 DATE AND TIME SETTING Display Indication Monitoring Mode The parameter Day Press Menu P0194 is already selected right soft key If necessary set P0194 according to the actual day Therefore press Select For changing P0194 The group 00 ALL odei a gt 2n PARAMETERS is already selected Proceed in the same way for adjusting the parameters from Month P0195 to The group 01 Seconds P0199 PARAMETER GROUPS is When P0199 is finished selected the Real Time Clock will be Press Select adjusted Press Return A new list of groups is left soft key showed on the display with Press Return the group 20 Ramps sel
167. an speed reaches a value below 14 of the rated speed the fault F179 Heatsink Fan Speed Fault will be generated This parameter makes it possible that the generation of this fault be disabled as presented in the next table Table 15 7 Actions for the parameter P0354 options P0354 The heatsink fan speed fault protection is disabled It enables the fault F179 The inverter will be disabled if the fault occurs P0355 Configuration of Fault F185 Adjustable Oui Factory 1 Range On Setting Properties CFO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter allows disabling the actuation of F185 fault Fault in the preload contactor If PO355 0 the Fault in the preload contactor will remain deactivated F185 fault will not be generated When the inverter is a frame size E with DC power supply it s necessary to adjust 55 0 15 13 Faults and Alarms P0356 Dead Time Compensation Adjustable 0 Ofi Factory 1 Range Setting Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter must be kept always in 1 On Only in special maintenance cases the value Off can be used P0357 Line Phase Loss Time Adjustable Oto 60s Factory 365 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description
168. and the motor in the forward direction and in the reverse direction by means of digital inputs With the application of 24 V to the input programmed for FWD Run Dlx 4 the motor accelerates in the forward direction until reaching the speed reference Once the FWD Run input has been released 0 V and 24 V has been applied at the input programmed for REV Run Dlx 5 the CFW 11 will activate the motor in the reverse direction until it reaches the speed reference Refer to the figure 13 6 I 13 33 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs 13 34 Dynamic Braking DYNAMIC BRAKING The braking torque that can be obtained through the application of frequency inverters without dynamic braking resistors varies from 10 96 to 35 96 of the motor rated torque In order to obtain higher braking torques resistors for dynamic braking are used In this case the regenerated energy is dissipated on the resistor mounted externally to the inverter This type of braking is used in the cases when short deceleration times are wished or when high inertia loads are driven For the vector control mode there is the possibility of the use of the Optimal Braking eliminating in many cases the need of the dynamic braking 14 1 DYNAMIC BRAKING 28 The Dynamic Braking function can only be used if a braking resistor has been connected to the CFW 11 and if the parameters related to it have been adjusted properly See next the description of the para
169. ated Voltage Bit 8 EMC Filter Bit 9 Safety Relay Bit 10 0 24V 1 DC Link Bit 11 DC Special Hardware Bit 12 Dyn Brak IGBT Bit 13 Special Bit 14 and 15 Reserved P0030 5 Temperature U 20 0 to 150 0 C RO 09 45 5 4 P0031 IGBTs Temperature V 20 0 to 150 0 C RO 09 45 5 4 0032 IGBTs Temperature W 20 0 to 150 0 C RO 09 45 5 4 P0033 Rectifier Temperature 20 0 to 150 0 C RO 09 45 5 4 P0034 Internal Air Temp 20 0 to 150 0 C RO 09 45 5 4 P0036 Fan Heatsink Speed 0 to 15000 rpm RO 09 6 6 0037 Motor Overload Status 0 to 100 RO 09 6 6 P0038 Encoder Speed 0 to 65535 rpm RO 09 6 6 P0039 Encoder Pulses Count 0 to 40000 RO 09 6 7 P0040 PID Process Variable 0 0 to 100 0 RO 09 46 20 9 P0041 PID Setpoint Value 0 0 to 100 0 RO 09 46 20 9 0042 Time Powered 0 to 65535 h RO 09 6 7 P0043 Time Enabled 0 0 to 6553 5 h RO 09 6 7 P0044 kWh Output Energy 0 to 65535 kWh RO 09 6 8 P0045 Fan Enabled Time 0 to 65535 h RO 09 6 8 0048 Present Alarm 0 to 999 RO 09 6 8 0049 Present Fault 0 to 999 RO 09 6 8 P0050 Last Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 6 9 P0051 Last Fault Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 P0052 Last Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0053 Last Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 P0054 Second Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0055 Second Flt Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 P0056 Second Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 P0057 Second Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 R
170. ation of all of the functions and parameters of the CFW 11 Frequency Inverter This manual must be used together with the CFW 11 user s manual The text intents to supply additional information to facilitate the use and programming of CFW 11 in specific applications 2 2 TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINITIONS 2 2 1 Terms and Definitions Used in the Manual Normal Duty Cycle ND It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for continuous operation and overload of 110 96 during 1 minute It is selected by programming P0298 nom ND Application 0 Normal Duty ND It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application to high torques in relation to their rated torque when operating in permanent regimen during start acceleration or deceleration Inverter rated current for use with normal overload regimen ND Normal Duty nom ND Overload 1 1 x minute nom ND Heavy Duty Cycle HD It is the inverter operation regimen that defines the maximum current value for continuous operation and overload of 150 96 during 1 minute It is selected by programming P0298 nom HD Application 2 1 Heavy Duty HD It must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high overload torques in relation to their rated torque when operating in constant speed during start acceleration or deceleration Inverter rated current for use with heavy overl
171. ator is active PO203 1 and in Automatic mode for the inverter to leave the disable condition besides the condition programmed in P0218 it is also necessary that the PID error the difference between the Setpoint and the process variable be higher than the value programmed in P0535 Refer to the section 20 6 Parameters for more details 12 10 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0219 Zero Speed Time Adjustable 01099965 Factory Os Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 35 Zero Speed Logic Description It defines whether or not the Zero Speed Disable function will be timed If P0219 0 the function works without timing If PO219 gt 0 the function will be configured with timing and the counting of the time adjusted in this parameter will be initiated after the Speed Reference and the Actual Motor Speed become lower than the value adjusted in P0291 When the counting reaches the time defined in P0219 the inverter will be disabled If during the time counting any of the conditions that cause the zero speed disable ceases being fulfilled then the time counting will be reset and the inverter continues enabled P0291 Zero Speed Zone Refer to the item 13 1 4 Digital Outputs Relays for more details 12 7 FLYING START RIDE THROUGH 44 The FLYING START function allows starting a motor that is spinning freely accelerating it from the speed it is found
172. ay one gets a stable operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance During the Oriented Start up routine the Config Configuration status will be indicated on the top left part of the keypad HMI 11 32 Vector Control 4 Parameters related to the motor Program the contents of parameters from P0398 P0400 to P0406 directly with the motor nameplate data Options for the setting of parameters P0409 to P0412 Automatic with the inverter executing the self tuning routine as selected in one of the P0408 options From the motor data sheet supplied by its manufacturer Refer to the procedure in the item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet of this manual Manually copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW 1 1 inverter which uses and identical motor e Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application set the digital and analog inputs and outputs HMI keys etc according to the application needs g ue N For applications Thot are simple which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and outputs use the Menu 04 Basic Application Refer to the item 5 2 3 Setting Basic Application Parameters of the CFW 11 user s manual That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory setti
173. ble PID Setpoint 79 0528 1 5 x x P0295 x P0296 100 2767 When the signal is inverse 10 to O V 20 to 0 mA or 20 to 4 mA the values in the table become the beginning of the scale P0253 AOI Signal Type P0256 2 Signal Type Adjustable 0 Oto 10 V 20 mA Factory 0 Range 1 4 to 20 mA Setting 2 10 V 20 mA to 0 3 2010 4 mA P0259 AO3 Signal Type P0262 AO4 Signal Type Adjustable 0 0 to 20 mA Factory 4 Range 1 4 20 mA Setting 2 20 mA 100 3 2010 4 mA 4 oue 5 10 OW 6 101o 10 Properties CRE Access groups 071 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs Description These parameters configure if the analog output signal will be in current or voltage with direct or inverse reference In order to adjust these parameters it is also necessary to set the DIP switches of the control board or of the IOA Accessory Board according to the tables 13 5 13 6 and 13 7 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Table 13 5 DIP switches related to the analog outputs Parameter Output Switch leon P0253 P0256 o Table 13 6 Configuration of the analog outputs and AO2 signals ___0 00010 7 0020 _ OvOf 10 to 0 V 20 to 0 mA Table 13 7 Configuration of the analog outputs AO3 and AO4 signals P025
174. book 3 W phase IGBT High Load at IGBT W B3 F370 9 Overload fault at book 3 W phase IGBT Overload at IGBT W B3 A372 19 Overload alarm at book 4 U phase IGBT High Load at IGBT U B4 F373 09 Overload fault at book 4 U phase IGBT Overload at IGBT U B4 A375 49 Overload alarm at book 4 V phase IGBT High Load at IGBT V B4 F376 9 Overload fault at book 4 V phase IGBT Overload at IGBT V B4 A378 09 Overload alarm at book 4 W phase IGBT High Load at IGBT W B4 2379 10 Overload fault at book 4 W phase IGBT Overload at IGBT W B4 A381 19 Overload alarm at book 5 U phase IGBT High Load at IGBT U B5 2382 09 Overload fault at book 5 U phase IGBT Overload at IGBT U B5 384 19 Overload alarm at book 5 V phase IGBT High Load at IGBT V B5 F385 19 Overload fault at book 5 V phase IGBT Overload at IGBT V B5 Temperature gt 40 or 45 depending on the model refer to section 3 1 Installation Environment of the user s manual of the CFW 11M A387 49 Overload alarm at book 5 W phase IGBT High Load at IGBT W B5 F388 09 Overload fault at book 5 W phase IGBT Overload at IGBT W B5 19 Phase U book Icurrent unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 unbalance in the current Phase U B1 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value A391 0 Phase V book 1
175. by the F070 fault Overcurrent or Short circuit F071 it means that the inverter is not disabled by the FO71 fault Output Overcurrent 006 021 022 it means that the inverter is not disabled by the 2006 fault Line unbalance or phase loss neither FO21 DC Link Undervoltage nor by 22 DC Link Overvoltage No 051 054 057 it means that the inverter is not disabled by the F051 fault Overtemperature U Phase IGBTs neither by F054 Overtemperature V Phase IGBTs nor F057 Overtemperature W Phase IGBTs No F072 it means that the inverter is not disabled by the FO72 fault Motor Overload 4 20 mA OK it means that the current reference 4 to 20 mA at the analog inputs Alx is inside the 4 to 20 mA range P0695 Value it means that the state of the digital output will be controlled by P0695 which is written via the network Refer to the CFW 11 Serial communication manual for more details on this parameter Forward it means that when the motor is rotating in the forward direction the DOx saturated transistor and or relay with the coil energized and when the motor is rotating in the reverse direction the DOx open transistor and or relay with the coil not energized Ride Through it means that the inverter is executing the Ride Through function Pre charge OK It means that the DC Link voltage is above the pre charge voltage level Fault it means that the inverter is disabled by any type of fau
176. cation is done by means of the numbers 1 and 0 representing respectively the Active and Inactive states of the outputs The state of each output is considered as one digit in the sequence where DO represents the least significant digit Example In case the sequence 00010010 is presented on the keypad HMI it will correspond to the following status of the DOs Table 13 10 Digital outputs status 205 pos DOI P0275 DO1 Function RL1 P0276 DO2 Function RL2 P0277 Function P0278 004 Function P0279 DO5 Function Adjustable 0 to 42 Factory 0275 13 Range Setting 0276 2 0278 0 0279 0 Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L41 Digital Outputs Digital Outputs Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Table 13 11 Digital output functions EXC EEE HE EE HM HM DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 0 29 37 38 39 0 29 37 38 39 EEEEEEEN gt NUN ECC __ PEE DESC i oc ___4 ___ i BENE A Rn 12 13 14 15 2 27 8 16 7686 76 14 _ eee eee BSE c ae EK nmn BE ae BEE EES Nolfok 38 38 NoBokenCdleAom 40 4 40
177. ccess groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It selects the variable that will be used as the trigger source for the Trace Function This parameter has no effect when P0552 Alarm Fault or Dlx Those same variables can also be used as signals to be acquired through the parameters from P0561 up to P0564 P0551 Trigger Level for Trace Adjustable 100 0 to 340 0 Factory 0 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Trace Function 52 Description It defines the value for comparison with the variable selected in P0550 The full range of the variables selectable as trigger is presented in the next table Table 19 1 Full scale of the variables selectable as trigger _____ Full Scale Speed Reference 100 96 P0134 100 P0134 DC Link Voltage 100 Mox Lim P0151 340 3 4 x P0403 100 1 0 x P0400 200 2 0 x hones This parameter has no effect when PO0552 Alarm Fault or Dlx P0552 Trigger Condition for Trace Adjustable e POS 0 55 Factory 5 Range 1 P0550 lt gt P0551 Setting 2 550 gt P055 3 P0550 lt P0551 4 Alarm 5 Fault 6 Dlx Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It defines the condition for starting the signal acquisition T
178. ce by means of the acceleration deceleration ramps The function does not operate properly if two bands of Skip Speed overlap NOTE The speed references that do not pass through the speed ramp as JOG P0231 P0236 P0241 or P0246 1 are not considered 12 23 Functions Common to All the Control Modes Motor speed P0305 P0304 P0303 Speed Reference eo c e Figure 12 13 Skip Speed actuation curve 12 10 SEARCH OF ZERO OF THE ENCODER The zero search function attempts to synchronize the minimum counting or the maximum counting visualized in the parameter P0039 Accountant of the Pulses of Encoder with the pulse of zero of the encoder The function is activated by setting PO191 1 It will just be executed once when happening the first zero pulse after the activation of the function Among the actions accomplished are the parameter P0039 is reduced to zero or fitting with the value of 4 0405 and the parameter 0192 starts to indicate PO192 Completed P0191 Encoder Zero Search Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI Description 0 Factory 0 Setting V f VVW and Vector 00 ALL PARAMETERS On the inverter initialization the parameter PO191 starts on zero By setting to one it activates the operation of the zero search function while the parameter PO192 stays on zero
179. coder Torque control range 10 96 to 180 96 Accuracy 5 96 of the rated torque Sensorless vector control Torque control range 20 96 to 180 96 Accuracy 10 96 of the rated torque Minimum operating frequency 3 Hz When the speed regulator is positively saturated i e forward speed direction defined in PO223 P0226 the value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in PO169 When the speed regulator is negatively saturated i e reverse speed direction the value for the torque current limitation is adjusted in PO170 The torque at the motor shaft in 96 is given by the formula motor The formula described next must be used for torque For torque replace P0169 by PO170 P0401 x 70169 100 Tio P0401 2 P0410 x P0178 100 x 100 42 For torque control the sensorless vector mode 0202 3 observe The torque limits PO169 PO170 must be higher than 30 96 to assure the motor starting After the start and with the motor rotating above 3 Hz they can be reduced if necessary to values below 30 96 For torque control applications with frequencies until to O Hz use the vector with encoder control mode P0202 4 In the vector with encoder control type set the speed regulator for the mode optimized for torque control PO160 1 besides keeping it saturated Vector Control NOTE The motor rated current must be equivalent to the CFW 11 rat
180. control more accurate than the V f mode it adjusts itself automatically to the line variations and also to the load variations however it does not present fast dynamic response Sensorless Vector it is a field oriented control without motor speed sensor able to drive any standard motor speed control range of 1 100 speed control static precision of 0 5 96 of the rated speed high control dynamics Vector with Encoder it is a field oriented control it needs motor encoder and inverter encoder interface module or ENC2 speed control down to rpm speed control static precision of 0 01 96 of the rated speed high static and dynamic performance of the speed and torque control Vector with Encoder for PMSM motor It requires an incremental encoder at the motor and the encoder interface module or PLC11 at the inverter Sensorless Vector for PMSM motor Without speed sensor at the motor Speed control range 1 100 All these control modes are described in details in the chapters 9 Scalar Control V f 10 VVW Control 11 Vector Control and 21 PM Vector Control the related parameters and orientations regarding the use of each of these modes 8 1 Available Control Types Scalar Control V f SCALAR CONTROL V f It consists of a simple control based on a curve that links output voltage and frequency The inverter operates as a voltage source generating frequency and voltage values
181. copying the contents of the parameters from another CFW 11 inverter that uses an identical Ac motor E 11 4 OPTIMAL FLUX FOR SENSORLESS VECTOR CONTROL NOTE Active function only on the Sensorless Vector mode P0202 3 if 0406 2 The Optimal Flux function can be used for driving some types of WEG motors making it possible the operation at low speed with rated torque without the need of forced ventilation on the motor The frequency range for operation is 12 1 i e from 5 Hz to 60 Hz for 60 Hz rated frequency motors and from 4 2 Hz to 50 Hz for 50 Hz rated frequency motors NOTE WEG motors that can be used with the Optimal Flux function Nema Premium Efficiency Nema High Efficiency IEC Premium Efficiency Top Premium Efficiency and Alto Rendimento Plus Vector Control When this function is activating the motor flux is controlled in a way to reduce their electric losses on slow speeds That flux is dependent of the torque current filtered 0009 The Optimal Flux function is unnecessary in motors with independent ventilation 11 5 TORQUE CONTROL In vector control modes sensorless or with encoder it is possible to use the inverter in torque control mode instead of using it in speed control mode In this case the speed regulator must be kept saturated and the imposed torque value is defined by the torque limits in 169 0170 Performance of the torque control Vector control with en
182. crease Otherwise select reverse P0527 1 See figure 20 2 Examples a Direct A pump driven by an inverter filling up a reservoir with the PID controlling its level In order that the level process variable increases it is necessary that the flow increases which is obtained with the increase of the motor speed b Reverse A fan driven by an inverter doing the refrigeration of a cooling tower with the PID controlling its temperature In order that the temperature process variable increases it is necessary that the ventilation be reduced by means of the reduction of the motor speed 20 3 PID Regulator 46 a Direct AI2 Process Variable P0040 Direct PID P0527 0 P0041 P0535 ed P0041 P0040 d b Reverse AI2 5 Variable 0040 Reverse PID 0527 1 P0535 Nc er P0040 P0041 P0041 Sleep Being 0217 1 ed or er the percent deviation to activate the wake up mode Figure 20 2 a to c PID action type 3 To define the feedback input the feedback process variable measurement is always done via one of the analog inputs selected at P0524 In order to make this guide easier the AI2 input will be selected 0524 1 4 adjust the process variable scale the transducer sensor be used for process variable feedback must have
183. cy is calculated based on the load estimated torque which considers the existent motor data 10 1 VVW Control n m uenonop uoipuis3 04 COrOd Ud 60v0d LOvOd 4 66 0d vOVOd s Vil 56204 4 4 EOv0d 9 et 2 05 4 IW _ iD mr VOLOd 0010d S6Z0d ps 6 2 nby t 4 ope 220d e ii pu 5 ne 15104 Dd 4 5104 i 1 8 104 6004 n 0 04 LOVOd 9 i OrOd 00 0 2 gt 5 20004 Figure 10 1 VVW control block diagram 10 2 VVW Control 10 1 VVW CONTROL 25 The parameter group 25 VVW Control contains only 5 parameters related to that function PO139 PO140 P0141 P0202 and P0397 However since the parameters P0139 P0140 141 and P0202 were already presented in the section 9 1 Control only the parameter P0397 will be described next P0397 Slip Compensation During Regenerat
184. d HMI this parameter may change the parameter P0329 automatically Refer to the item 12 7 2 Vector Flying Start P0405 Number of Encoder Pulses Adjustable 100 to 9999 ppr Factory 1024 ppr Range Setting Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description It sets the number of pulses per rotation ppr of the used incremental encoder 11 13 Vector Control P0406 Motor Ventilation Adjustable 0 Self Ventilated Factory 0 Range 1 Separate Ventilation Setting 2 Optimal Flux 3 Extended Protection Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description During the Oriented Start up Routine the value adjusted in PO406 changes the parameters related to the motor overload automatically in the following manner Table 11 2 Motor overload protection modification in function of P0406 P0406 P0156 Overl Curr 100 96 P0157 Overl Curr 50 96 P0158 Overl Curr 5 96 1 05 0401 0 9xP0401 0 65xP0401 1 05xP0401 1 05xP0401 1 05xP0401 1 05xP0401 1 0 0401 1 0xP0401 0 98xP0401 0 9xP0401 0 55xP0401 ATTENTION Refer to the section 11 4 Optimal Flux for Sensorless Vector Control for more details on the use of option PO406 2 Optimal Flux P0407 Motor Rated Power Factor Refer to the section 10 2 Motor Data for more details P0408 Run Self Tuning P0409 Motor
185. d PS External Fault in the application 412 10 High rectifier surrounding temperature gt 45 C and Rectifier high output current Overtemperature Rectifier cooling problem Very dirty rectifier heatsink F414 0 Undervoltage or phase loss at the rectifier input External Rectifier Fault Voltage imbalance at the rectifier input gt 5 96 Incorrect UR11 unit DIP switches settings 415 89 High rectifier surrounding temperature gt 45 C and External Rectifier High high output current Temperature Very dirty rectifier heatsink A700 1 Alarm or fault related to the HMI disconnection function block has been activated in the applicative Detached HMI and the HMI is disconnected from the inverter 2701 em Detached HMI A702 1 Alarm indicating that the General Enable command The SoftPLC Run Stop command is equal to Run or a Inverter Disabled is not active movement block has been enable while the inverter is general disabled 704 0 Two movements have been enabled It occurs when two or more movement blocks are enabled Two Movements Enabled simultaneously 706 4 Speed reference not programmed for SoftPLC It occurs when a movement block has been enabled and Speed Reference Not Programmed for SoftPLC the speed reference has not been configured for SoftPLC check P0221 and P0222 Models where they can occur 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
186. d y digits assuming that the software version numbers be described as Vx yz Example Version V1 60 x 1 y 6 and z 0 previously stored in the keypad HMI Inverter version V1 75 gt 1 7 and z 5 P0319 2 F082 y 6 2 y 7 Inverter version V1 62 1 6 and z 2 0319 2 normal copy y 6 y 6 and 1 x 1 In order to copy parameters from one inverter to another one must proceed in the following manner 1 Connect the keypad HMI to the inverter from which one wants to copy the parameters Inverter A 2 Set PO319 1 VFD HMI to transfer the parameters from the Inverter to the keypad HMI 3 Press the right soft key Save P0319 returns automatically to O inactive as soon as the transfer is finished 4 Disconnect the keypad HMI from the inverter 5 Connect the same keypad HMI to the invert to which one wants to transfer the parameters Inverter B 6 Set P0319 2 HMI VFD to transfer the contents of the keypad HMI nonvolatile memory EEPROM with the Inverter A parameters to the Inverter 7 Press the right soft key Save When P0319 returns to the transfer of the parameters has been finished From that moment on the Inverters and B will have the parameters with the same contents Starting up and Settings Notes In case that inverters A and B are not from the same model verify the values of P0296 Line
187. d Parameter Sel 1 COh2 0D O Oo 2 CO CO CO CO CO CO CO C9 CO CO ND NO CO OO O 00 ot selected Speed Refer otorCurrent DC Link Volt Motor Freq MotorVoltage otor Torque Output Power Process Var 0 Setpoint PID 1 Speed Refer 2 Motor Speed 3 MotorCurrent 4 DC Link Volt 5 Motor Freq MotorVoltage Motor Torque Output Power Process Var Setpoint PID SoftPLC P1010 SoftPLC P1011 SoftPLC P1012 SoftPLC P1013 SoftPLC P1014 SoftPLC P1015 SoftPLC P1016 SoftPLC P1017 SoftPLC P1018 SoftPLC P1019 PLC11 P1300 PLC11 P1301 PLC11 P1302 PLC11 P1303 PLC11 P1304 PLC11 P1305 PLC11 P1306 PLC11 P1307 PLC11 P1308 PLC11 P1309 2 Motor Speed 30 5 5 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0206 Read Parameter Sel 2 See options in P0205 3 Motor Current P0207 Read Parameter Sel See options in PO205 5 Motor Freq m P0208 Ref Scale Factor 1 to 18000 1800 1500 30 5 6 P0209 Ref Eng Unit 1 32 to 127 114 30 5 7 P0210 Ref Eng Unit 2 32 to 127 112 30 5 7 P0211 R
188. d by sudden load changes Refer to the figure 11 1 or 11 2 Table 11 3 Differential gain action in the speed regulator P0166 Differential gain actuation Inactive 0 01 a 7 99 11 18 Vector Control 11 8 2 Current Regulator 91 The parameters related to the CFW 11 current regulator are presented in this group P0167 Current Regulator Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 00 to 1 99 Factory 0 50 Range Setting P0168 Current Regulator Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 1 999 Factory 0 010 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 91 Current Regulator Description Parameters PO167 and PO168 are adjusted automatically as a function of the parameters P0411 and P0409 respectively NOTE Normally those parameters do not require further adjustment However when the 0296 setting is higher than the P0400 setting or when the bus DC voltage is controlled by AFE Active Front End then current instability may occur 11 19 Vector Control 11 8 3 Flux Regulator 92 The parameters related to the CFW 11 flux regulator are presented next P0175 Flux Regulator Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 0 to 31 9 Factory 2 0 Range Setting P0176 Flux Regulator Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 0 020 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control
189. d in the CFW 11 is of the academic type The equations that characterize the Academic PID which is the base of this function algorithm are presented next The transfer function in the Academic PID regulator frequency dominion is i Korea sTo SI By replacing the integrator by a sum and the derivative by the incremental quotient one gets an approximation for the discrete transfer equation recursive presented next y kTa y k 1 Ta Kp e KTa e k 1 Ta Kie k 1 Ta Kd e kTa 2e k 1 Ta e k 2 Ta Being Kp Proportional gain Kp P0520 x 4096 Ki Integral gain Ki P0521 x 4096 Ta Ti x 4096 Kd Differential gain Kd P0522 x 4096 Td Ta x 4096 Ta 0 02sec PID regulator sampling time SP reference it has 13 bits 0 to 8191 maximum X process variable or controlled read by means of one of the analog inputs Alx it has 13 bits maximum kTa PID actual output it has 13 bits maximum k 1 Ta PID previous output kTa actual error SP k X k e k 1 Ta previous error SP k 1 X k 1 k 1 e k 2 Ta error two samples before SP k 2 X k e2 20 16 PM Vector Control PM VECTOR CONTROL 21 1 PERMANENT MAGNET SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motors are alternating current motors with three phase stator winding similar to the induction motor and permanent magnet rotor PMSM for industrial applications have sinusoidal CEMF and
190. e Through function tries to regulate the DC link voltage during the line failure without interruption or fault storing The energy necessary to keep the inverter in operation is obtained from the motor kinetic energy inertia by means of its deceleration Thus at the line return the motor is reaccelerated to the speed defined by the reference After the line failure tO the DC link voltage 0 starts diminishing according to a rate depending on the motor load condition being able to reach the undervoltage level 12 if the Ride Through function is not working The typical necessary time for this to occur with rated load is from a magnitude of 5 to 15 ms With the Ride Through function active the line loss is detected when the U voltage reaches a value below the DC Link Power Loss value t1 defined at the parameter PO321 The inverter initiates a controlled deceleration of the motor immediately regenerating energy to the DC link in order to keep the motor operating with the U voltage regulated at the value DC Link Ride Through P0322 In case that the line does not return undervoltage fault will occur FO21 at 15 If the line returns before the undervoltage occurrence t3 the inverter will detect its return when the Ud voltage reaches the DC Link Power Back t4 level defined at the parameter P0323 The motor will reaccelerate following the adjusted ramp from the actual speed value to the value defined by the speed reference P
191. e acceleration Refer to the figure 9 7 By means of these parameters it is possible to introduce a speed step during the acceleration helping the starting of high torque loads Speed P0140 Time I Figure 9 7 Acceleration speed profile as a function of PO140 and 0141 iy NOTE The accommodation time will be considered null when the Flying Start function is active P0320 1 or 2 P0202 Type of Control Adjustable 0 60 Hz Factory 0 Range de wA 50 In Setting 1 2 V t Adjustable 3 Sensorless 4 Encoder 5 VVW Voltage Vector WEG 6 Encoder PM 7 Sensorless PM Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 Control 9 5 Scalar Control V f Description In order to get an overview of the control types as well as orientation to choose the most suitable type for the application refer to the chapter 8 Available Control Types For the V f mode select PO202 0 1 or 2 Parameter P0202 setting for the V f mode 0202 0 for motors with rated frequency 60 Hz P0202 1 for motors with rated frequency 50 Hz Notes The correct setting of P0400 assures the application of the correct V f ratio at the output in case of 50 Hz or 60 Hz motors with voltage different from the inverter input voltage 0202 2 for special motors with rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz or for the adjustment of special V f curve profi
192. e for Start Up of the 11 user s manual c Adjust the password P0000 5 according to the section 5 3 Password Setting in 000 of this manual d Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor by means of the Oriented Start up Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1 which makes the inverter initiate the Oriented Start up routine The Oriented Start up routine presents on the keypad HMI the main parameters in a logical sequence The setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor Verify the step by step sequence in the figure 10 2 The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the content of other inverter parameters and or internal variables as indicated in the figure 10 2 In this way one gets a stable operation of the control circuit with adequate values to obtain the best motor performance During the Oriented Start up routine the Config Configuration status will be indicated on the top left part of the keypad HMI Parameters related to the motor Program the contents of parameters from P0398 to P0407 directly with the motor nameplate data Refer to the section 11 7 Motor Data Options for the setting of parameter P0409 Automatic by the inverter performing the self tuning routine selected in PO408 From the motor test data sheet sup
193. e or less with the motor temperature Thus for the sensorless vector control and normal operation with the motor warm P0412 must be adjusted until the speed of the motor with load measured at the motor shaft with a tachometer stays equal to that one indicated on the keypad HMI P0001 This adjustment must be performed with half the rated speed For 202 4 vector with encoder if P0412 is incorrect the motor will loose torque Thus one must adjust P0412 so that at half the rated speed and with stable load the motor current 003 stays the lowest possible In the sensorless vector control mode the 1 75 gain provided by the self tuning will be limited in the range 3 0 lt 0175 lt 8 0 11 26 Vector Control Table 11 7 Typical rotor constant values for WEG motors Motor Power hp kW Number of Poles 2 50 Hz 60 Hz 4 50 Hz 60 Hz 6 50 Hz 60 Hz 8 50 Hz 60 Hz 30 22 0 70 0 55 0 37 0 34 OR SP ADF 0 38 150 110 1 83 1 74 1 05 1 01 0 71 0 67 0 67 50 37 0 84 0 55 0 54 0 62 0 57 0 31 0 32 100 75 1 64 1 08 1 32 0 69 0 84 0 64 0 70 0 56 300 220 2 97 1 96 2 97 1 33 1 30 350 250 1 86 1 85 1 53 500 375 187 NOTE When adjusted via the keypad HMI this parameter may change automatically the following parameters P0175 P0176 P0327 and P0328 200 150 14 0 95 0 65 1 03 P0413 Constant Mechanical Time Constant Adjus
194. e speed reference until reaching the desired value of the process variable Only then pass it to the automatic mode NOTE ra If the setpoint is defined by P0525 the inverter will set PO525 automatically with the instantaneous value of P0040 when the mode is changed from manual to automatic provided that PO536 1 In this case the commutation from manual to automatic is smooth there is no abrupt speed change 20 6 2 Automatic Operation closed DI3 close DI3 and perform the PID regulator dynamic adjustment i e of the proportional P0520 integral P0521 and differential P0522 verifying if the regulation is being done correctly Therefore it is only necessary to compare the setpoint to the process variable checking if the values are close Observe also how fast the motor responds to oscillations in the process variable It is important to point out that the PID gain setting is a step that requires attempt and error in order to get the desired response time If the system responds rapidly and oscillates close to the setpoint then the proportional gain is too high If the system responds slowly and takes time to reach the setpoint then the proportional gain is too low and must be increased And in case that the process variable does not reach the required value setpoint then the integral gain must be adjusted PID Regulator 46 As a summary of this guide a schematic of the connections of the CFW 11 for the PID r
195. ect The parameter Day P0194 is already selected Press until selecting Read Parameter Sel 1 P0205 Seq Action Result Programming Basic Instructions Display Indication The Read Parameter Sel 1 P0205 is selected Press Select Press until selecting the option 11 Speed Refer Press Save Press Return Press Return Press Return The display returns to the Monitoring Mode with the speed indicated by a bar graph Figure 5 5 Monitoring with bar graph configuration In order to return to the standard Monitoring Mode numerical you only have to select the options ended with values from 1 to 10 in the parameters P0205 P0206 and or P0207 Content of the parameter P0205 in numerical form with bigger characters Program the reading parameters P0206 and P0207 in zero inactive and P0205 as numerical value one option ended with 4 Thus 205 starts being displayed in bigger characters The figure 5 6 illustrates this monitoring mode Content of the parameter P0205 with bigger characters Parameters PO206 and P0207 must be programmed with O Programming Basic Instructions 5 7 INCOMPATIBILITY BETWEEN PARAMETERS If any of the combinations listed below occur the CFW 11 goes to the Config state 1 20 21 22 23 24 5 12 Two or more Two or more Two or more Two
196. ected Press until the group 30 HMI is selected The group 30 HMI is selected Press Return Press Select The display returns to the Monitoring Mode Figure 5 2 Date and time adjustment 5 9 Programming Basic Instructions 5 6 DISPLAY INDICATIONS IN THE MONITORING MODE SETTINGS Every time the inverter is powered the display goes to the Monitoring Mode In order to make it easier the reading of the motor main parameters the keypad HMI display can be configured to show them in 3 different modes Content of the 3 parameters in numerical form Selection of the parameters via P0205 P0206 and P0207 That mode can be seen in the figure 5 3 Motor speed indication in rpm REM Remote situation Loc Rem indication LOC Local situation ES speed direction indication TUER Inverter indications Monitoring parameters Run Motor speed in rpm Run Loc d1888rgm Motor current in Amps Ready Output frequency in Hz default Configuration Self tuning P0205 P0206 and P0207 selection of the Last fault FXXX parameters to be shown in the Monitoring Mode Last alarm P0208 to P0212 Engineering unit for the speed DC Braking indication M J STO Left soft key function Right soft key function Indication of the time Adjusted in P0197 P0198 and 0199 Figure 5 3 Mo
197. ed This function may be disabled by setting 54 0 F179 This fault indicates a problem with the heatsink fan Dirt on the blades and in the bearings of the fan Heatsink Fan Speed Fault Note Defective fan This function may be disabled by setting 54 0 Defective fan power supply connection A181 Invalid clock value alarm t is necessary to set date and time at parameters P0194 Invalid Clock Value o P0199 eypad battery is discharged defective or not installed F182 Indicates a fault on the output pulses feedback Defect in the inverter internal circuitry Pulse Feedback Fault F183 Overtemperature related to the IGBTs overload Surrounding air temperature too high IGBT Overload protection Operation with frequencies 10 Hz under overload Temperature F185 9 It indicates fault at the pre charge Contactor Pre charge contactor defect Pre charge Contac Fault F186 9 It indicates a temperature fault at the sensor 1 Motor high temperature Sensor 1 Temperature Fault 187 It indicates a temperature fault at the sensor 2 Motor high temperature Sensor 2 Temperature Fault F188 It indicates a temperature fault at the sensor 3 Motor high temperature Sensor 3 Temperature Fault 0 33 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes F189 9 indicates a te
198. ed current in order that the torque control has the best possible accuracy 8 Settings for the torque control Torque limitation 1 Via parameters P0169 170 through the keypad HMI Serial or Fieldbus Refer to the item 11 8 6 Torque Current Limitation 2 Through the analog inputs All AI2 AI3 or Al4 Refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs option 2 maximum torque current Speed reference 3 Set the speed reference 10 96 or more higher than the working speed This assures that the speed regulator output remains saturated at the maximum value allowed by the torque limit adjustment E g for a winder when the material being wound brakes the regulator leaves the saturated condition and starts controlling the motor speed which will be kept at the speed reference value 7 The torque limitation with the saturated speed regulator has also a protection limitation function 11 6 OPTIMAL BRAKING NOTE ow Only activated on the Vector with Encoder mode 0202 3 or 4 when PO184 0 P0185 is smaller than the standard value and P0404 lt 21 75 CV 42 The occurrence of optimal braking may cause at the motor Increase of the vibration level Increase of the acoustic noise Increase of the temperature Verity the impact of those effects in the application before using the optimal braking It is a function that helps the motor controlled bra
199. ef Eng Unit 3 32 to 127 109 30 5 7 P0212 Ref Decimal Point 0 wxyz 0 wxyz 30 5 6 1 wxy z 2 wx yz 3 w xyz 0213 Full Scale Read 1 0 0 to 200 0 100 0 CFG 30 5 8 P0214 Full Scale Read 2 0 0 to 200 0 100 0 96 CFG 30 5 8 P0215 Full Scale Read 3 0 0 to 200 0 100 0 CFG 30 5 8 P0216 Display Contrast 0 to 37 27 30 5 8 P0217 Zero Speed Disable 0 Off 0 Off CFG 35 46 12 10 P0218 Zero Speed Dis Out 0 Ref or Speed 0 Ref or Speed 35 46 12 10 1 0219 7 Speed Time 0109995 Os 35 46 12 11 P0220 LOC REM Selection Src 0 Always LOC 2 LR Key LOC CFG 31 32 33 13 28 1 Always REM 110 2 LR Key LOC 3 LR Key REM 4 Dix 5 Serial USB LOC 6 Serial USB REM 7 Anybus CC LOC 8 Anybus CC REM 9 1 10 CO DN DP REM 11 SoftPLC LOC 12 SoftPLC REM 13 PLC11 LOC 14 PLC11 REM P0221 LOC Reference Sel 0 Keypad 0 Keypad CFG 31 36 37 13 29 1 Al 38 110 2 2 3 AI3 4 5 Sum Als gt 0 6 Sum Als 7 8 Multispeed 9 Serial USB 10 Anybus CC 11 CANop DNet DP 12 SoftPLC 13 PICTI 0222 Reference Sel See options in P0221 1 32 36 37 13 29 38 110 223 LOC FWD REV Selection Always FWD 2 FR Key FWD CFG 31 33 110 13 30 Always REV FR Key FWD FR Key REV D Serial USB FWD Serial USB REV Anybus CC FWD Anybus CC REV CO DN DP FWD 10 CO DN D
200. eference in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation Some notes about the options for those parameters The Alx designation refers to the analog signal obtained after the addition of the Alx input to the offset and its multiplication by the applied gain refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs The value of the reference adjusted with the 449 and W is contained in the parameter PO121 When the option 7 is selected E P one of the digital inputs must be programmed at 11 Increase E P and another at 12 Decrease E P Refer to the section 12 5 Electronic Potentiometer for more details When the option 8 is selected PO266 and or P0267 and or P0268 must be programmed at 13 Multispeed Refer to the section 12 4 Multispeed When 203 1 PID Regulator do not use the reference via E P When P0203 1 the value programmed in 221 022 becomes the PID Setpoint 13 29 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0223 FORWARD REVERSE Selection LOCAL Situation P0226 FORWARD REVERSE Selection REMOTE Situation Adjustable 0 Always FORWARD Factory P0223 2 Range 1 Always REVERSE Setting 0226 4 2 Forward Reverse Key FWD 3 Forward Reverse Key REV AL 5 Serial USB FWD 6 Serial USB REV 7 Anybus CC FWD 8 Anybus CC REV 9 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP FWD 10 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus REV 11 Polarity 12 SoftPLC FWD 13 SoftPLC REV 14 AI2 Polari
201. egulator application as well as the setting of the parameters used in this example are presented next 4 20 mA Shield DI1 Run Stop Pressure Transducer 0 25 bar DI3 Manual Automatic 014 General Enable DI Setpoint DI3 via keypad DI4 COM 24VCC CFW 11 OFF ON DGND 1 Selpoint astra REF 2 via 3 51 gt 5 kQ 2 4 REF AI2 A2 PE 5 1 Re i 56 lt Te Line Isolating switch Figure 20 3 Example of a CFW 11 application as a PID regulator Table 20 2 Parameter setting for the presented example Parameter 203 1 527 0 524 10 P0238 1 P0237 1 000 P0239 0 P0528 250 529 1 P0220 1 0222 0 0525 80 96 P0230 1 205 10 P0206 90 P0207220 P0536 1 263 10 0265 220 0266 2 P0236 30 P0520 1 000 P0521 0 043 Process variable decimal point wxy z Operation in remote situation Reference selection HMI PID Setpoint Reading Parameter Selection 1 PID setpoint O 2 Reading Parameter Selection 2 Process variable i Reading Parameter Selection 3 Motor Speed P0525 automatic setting Remote Run Stop selection Dlx
202. egulator gain Normally the factory settings are adequate for the majority of the applications not being necessary to adjust them 11 9 START UP IN THE VECTOR MODES SENSORLESS AND WITH ENCODER i NOTE Read the whole CFW 11 user s manual before installing powering or operating the inverter Sequence for installation verification powering and start up a Install the inverter according to the chapter 3 Installation and Connection of the CFW 11 user s manual wiring all the power and control connections b Prepare the inverter and apply power according to the section 5 1 Prepare for Start Up of the CFW 11 user s manual Adjust the password POOOO 5 according to the section 5 3 Password Setting in POOOO of this manual d Adjust the inverter to operate with the application line and motor by means of the Oriented Start up Menu access P0317 and change its content to 1 which makes the inverter initiate the Oriented Start up routine The Oriented Start up routine presents on the keypad HMI the main parameters in a logical sequence setting of these parameters prepares the inverter for operation with the application line and motor Verify the step by step sequence in the figure 11 6 The setting of the parameters presented in this operation mode results in the automatic modification of the content of other inverter parameters and or internal variables as indicated in the figure 11 6 In this w
203. emperature measurement PTC The details for those configurations are described in the following parameters Adjustable 100 00 to 100 00 96 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 071 CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs Description These read only parameters indicate the value of the analog inputs All to Al4 as a percentage of the full scale The indicated values are the ones obtained after the offset action and the multiplication by the gain Refer to the description of the parameters PO230 to P0250 P0230 Analog Input Dead Zone Adjustable 0 Factory 0 Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 38 Analog Inputs 38 Analog Inputs Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Description This parameter acts only for the analog inputs Alx programmed as speed reference and it defines if the Dead Zone at those inputs is On 1 or Off 0 If the parameter is configured as Off PO230 0 the signal at the analog input will work on the Speed Reference starting from the minimum value 0 V 0 mA 4 mA or 10 V 20 mA and will be directly related to the minimum speed programmed at P0133 Refer to the figure 13 1 a If the parameter is configured as On P0230 1 the signal at the analog inputs w
204. ence in rpm Speed Actual speed in rpm Synchronous Speed 120 x Motor Rated Frequency PO403 Nr of Poles Nr of Poles 120 x P0403 Motor Rated Speed P0402 and can be equal to 2 4 6 8 or 10 Example If Speed Synchronous Speed 1800 P0208 900 P0212 1 wxy Z then 1800 x 900 1800 x 10 P0209 Reference Engineering Unit 1 P0210 Reference Engineering Unit 2 P0211 Reference Engineering Unit 3 P0002 90 0 Adjustable 32 to 127 Factory 0209 114 Setting 0210 112 211 109 m Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description Those parameters are used to adjust the unit of the variable one wants to indicate at parameters 001 and P0002 The characters rpm can be replaced by those wanted by the user for instance L s length second CFM cubic feet per minute etc The reference engineering unit is composed by characters PO209 defines the leftmost PO210 the center and P0211 the rightmost character The available characters correspond to the ASCII code from 32 to 127 Programming Basic Instructions Examples A B Y Z 7 0 1 9 iF sa To indicate L s To indicate CFM 209 76 P0209 C 67 0210 47 P0210 F 70 0211 5 115 P02112 M 77 P0213 Full Scale Reading Parameter 1 P0214 Full Sc
205. ent of P0317 000 No is showed a The content of the parameter is changed to P0317 001 Yes Press Save The group 02 ORIENTED START UP is then selected Press Select Figure 11 6 Vector mode Oriented Start up Action Result Display Indication If necessary change the content of P0296 according to the used line voltage Therefore press Select This change will affect P0151 P0153 P0185 P0190 P0321 P0322 P0323 and P0400 If necessary change the content of P0298 according o the inverter application Therefore press Select This change may affect P0156 P0157 P0158 P0169 P0170 P0401 and 0404 The actuation ime and level of the IGBTs overload protection will also be affected If necessary adjust the content of P0398 according to the motor service factor Therefore press Select This change will affect the current value and the time for the actuation of the motor overload function If necessary change the content of PO400 according to the rated motor voltage Therefore press Select This change will affect P0190 If necessary change the content of PO401 according to the rated motor current Therefore press Select This change will affect P0156 P0157 and P0158 Vector Control Action Result Display Indication If necessary change the content of P0402 according to the rated motor speed Theref
206. erature fault temperature alarm or broken cable alarm The rupture of the cable that connects the sensor to the IOE Ox module may cause any of those actions depending on the selected option The table 15 8 details the actuation of each available option These parameters will be visible on the HMI only when the 01 1 02 or IOE 03 optional module is connected into the slot 1 XC41 connector Refer to the figure 3 1 Table 15 8 Available options at parameters 374 0377 0380 0383 0386 P0374 P0377 P0380 P0383 P0386 0 Inactive 1 Temperature fault Temperature alarm Cable alarm 2 Temperature fault Cable alarm 3 Temperature alarm Cable alarm 4 Temperature fault Temperature alarm 5 Temperature fault 6 Temperature alarm 7 Cable alarm he inverter wi temperature al The inverter wi The inverter wi The inverter wi The inverter wi The inverter wi The inverter wi Once a fault is generated the inverter will be disabled Temperature alarm or broken cable alarm will only affect the HMI The inverter status 0006 will not be changed broken cable alarm A196 A197 A198 A199 A200 generate the fault F186 F187 F188 F189 F1 temperature alarm A191 A192 A193 A194 A1 95 exhibit the temperature alarm A191 A192 A1 generate the fault F186 F187 F188 F189 F1 exhibit the temperature alarm A191 A192 A1 15 4 1 PTC Type Temperature Sensor The
207. ermines the language in which information will be presented on the keypad HMI P0205 Reading Parameter Selection 1 P0206 Reading Parameter Selection 2 P0207 Reading Parameter Selection 3 Adjustable Range Not selected Motor Speed Motor Current Motor Frequency Motor Voltage Motor Torque Output Power Motor Speed Motor Current DC Link Voltage M Motor Voltage Motor Torque Output Power Process Variable Setpoint PID SoftPLC P1010 SoftPLC P1011 SoftPLC P1012 SoftPLC 1013 SoftPLC P1014 SoftPLC P1015 SoftPLC P1016 SoftPLC P1017 SoftPLC P1018 5 P CO h2 CO 1 oftPLC 1019 OOE LEM PISO gt LC11 P1302 LCI 21 80079 si P1304 AE OSEA OE gt LC11 P1308 DE CO CO CO CO CO CO C2 CO CO IND IND IND ND ND ND ND NO ND 4 CO 0 O0 4 WN Speed Reference Factory P0205 2 Setting 0206 3 207 5 DC Link Voltage rocess Variable otor Frequency 5 5 Programming Basic Instructions Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 30 HMI Description Those parameters define which variables and in what manner they will be shown on the keyp
208. ers of one inverter in a FLASH memory module it is possible to pass them to another inverter with this function However if the inverters are form different models or with incompatible software versions the keypad HMI will exhibit the message Flash Mem Module with invalid parameters and will not allow the copy 42 Valid for 18 1 During the inverter operation the modified parameters are saved in the FLASH memory module regardless of a user command This assures that the MMF will always have an updated copy of the inverter parameters icy NOTE Valid for 18 1 When the inverter is powered and the memory module is present the current parameter contents are compared with the contents of the parameters saved in the MMF and in case they are different the keypad HMI will exhibit the message Flash Mem Module with different parameters after 3 seconds the message is replaced by the parameter PO318 menu The user has the option to overwrite the contents of the memory module choosing P0318 1 or overwrite the inverter parameters choosing 0318 2 even ignore the message by programming 18 0 NOTE iiy When using the network communication board the SoftPLC function or the PLC11 board it is recommended to set the parameter P0318 0 P0319 Copy Function HMI Adjustable 0 Or Factory 0 Range 1 VFD gt HMI Setting 2 HMI gt Prope
209. esults in a compromise between the motor acoustic noises the losses in the inverter IGBTs and the maximum allowed currents The reduction ofthe switching frequency reduces effects related to motor instability which occur in specific application conditions also reduces the earth leakage current being able to avoid the actuation of the faults FO74 Ground Fault or F070 Output Overcurrent Short Circuit Note The option 0 1 25 kHz is only allowed for the V f or VVW control 0202 0 1 2 or 5 6 9 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification P0298 Application Adjustable 0 Normal Duty ND Factory 0 Range 1 Heavy Duty HD Setting Properties GRG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description Set the content of this parameter according to the application The Normal Duty Regimen ND defines the maximum current for continuous operation ano and an overload of 11096 during 1 minute It must be used for driving motors that are not subject in that application to high torques in relation to their rated torque when operating in permanent regimen during start acceleration or deceleration The Heavy Duty Regimen HD defines the maximum current for continuous operation l ano and an overload of 150 96 during 1 minute must be used for driving motors that are subject in that application to high overload torques in relation to their rated torque when operating
210. et IP For more details regarding the inverter configuration for operating with those protocols refer to the CFW 11 communication manuals The parameters regarding the communication are explained next 17 1 RS 232 AND RS 485 SERIAL INTERFACE P0308 Serial Address P0310 Serial Baud Rate P0311 Serial Interface Byte Configuration P0312 Serial Protocol P0314 Serial Watchdog P0316 Serial Interface Status P0682 Serial USB Control Word P0683 Serial USB Speed Reference Those are parameters for the configuration and operation of the RS 232 and RS 485 serial interfaces For a detailed description refer to the RS 232 RS 485 communication manual supplied in electronic format on the CD ROM that comes with the product 17 2 CAN INTERFACE CANOPEN DEVICENET P0684 CANopen DeviceNet Control Word P0685 CANopen DeviceNet Speed Reference P0700 CAN Protocol P0701 CAN Address P0702 CAN Baud Rate P0703 Bus Off Reset P0705 CAN Controller Status P0706 Received CAN Telegram Counter N EN P0707 Transmitted CAN Telegram Counter P0708 Buss Off Error Counter 0709 Lost CAN Message Counter P0710 DeviceNet I O Instances P0711 DeviceNet Reading Word 3 P0712 DeviceNet Reading Word 4 P0713 DeviceNet Reading Word 5 P0714 DeviceNet Reading Word 6 P0715 DeviceNet Writing Word 3 P0716 DeviceNet Writing Word 4 P0717 DeviceNet Writing Word 5 P0718 DeviceNet Writing
211. et t tete ot tette 13 33 13 4 Forward Run Reverse Run Commands 841 9 13 33 Chapter 14 Dynamic Braking Dinamie Brakinga 28 oco pote T ee en SUE DAT 14 1 Chapter 15 Faults and Alarms 15 T Motor Overload Prot clion tiit tot ttt ee e d e ra es 15 1 15 2 Motor Overtemperature 15 2 15 9 15 4 15 4 Motor Overtemperature Protection Using the 01 02 or IOE 03 Module 15 16 154 1 PTC Type Temperature SENSO cc RR RR RR AARAA 15 17 15 4 2 PT100 or KTY84 Temperature Sensor 15 18 Summary Chapter 16 Read Only Parameters 09 16 1 Fault History 08 Chapter 17 Communication 49 17 1 5 232 and 5 485 Serial Interface 17 2 CAN Interface 22 9 9 95 17 1 17 3 Anybus CC Interface 2 17 2 17 4 Profibus DP 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0000 17 3 17 5 Communication States and 5 222 2 2 22 17 4 Chapter 18 SoftPLC 50 gt 18 1 18 2 18 1 2 0 ann aaah tae 18 1 187272 A toto serrer A actuanes aon ates 18 2
212. eter 21 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1031 SoftPLC Parameter 22 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1032 SoftPLC Parameter 23 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1033 SoftPLC Parameter 24 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1034 SoftPLC Parameter 25 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1035 SoftPLC Parameter 26 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 0 28 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P1036 tPLC Parameter 27 32768 to 32767 0 8 P1037 SoftPLC Parameter 28 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1038 SoftPLC Parameter 29 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1039 SoftPLC Parameter 30 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1040 SoftPLC Parameter 31 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1041 5 1 Parameter 32 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1042 5 1 Parameter 33 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1043 SoftPLC Parameter 34 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1044 SoftPLC Parameter 35 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1045 5 1 Parameter 36 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1046 SoftPLC Parameter 37 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1047 SoftPLC Parameter 38 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1048 SoftPLC Parameter 39 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 1049 SoftPLC Parameter 40 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1050 SoftPLC Parameter 41 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1051 SoftPLC Parameter 42 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1052 SoftPLC Parameter 43 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1053 SoftPLC Parameter 44 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1054 S
213. eters It presents keys for commanding the motor navigation keys and a graphic LCD display Flash Memory Module It is the nonvolatile memory that can be electrically written and erased RAM Memory Random Access Memory volatile USB Universal Serial Bus it is a type of connection in the perspective of the Plug and Play concept PE Protective Earth RFI Filter Radio Frequency Interference Filter It is a filter that avoids interference in the radiofrequency range PWM Pulse Width Modulation It is a pulsing voltage that supplies the motor Switching Frequency It is the inverter bridge IGBTs commutation frequency specified normally in kHz General Enable When activated it accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp provided Run Stop Run When deactivated the PWM pulses are immediately blocked It be commanded through digital input programmed for that function or via serial Run Stop Inverter function that when activated Run accelerates the motor with the acceleration ramp until reaching the speed reference and when deactivated Stop decelerates the motor with the deceleration ramp down to stop It can be commanded through digital input programmed for that function or via serial The keys 0 work in a similar manner 5 Heatsink It is metal part designed for dissipating the heat generated the power semiconductors Amp Ampere C Degrees Celsiu
214. eters for the configuration and operation of the Anybus CC interface For a detailed description refer to the Anybus CC communication manual supplied in electronic format on the CD ROM that comes with the product P0741 Profibus Data Profile P0742 Profibus Reading Word 3 P0743 Profibus Reading Word 4 0744 Profibus Reading Word 5 P0745 Profibus Reading Word 6 P0746 Profibus Reading Word 7 P0747 Profibus Reading Word 8 P0748 Profibus Reading Word 9 79 c 17 Jg 79 2 m gt P0749 Profibus Reading Word 10 Py EY N Communication 49 P0750 Profibus Writing Word 3 P0751 Profibus Writing Word 4 P0752 Profibus Writing Word 5 P0753 Profibus Writing Word 6 P0754 Profibus Writing Word 7 P0755 Profibus Writing Word 8 P0756 Profibus Writing Word 9 P0757 Profibus Writing Word 10 P0918 Profibus Address P0922 Profibus Telegram Selection P0944 Fault Counter P0947 Fault Number P0963 Profibus Baud Rate P0964 Drive Identification P0965 Profile Identification P0967 Control Word 1 P0968 Status Word 1 17 5 COMMUNICATION STATES AND COMMANDS P0313 Communication Error Action P0680 Logical Status P0681 Motor Speed in 13 bits P0692 Operation Mode Status P0693 Operation Mode Commands 17 4 Communication 49 P0695 Digital Output Setting P0696 Analog
215. etpoint PID 10 11 Al2 12 AI3 13 P0562 Trace Channel 2 2 See options in P0561 2 Motor Speed 52 9 4 P0563 Channel 3 CH3 See options in P0561 3 Motor Current 52 9 4 P0564 Trace Channel 4 4 See options in P0561 O Not selected 52 9 5 P0571 Start Trace Function 0 Off 0 Off 52 9 5 On P0572 Trace Trig Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 09 52 9 5 P0573 Trace Trig Year 00 to 99 RO 09 52 9 6 P0574 Trace Trig Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 09 52 9 6 P0575 Trace Trig Seconds 00 to 59 RO 09 52 9 6 P0576 Trace Function Status 0 Off RO 09 52 9 6 1 Waiting 2 Trigger 3 Concluded 0 23 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Us D ipie ipla bns uibs 680 Logical Status it O to 3 Not Used 3 4 Quick Stop ON Bit 5 2nd Ramp Bit 6 Config Mode Bit 7 Alarm Bit 8 Running Bit 9 Enabled Bi Forward Bi JOG Bi Remote Bi Subvoltage Bi Automatic PID Bit 15 Fault 09 111 0681 Speed 13 bits 32768 to 32767 RO 09 111 17 4 P0682 Serial USB Control Bit Ramp Enable Bit 1 General Enable Bit 2 Run Forward Bit 3 JOG Enable Bit 4 Remote Bit 5 2nd Ramp Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Fault Reset Bit 8 to 15 Reserved RO 09 111 17 1 P0683 Serial USB Speed Ref 32768 to 32
216. ettings Communication Error Incorrect configuration of the communication objects A136 Network master has entered into the idle state in IDLE mode Idle Master Bit of the PLC command register set to zero 0 A137 O connection timeout DeviceNet communication One or more allocated I O connections have entered DNet Connection Timeout alarm into the timeout state A138 6 indicates that the inverter received a command Verify the network master status making sure it is in Profibus DP Interface in rom the Profibus DP network master to enter the execution mode Run Clear Mode clear mode Refer to the Profibus DP communication manual for more information 139 9 t indicates an interruption in the communication Verify whether the network master is correctly configured Offline Profibus DP between the Profibus DP network master and the and operating normally Interface inverter Verify the network installation in a general manner cable routing grounding Refer to the Profibus DP communication manual for more information A140 9 It indicates an error in the access to the Profibus Verify whether the Profibus DP module is correctly fit into Profibus DP Module Access communication module data the slot 3 Error Refer to the Profibus DP communication manual for more information F150 Overspeed fault Wrong settings of PO161 and or P0162 Motor Overspeed It is activated when the real speed exceeds the
217. fan is OFF 4 Heatsink fan is controlled via software and internal fan is ON 5 Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is OFF 6 Heatsink fan is ON and internal fan is controlled via software 7 Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is ON 8 Heatsink fan is OFF and internal fan is controlled via software ORE 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 45 Protections Factory 2 Setting The CFW 11 is equipped with two fans an internal fan and a heatsink fan and the activation of both will be controlled via software by means of the inverter programming The options available for the setting of this parameter are the following Table 15 5 Options of the parameter P0352 C MR _ eatsink fan is controlled via software nternal fan is always OFF eatsink fan is controlled via software nternal is always ON 5 Int OFF Heatsin fan is always ON nternal fan is always OFF eatsink fan is always ON HS ON Int CT 5 fan is controlled software E eatsink fan is always OFF nternal fan is always ON _ eatsink fan is always OFF nternal fan is controlled via software P0353 IGBTs and Internal Air Overtemperature Protection Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI 15 12 0 IGBTs fault and alarm Internal air fault and alarm 1 IGBTs fault and alarm Internal air fault 2 IGBTs fault Intern
218. he conditions below were fulfilled simultaneously for longer than 2 seconds 1 0342 2 Enabled inverter 3 Speed reference higher than 3 96 4 lu or lu lw or lw gt 0 125 x P0401 P0343 Ground Fault Detection Adjustable 0 Ou Factory 1 Range Setting Properties GEC Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter enables the Ground Fault Detection which will be responsible for the FO74 Ground Fault actuation Thus if wished it is possible to inhibit the Ground Fault F074 occurrence by setting PO343 Off P0348 Motor Overload Protection Adjustable 0 On Factory 1 Range 1 Fault Alarm Setting 2 Fault Properties GEC Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Faults and Alarms Description This parameter allows the desired protection level for the motor overload function to be configured Refer to the table below for details on the actuation of each one of the available options Table 15 2 Actions for the P0348 options P0348 0 OR The overload protection is disabled Faults or alarms will not be generated for the motor operation in overload conditions The inverter will display am alarm A046 when the motor overload reaches the level programmed 1 Fault Alarm in P0349 and will generate a fault F072 when the motor overload reaches
219. he motor starting A good approximation for the setting of PO144 is given by the formula ES P0144 0402 x P0142 If it is necessary to increase the starting torque increase gradually the value of PO144 Output Voltage Line rated voltage 100 T e POTAZ peere 202 2 BOO P0144 Speed Frequency 0 1 Hz 3 Hz 0146 P0145 P0134 Figure 9 8 V f curve in function of PO142 to P0146 9 3 V f CURRENT LIMITATION 26 P0135 Maximum Output Current Adjustable Q 2 to s Factory Range Setting Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via 26 Current Limit P0344 Current Limitation Configuration Adjustable O Hold FL ON Factory 3 Range 1 Decel FL ON Setting 2 VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 26 Current Limit 9 7 Scalar Control V f Description It is the current limitation for the control with actuation mode defined by P0344 refer to the table 9 1 and the current limit defined by P0135 Table 9 1 Current limitation configuration P0344 Function Description Current limitation of the Ramp Hold type Current limitation according to the figure 9 9 a Hold FL ON ir Active fast current limitation Fast current limitation at the value 1 9 x
220. he output function parameter for 13 PTC The analog inputs All and AI2 of the control module as well as the analog inputs existent on the accessory modules AI3 and can be used to read the PTC voltage Therefore it is necessary to configure the input DIP switch for voltage and to set the input function parameter for 4 PTC Refer to the parameter P0351 on the section 15 3 Protections NOTE In order that this function works properly it is important to keep gains and offset of the analog input and output in the default values 15 2 Table 15 1 A110 and 078 trip levels Al voltage A110 occurs during the temperature increase gt 3 51 gt 7 0 F078 trips during the temperature increase Rec 3 9 gt 7 8 Resets A110 alarm 1500 lt lt 1 6 0 3 V 3 2 V Allows the reset of the F078 fault 1500 lt lt 1 6 0 3 V 3 2 V F078 trips minimum resistance detection lt 000 lt 0 12 V Faults and Alarms 1 Program P0231 4 Set 51 4 OFF 0 to 10 V Program P0251 13 Set 51 1 OFF 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA b 2 AI2 W Program P0236 4 4 Set 51 3 OFF 0 to 10 V A Program P0254 13 Set 51 2 OFF 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA c 1 AI3 bd AI3 NEM 9 Program P0241 4 L vee Set S3 1 OFF 0 to 10 V and Program P0243 0 o
221. he table 19 2 details the available options Table 19 2 Parameter P0552 option description 0550 lt lt 14055 The variable selected in PO550 is smaller than the value adjusted in 551 Dlx Digital input selected via PO263 P0270 For 552 6 option it is necessary to select the option Trace Function at one of the parameters from P0263 to P0270 For more details refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs 19 2 Trace Function 52 Notes f P0552 6 and no is configured for Trace Function the trigger will not occur If P0552 6 and several 015 were configured for Trace Function only one has to be active for the trigger occurrence If P0552 6 and any DI is configured for Trace Function the trigger will never occur as a result of the DI activation These three programming options do not prevent the inverter from being enabled P0553 Trace Sampling Period Adjustable 1619765585 1 Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description It defines the sampling period time between two sampling points as a 200 us multiple For P0297 1 25 kHz it defines the sampling period as a 400 us multiple P0554 Trace Pre Trigger Adjustable O to 100 96 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 52 Trace Function Description
222. hen the motor current reaches a value below P0135 the motor will accelerate again Refer to the figure 9 9 b Fast current limitation It reduces the inverter output voltage instantaneously when the motor current reaches the value of 1 9xl nomHD Scalar Control V f Motor current Motor current Time Speed Speed a Deceleration via ramp Acceleration P0101 via ramp P0100 Time Time During acceleration During deceleration a Ramp Hold Motor current 0135 gt Speed n Decelerates ramp P0101 29 b Ramp Deceleration Figure 9 9 a and b Current limitation via PO135 working modes Scalar Control V f 9 4 V f DC VOLTAGE LIMITATION 27 There are two functions in the inverter for limiting the DC link voltage during the motor braking They act limiting the braking torque and power avoiding therefore the tripping of the inverter by overvoltage F022 The overvoltage on the DC link is more common when a load with high inertia is driven or when a short deceleration time is programmed NOTE When using the dynamic braking the function Ramp Hold or Ramp Acceleration must be disabled Refer to the PO151 description 9 10 In the V f mode there are two types of function to limit the DC link voltage 1 Ramp Hold It is effective only during the deceleration Working
223. hes the torque limit of the inverter In the figure 11 3 case the torque reaches the torque limitation 100 when the speed is less than approximately 20 of the rated speed It is possible to increase the braking torque by increasing the inverter current limitation during the optimal braking 1 69 torque in the forward speed direction or PO170 reverse Generally smaller motors have lower efficiency because they present more losses Therefore comparatively higher braking torque is obtained if they are compared to bigger motors Examples 1 hp 0 75 kW IV poles 1 0 76 resulting in TB1 0 32 20 hp 15 0 kW IV poles n 0 86 resulting in TB1 0 16 Figure 11 3 Tx N curve for Optimal Braking with a typical 10 hp 7 5 kW motor driven by an inverter with the torque adjusted at a value equal to the motor rated torque Vector Control a Torque generated by the motor in normal operation driven by the inverter in the motor mode load resistant torque b Braking torque generated by the Optimal Braking use c Braking torque generated by the DC braking use N In order to use the Optimal Braking a Activate the optimal braking by setting 184 0 DC Link Regulation Mode with losses and set the DC link regulation level in P0185 as presented in the item 11 8 7 DC Link Regulator with PO202 3 or 4 and P0404 smaller than 21 75hp b In order to enable and disable the Optimal Braking via a d
224. iable ON Relay Transistor OFF n Pre Charge Ok DC Link i Level Relay Transistor ON ON o Time enabled gt Hx 6553 h Hx 0294 Enabled Hours P0043 Relay Transistor ON OFF OFF 13 24 Figure 13 7 cont e to k Details on the operation of the digital output functions Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs p N Nx and Nt Nx F gt Fx M m P0281 P0282 Nx P0288 Fx P0281 P0281 P0282 Time ee OFF Relay OFF r F gt Fx 2 s No Alarm No Alarm Fx P0281 P0281 P0282 Alarm N Time Relay Transistor ON Relay Transistor OFF OFF OFF Figure 13 7 cont 1 to s Details on the operation of the digital output functions P0281 Fx Frequency Adjustable 0 0 to 300 0 Hz Factory 4 0 Hz Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Description It is used in the digital output and relay functions F gt Fx and F2 Fx P0282 Fx Hysteresis Adjustable 0 0 to 15 0 Hz Factory 2 0 Hz Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L 41 Digital
225. icates a 20 unbalance in the current Phase V B3 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its nominal value 398 19 Phase W book 3 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 unbalance in the current Phase W B3 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its nominal value A399 19 Phase U book 4 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 unbalance in the current Phase U B4 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its nominal value A400 19 Phase V book 4 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current Phase V B4 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value 401 19 Phase W book 4 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 96 unbalance in the current Phase W B4 distribution between this phase and the smallest current of the same phase in other book only when he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value 402 19 Phase U book 5 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at indicates a 20
226. ies from O to 10 96 of the rated voltage until getting the desired braking This parameter works only for the V f scalar and VVW control modes P0372 DC Braking Current for Sensorless Adjustable 0 0 to 90 0 Factory 40 0 Range Setting Properties Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 47 DC Braking Description This parameter adjusts the current level DC braking torque applied to the motor during the braking The programmed current level is a percentage of the inverter rated current This parameter works only in the Sensorless Vector control mode 12 22 Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 9 SKIP SPEED 48 The parameters of this group prevent the motor from operating permanently at speed values where for instance the mechanic system enters in resonance causing exaggerated vibration or noise P0303 Skip Speed 1 Adjustable 0 to 18000 rpm Factory 600 rpm Range Setting P0304 Skip Speed 2 Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory 900 rpm Range Setting P0305 Skip Speed 3 Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory 1200 rpm Range Setting P0306 Skip Band Adjustable 0 to 750 rpm Factory Orpm Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 48 Skip Speed Description This actuation of these parameters occurs as presented in the figure 12 13 next The passage through the avoided speed range 2 x P0306 takes pla
227. igital input set one of the inputs Dlx for DC Link Regulation 0263 0270 25 and 0184 2 Results 01 24 V closed Optimal Braking is active equivalent to PO184 0 v Dlx 0 V open Optimal Braking is inactive is 11 7 MOTOR DATA 43 In this group are listed the parameters for the setting of the used motor data Adjust them according to the motor nameplate data P0398 to P0406 except P0405 and by means of the self tuning routine or with the data existent in the motor data sheet the other parameters In the Vector Control mode the parameters P0399 and P0407 are not used P0398 Motor Service Factor Adjustable 1100 i 1 50 Factory 1 00 Range Setting Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description It is the continuous overload capability i e a reserve of power that gives the motor the capability to withstand working in adverse conditions Set it according to the value informed on the motor nameplate It affects the motor overload protection P0399 Motor Rated Efficiency Refer to the section 10 2 Motor Data for more details 11 10 Vector Control P0400 Motor Rated Voltage Adjustable 0 to 690 V Factory 220V Range Setting 440 V 0296 0 2 3 ex 4 575 P0296 5 or 6 690 V PO296 7 or 8 Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description
228. ill have a Dead Zone where the Speed Reference remains in the minimum value 0133 even with the variation of the input signal Refer to the figure 13 1 b 4 Reference P0134 P0134 P0133 P0133 0 gt Alx Signal 0 Alx Signal 0 ead doeet laa gnc 20 mA 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20 mA tte MR ER 0 ene 0 ZONA 4 Figure 13 1 a Analog input actuation with Figure 13 1 b Analog input actuation with Dead Zone Off Dead Zone On In case that the analog inputs AI2 Al4 are programmed for 10 V to 10 V P0238 and P0248 configured in 4 there will be curves identical to those of the figure 13 1 above only when AI2 or Al4 is negative the speed direction will be inverted P0231 All Signal Function P0236 AI2 Signal Function P0241 13 Signal Function Adjustable O Speed Reference Factory 0 Range 1 No Ramp Reference Setting 2 Maximum Torque Current 3 Process Variable We 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 PLC Uss Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0246 AIA Signal Function Adjustable 0 Speed Reference Factory 0 Range 1 No Ramp Reference Setting 2 Maximum Torque Current 3 Process Variable 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 PLC Use Properties CFG Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 38 Analog Inputs 38 Anal
229. in constant speed during start acceleration or deceleration p 91911 are presented in P0295 Refer to the CFW 11 user s manual chapter 8 Technical Specifications for more details regarding these operation regimens 6 10 Starting up and Settings STARTING UP AND SETTINGS In order to start up in the several types of controls beginning from the factory settings consult the following sections 9 5 Start up in the V f Control Mode 10 3 WW Control Mode Start up 11 9 Start up in the Vector Modes Sensorless and with Encoder In order to use previously loaded parameters refer to the section 7 1 Backup Parameters described next 7 1 BACKUP PARAMETERS 06 The CFW 11 BACKUP functions allow saving the content of the current inverter parameters in a specific memory or vice versa overwrite the contents of the current parameters with the memory contents Besides there is a function exclusive for software update by means of the FLASH Memory Module P0204 Load Save Parameters Adjustable Range ot Used Factory 0 ot Used Setting Reset P0045 eset P0043 eset P0044 ad 60 Hz ad 50 Hz ad User 1 ad User 2 oad User 3 10 Save User 1 11 2 Save User 2 12 Save User 3 Properties CFG Access groups 06 BACKUP PARAMETERS via HMI 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 L L L L L Description It makes it possible to save the actual inverter parameters in
230. indication of any anomaly in the inverter If the alarm persists when the motor is operating at a constant speed it is an indication of an anomaly in the current distribution among the power units 0 37 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes A395 19 Phase W book 2 current unbalance alarm Bad electric connection between the DC bus and the Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 unbalance in the current power unit Phase W B2 distribution between this phase and the smallest Bad electric connection between the power unit output current of the same phase in other book only when and the motor he current in this phase is higher than 75 96 of its nominal value Note In case of fast acceleration or braking one of these 396 19 Phase U book 3 current unbalance alarm alarms may be indicated momentarily disappearing after Current Unbalance at indicates a 20 6 unbalance in the current 3 seconds This is not an indication of any anomaly in the Phase U B3 distribution between this phase and the smallest inverter current of the same phase in other book only when If the alarm persists when the motor is operating at a he current in this phase is higher than 75 of its constant speed it is an indication of an anomaly in the nominal value current distribution among the power units A397 0 Phase V book 3 current unbalance alarm Current Unbalance at ind
231. ing 15 rpm Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Description It is used in the N N function of the digital and relay outputs P0293 Tx Torque Adjustable 200 96 Factory 100 Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 41 Digital Outputs 41 Digital Outputs Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Description It is used in the Torque gt Tx and Torque Tx functions of the digital and relay outputs In those functions the motor torque indicated in 009 is compared with the value adjusted in P0293 The setting of this parameter is expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current 401 100 P0294 Hx Time Adjustable 0 to 6553 h Factory 4320h Range Setting Properties Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L 41 Digital Outputs LI 41 Digital Outputs Description It is used in the Enabled Hours gt Hx function of the digital and relay outputs 13 2 LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMAND In those parameter groups one can configure the origin of the main inverter commands when in the LOCAL or in the REMOTE situation as the Speed Reference Speed Direction Run Stop and JOG P0220 LOCAL REMOTE Selection Source Adjustable 0 Always LOCAL Factory 2 Range 1 Always REMOTE Setting
232. ion Adjustable 0 Inactive Factory 1 Range 1 Active Setting Properties VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS vae BUE 25 WW Control Description It enables or disables the slip compensation during the regeneration in the VVW control mode Refer to the parameter P0138 in the section 9 1 Control for more details on the slip compensation 10 2 MOTOR DATA 43 The parameters for the used motor data setting are listed in this group They must be adjusted according to the motor nameplate data PO398 to P0406 except P0405 and by means of the Self Tuning or from data of the motor data sheet other parameters In this section only the parameters P0399 and P0407 will be presented the others are presented in the section 11 7 Motor Dota P0398 Motor Service Factor Refer to the section 11 7 Motor Data for more information P0399 Motor Rated Efficiency Adjustable 50 0 to 99 9 96 Factory 67 0 Range Setting Properties CFG and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI L 43 Motor Data Description It sets the motor rated efficiency This parameter is important for the VVW control precise operation The inaccurate setting implies in incorrect calculation of the slip compensation and consequently an imprecise speed control VVW Control P0400 Motor Rated Voltage P0401 Motor Rated Current P0402 Motor Rated Speed P0403 Motor Rated
233. ion will be direct P0528 Process Variable Scale Factor Adjustable se 9999 Factory 1000 Range Setting P0529 Process Variable Decimal Point Adjustable O wxyz Factory 1 Range 1 wxy z Setting 2 wx yz 3 w xyz Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description Those parameters define how the process variable 0040 and the PID Setpoint 0041 will be shown The parameter P0529 defines the number of decimal places after the dot However the parameter P0528 must be adjusted in the following manner 0529 20528 Process V FS Indication x 10 Analog input Gain Where Process V F S Indication Process Variable Full Scale value which corresponds to 10 V 20 mA at the analog input used as feedback Example 1 0 to 25 bar Pressure Transducer 4 to 20 mA output Desired indication O to 25 bar FS Feedback input AI3 gain 242 1 000 signal PO243 1 4 to 20 mA P0529 0 without decimal place after the dot 25 x 10 P0528 2 1 000 a Example 2 Factory settings Desired indication 0 0 96 to 100 0 96 F S Feedback input AI2 412 gain 237 1 000 0529 1 one decimal place after the dot 100 0 x 10 P0528 1 000 20 13 PID Regulator 46 P0530 Process Variable Engineering Unit 1 P0531 Process Variable Engineering Unit 2 P0532 Process Variable Engineering
234. iring connected to the motor termistor PTC function Motor termistor is not installed Blocked motor shaft A128 Indicates that the inverter stopped receiving valid M Check the wiring and grounding installation Timeout for Serial messages within a certain time interval Make sure the inverter has sent a new message within the Communication Note time interval set at 14 It may be disabled by setting 14 0 0 s A129 Alarm that indicates interruption of the Anybus CC PLC entered into the idle state Anybus is Offline communication Programming error Master and slave set with a different number of I O words Communication with master has been lost broken cable unplugged connector etc A130 Alarm that indicates an access error to the M Defective unrecognized or improperly installed Anybus CC Anybus Access Error Anybus CC communication module module Conflict with a WEG option board A133 Alarm indicating that the power supply was not Broken or loose cable CAN Not Powered connected to the CAN controller M Power supply is off A134 Inverter CAN interface has entered into the bus off Incorrect communication baud rate Bus Off state Two nodes configured with the same address in the network Wrong cable connection inverted signals A135 Alarm that indicates a communication error Communication problems CANopen M Wrong master configuration s
235. is 10 4 Chapter 11 Vector Control 11 1 Sensorless Control and with Encoder 222 2 11 1 Mode 11 5 WAS a 11 5 11 4 Optimal Flux for Sensorless Vector 11 6 T0195 Torque oscura eterne ee aee dee 11 7 11 6 Optimal 2 11 8 Iz MotorDald AS dads Sosa tendit tent aes 11 10 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet 11 15 11 8 Veet r Control 29 ert rir eee eter 11 16 11 81 Speed Regulator 90 11 16 11 8 2 Current Regulator 911 2 2 2 11 19 Rlox Regulator 9215 5 11 20 We Conirol 11 22 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 941 2 2 22 2 0 00000000000000005 11 23 11 96 Torque Current Limitations 95 11 28 11 8 7 DC Link Regulator 96 eene eene 11 30 11 9 Start up in the Vector Modes Sensorless and with Encoder 11 32 Summary Chapter 12 Functions Common to All the Control Modes SM nile 12 1 12 2 Speed References 2111 susce riti te t ert t SR eter re xir epe
236. king eliminating in many cases the need of additional braking IGBT and braking resistor The Optimal Braking makes it possible braking the motor with a higher torque than the one obtained with traditional methods as for instance the braking by the injection of direct current DC braking In the DC braking case only the losses in the motor rotor are used to dissipate the energy stored as the mechanic load inertia rejecting the total friction losses With the Optimal Braking in the other hand the total losses in the motor as well as the total inverter losses are used It is possible to get a braking torque roughly 5 times greater than with DC braking Vector Control In the figure 11 3 the Torque x Speed curve of a typical 10 hp 7 5 kW IV pole motor is presented The braking torque obtained at the rated speed for an inverter with a torque limit PO169 and PO1 70 adjusted in a value equal to the motor rated torque is supplied by the point on the figure 11 3 The value of is on the function of the motor efficiency and it is defined by the following expression being despised the attrition losses TB 11 n Where n motor efficiency In the 11 3 figure case the efficiency of the motor for the rated load is n 0 84 or 84 which results in TB1 0 19 or 19 of the motor rated torque The braking torque starting from the TB1 point varies in the inverse ratio of the speed 1 N At low speeds the braking torque reac
237. king IGBT Bit 11 indicates if the inverter is equipped with the DC special hardware optional 1 CFW11 with DC special hardware O for the other inverter models Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Bit 10 indicates if the inverter has the DC DC converter for receiving external 24 V electronics power supply O with DC DC converter 1 2without DC DC 24 V converter Bit 9 indicates the presence of the safety relay 0 without safety relay 1 2 with safety relay Bit 8 indicates if the inverter is equipped with RFI suppressor filter 0 without RFI filter 1 with RFI filter Bits 7 and 6 indicate the inverter power supply voltage 00 200 240 V 01 380 480 Bits 5 4 3 2 1 and 0 together with the voltage indication bits 7 and 6 they indicate the inverter rated current ND The next table presents the combinations available for those bits Table 6 6 Current codification for the parameter P0029 200 240 V 380 480 V 6 5 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Table 6 6 cont Current codification for the parameter P0029 Nu ERO Frame Sco Coren 294 0 0 1 424 0 0 11 0 1 1 500 600 V 1 1 G 660 690 V 1 4284 0 1 1 11 0 Models with single phase three phase power supply Example For a 10 V 380 480 V CFW 11 with RFI suppresso
238. l deceleration ramp regardless of the P0101 or P0103 setting Its use is not recommended with V f and VVW control modes Increase and Decrease E P Electronic Potentiometer They are active when 24 V is applied for Increasing E P or O V for Decreasing E P at the respective input programmed for that function It is also necessary to program P0221 and or P0222 in 7 Refer to the section 12 5 Electronic Potentiometer Local Remote When programmed this function activates Local when O V is applied to the input and Remote when 24 V are applied It is also necessary to program P0220 4 Dlx Speed Torque This function is valid for PO202 3 or 4 Sensorless Vector Control or Vector with Encoder and Speed is selected with O V applied to the input whereas Torque by applying 24 V 13 13 C each user memory Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs When Torque is selected the speed regulator parameters PO161 and P0162 become inactive Thus the Total Reference becomes the Torque Regulator input Refer to the figures 11 1 and 11 2 The speed regulator of the PID type is converted into a P type with proportional gain 1 00 and a null integral gain When Speed is selected the gains of the speed regulator become again defined by PO161 and 0162 In the applications with torque control it is recommended to follow the method described at the parameter 160 DC Link Regulation it must be used when 18
239. l image is important to allow that a derating in the fault actuation time be given so that shorter actuation times be obtained when the motor is hot This function applies a derating in the fault actuation time depending on the output frequency supplied to the motor because for the self ventilated ones there will be less ventilation on the frame at lower speeds and the motor will be subject to more heating Thus it becomes necessary to reduce the fault actuation time in order to prevent the motor from burning In order to assure more protection in case of restart this function keeps the information regarding the motor thermal image in the CFW 11 nonvolatile memory EEPROM Therefore after the inverter restart the function will use the value saved in the thermal memory to perform a new overload evaluation The parameter 48 configures the desired protection level for the motor overload function The possible options are Fault and Alarm only Fault only Alarm and disabled motor overload protection The actuation level for the motor overload alarm A046 is adjusted via P0349 In order to get more information refer to parameters P0156 P0157 P0158 P0159 P0348 and P0349 the section 15 3 Protections 15 1 Faults and Alarms In order to assure the conformity of the CFW 11 motor overload protection with the UL508C standard observe the following The TRIP current is equal to 1
240. l the Control Modes P0299 DC Braking Start Time Adjustable 0 0 to 15 05 Factory 0 05 Range Setting Properties VVW and Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 47 DC Braking Description This parameter sets the DC braking time at starting INJECTION OF DIRECT CURRENT AT STARTING Motor Speed Time P0299 P0302 P0372 VVW Sensorless DC Braking gt Time Sto Figure 12 10 DC braking operation at starting P0300 DC Braking Stop Time Adjustable 0 0 to 15 05 Factory 0 05 Range Setting Properties VVW and Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 47 DC Braking Description This parameter sets the DC braking time at stopping The figure 12 11 presents the DC braking operation via ramp disabling refer to 01 12 20 Functions Common to All the Control Modes a V f scalar Motor Speed 20300 _4 Time DEAD TIME 24V Dlx Run Stop Open b VVW and Sensorless Vector DC Current Injection Motor Speed i P0300 ON E P0301 i Time 24V 1 Dlx Run Stop Open Figure 12 11 a and b DC braking operation at the ramp disabling via ramp disable The figure 12 12 presents the DC braking operation via general disabling This condition does only work in the V f scalar mode Motor Speed aa Time 24V Gener
241. lass Adjustable 0 Class 5 Factory 1 Range Ck 10 Setting 2 Clos 15 8 esse 4 Class 25 5 Class 20 Clos 55 40 8 Class 45 Properties CFG V f VVW and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter sets the motor thermal class and the time for the correct actuation of the F072 fault depends on it The higher the thermal class the longer the fault actuation time will be ATTENTION The incorrect selection of the thermal class may cause the burning of the motor The necessary data for choosing the thermal class are the following Motor rated current 1 Blocked rotor current I Blocked rotor time Service factor SF Note It must be verified if the given blocked rotor time is for hot or cold motor so that the correspondent thermal class curves be used With those values the overload current and the overload time must be calculated using the following equations Overload Current 100 96 x SF Overload Time T s These equations provide the limit conditions for the error actuation i e the motor cannot work with a longer fault actuation time than this one because of burning risk Thus a thermal class immediately inferior must be chosen so that the motor protection is assured 15 6 Faults and Alarms Example For a motor with the following characteri
242. le 265 22 013 Function Manual Automatic E Once the PID Regulator function is enabled the JOG FWD REV functions become inactive The enabling and Run Stop commands are defined at PO220 P0224 and P0227 P0520 PID Proportional Gain P0521 PID Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 7 999 Factory 0520 1 000 Range Setting 0521 0 043 P0522 PID Differential Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 3 499 Factory 0 000 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description These parameters define the gains of the PID Regulator function and must be adjusted according to the application that is being controlled Examples of initial settings for some applications are presented in the table 20 3 20 10 PID Regulator 46 Table 20 3 Suggestions for PID regulator gain settings Gains Quantity Proportional Integral Differential P0520 P0521 P0522 0 000 0 087 0 000 Hydraulic system flow 0 037 0 000 2 0 004 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 NOTE In the level control case the setting of the integral gain will depend on the time that it takes for the reservoir to pass from the minimum acceptable level to the desired level in the following conditions 1 For the direct action the time must be measured with the maximum input flow and the minimum output flow 2 For the reverse action the time must be measured with the minimum input
243. le 20 0 wo 150 0 C Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI 45 Protections Description These read only parameters indicate in Celsius degrees C the internal temperature of the IGBTs of each phase of each book The indication resolution is 0 1 C Refer to the CFW 11M user s manual to obtain more information P0832 Digital Input DIMI Function P0833 Digital Input DIM2 Function Adjustable 0 Not Used Factory 0 Range 1 No External Fault IPS Setting 2 No Refrigeration Fault 3 No Braking Overtemperature Fault 4 No External Rectifier Overtemperature Fault 5 No External Rectifier Temperature Alarm 6 No External Rectifier Fault Properties CFW 11M Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections 40 Digital Inputs 15 15 Faults and Alarms Description These parameters allow configuring the digital inputs DIM and DIM2 for the type of fault 1 2 3 4 or 6 or alarm 5 to be detected The fault or alarm code will be displayed on the HMI and the inverter will be disabled when the selected fault occurs P0834 DIMI and DIM2 Status Adjustable Bit O DIMI Factory Range Bit 1 DIM2 Setting Properties CFW 11M and RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI 40 Digital Inp
244. les Example the approximation of a quadratic V f curve for energy saving in variable torque loads like centrifuge pumps and fans 9 2 ADJUSTABLE V f CURVE 24 P0142 Maximum Output Voltage P0143 Intermediate Output Voltage P0144 3Hz Output Voltage Adjustable 0 0 to 100 0 96 Factory P0142 100 0 96 Range Setting P0143 50 0 96 P0144 8 0 96 P0145 Field Weakening Speed P0146 Intermediate Speed Adjustable O to 18000 rpm Factory 0145 1800 rpm Range Setting 0146 900 rpm Properties Adj and CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 24 Adjust V f Curve Description This function allows the adjustment of the curve that links output voltage and frequency by means of parameters as presented by the figure 9 8 in mode It is necessary when the used motor has a rated frequency different from 50 Hz or 60 Hz or when a quadratic V f curve for energy saving in the operation of centrifuge pumps and fans is desired or even in special applications such as for instance when a transformer is used at the inverter output between it and the motor e Scalar Control V f The function is activated with PO202 2 Adjustable The factory setting of PO144 8 0 96 is adequate for standard motors with rated frequency of 60 Hz When using a motor with rated frequency adjusted in PO403 different from 60 Hz the default value for PO144 may become inadequate being able to cause difficulties in t
245. lf Motor cable capacitance is too large resulting in current Note peaks at the output 0 It may be disabled by setting 43 0 F076 Fault of motor current unbalance Loose connection or broken wiring between the motor Motor Current Note and inverter connection Imbalance It may be disabled by setting P0342 0 Vector control with wrong orientation Vector control with encoder encoder wiring or encoder motor connection inverted F077 The dynamic braking resistor overload protection Excessive load inertia or desacceleration time too short DB Resistor Overload operated Motor shaft load is excessive Wrong settings for parameters 154 and P0155 F078 Fault related to the PTC temperature sensor installed Excessive load at the motor shaft Motor in the motor Excessive duty cycle too many starts stops per minute Overtemperature Note Surrounding air temperature too high It may be disabled by setting 51 0 or 3 Loose connection or short circuit resistance lt 100 Q in It is required to set the analog input output to the the wiring connected to the motor termistor PTC function Motor termistor is not installed Blocked motor shaft F079 Lack of encoder signals Broken wiring between motor encoder and option kit for Encoder Signal Fault encoder interface Defective encoder F080 Microcontroller watchdog fault Electrical noise CPU Watchdog F082 Fault while copying parameters An attempt to copy the keypad parameters t
246. lt Timer those timers activate or deactivate the relay outputs 2 and 3 Refer to the parameters P0283 to P0286 next gt Nx and Nt gt Nx valid only for PO202 4 Vector with Encoder it means that both the conditions must be satisfied so that DOx saturated transistor and or relay with the coil energized In other words it is enough that one of the conditions is not satisfied so that DOx open transistor and or relay with the coil not energized SoftPLC it means that the digital output state will be controlled by the programming done in the memory area reserved to the SoftPLC function Refer to the SoftPLC manual for more details STO it signalizes the STO state Safety Stop active No F160 It signalizes that the inverter is not disabled by F160 fault Safety Stop Relay 13 21 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs No Alarm it means that the inverter in not in the alarm condition No Fault and No Alarm it means that the inverter is not disabled by any type of fault and it is not in alarm condition PLC11 This option configures the signal at the RL1 DO2 RL2 and RL3 outputs to be used by the PLC11 No IOE Fault means that the inverter is not disabled by motor high temperature fault detected through any IOE 01 IOE 02 or IOE 03 module temperature sensor No IOE Alarm means that the inverter is not in the motor high temperature alarm condition detected through any 01 IOE 02 or I
247. lt 3 Alarm P0349 Ixt Alarm Level 70 to 100 85 45 15 10 P0350 IGBTs Overload Conf F w SF rd 1 F A w SF rd CFG 45 15 10 1 F A w SF rd 2 EnoSF rd 3 F A no SF rd P0351 Motor Overtemp Conf 0 Off 1 Fault Alarm 45 15 11 1 Fault Alarm 2 Fault 3 Alarm P0352 Fan Control Config 0 HS OFF nt OFF 2 5 CFG 45 15 12 HS ON Int O 2 HS CT Int CT HS CT Int OFF 4 HS CT Int O 5 HS ON Int OFF 6 HS ON Int CT 7 HS OFF Int ON 8 HS OFFInt CT P0353 IGBTs Air Overtmp Cfg 0 HS F A Air F A 0 HS F A Air F A CFG 45 15 12 1 5 Air F HS F Air F A 3 HS F Air F 0354 Fan Speed Config 0 Off 1 Fault 45 5 13 1 Fault P0355 185 Fault Configuration 0 Off 1 45 5 13 1 P0356 Dead Time Compens 0 Off 1 45 5 14 P0357 Phase Loss Time 60 s 3s 45 5 14 P0359 Motor Current Stabil 0 Off 0 Off V f and VVW 45 5 14 On P0372 DC Braking Curr Sless 0 0 to 90 0 40 0 Sless 47 2 22 P0373 PTC Type Sensor 0 PTC Simple 1 PTC Triple CFG 45 5 17 PTC Triple Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Setting Year Properties Groups Setting P0374 Sensor 1 F A Conf 0 Off 1
248. ltage P0401 Motor Rated Current P0402 Motor Rated Speed Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 1750 rpm Range Setting 1458 rpm Properties GEC Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Adjust it according to the used motor nameplate data For PM motor control the adjustable range goes from 0 to 18000 rpm P0403 Motor Rated Frequency Adjustable 0 to 300 Hz Factory 60 Hz Range Setting 50 Hz Properties GRG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description It is automatically adjusted according to the expression P0402 x P0431 Hz 60 P0403 P0404 Motor Rated Power P0405 Number of Encoder Pulses P0408 Run Self Tuning The function is inactive 1 6 PM Vector Control P0409 Motor Stator Resistance Rs Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 ohm Factory 0 000 ohm Range Setting Properties CFG PM Vector and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control 94 Self tuning Description Value obtained from the motor data sheet If this information is not available use the factory setting P0431 Number of Motor Pole Adjustable 2 to 24 Factory 6 Range Setting Properties PM Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via 43 Motor Data NOTE Set this parameter in 6 for the standard Wmagnet motor line PO402
249. ltispeed Reference 7 Adjustable 0 to 18000 rpm Factory 1800 rpm Range Setting 1500 rpm P0131 Multispeed Reference 8 Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory 1650 rpm Range Setting 1375 rpm Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 36 Multispeed N Functions Common to All the Control Modes Description The Multispeed brings as advantages the stability of the predefined fixed references and the immunity against electric noises isolated digital inputs Dlx In order to activate the Multispeed function one must configure the parameter PO221 8 and or 222 8 Reference Selection In order to use only 2 or 4 speeds any combination of the 014 015 and 016 inputs can be used Verity the Speed Reference parameters according to the used DI s The input s programmed for other function s must be considered as V as presented in the table 12 4 Table 12 3 Multispeed function selection via digital inputs Enabled Dix 0266 13 P0267 13 D 0268 18 Table 12 4 Multispeed reference w amp 95 4 Output speed Accelerating ramp P0124 Time 24 0 V open 24 V DIS 0 V open i 24V 014 EE O V open Figure 12 4 Multispeed 016 12 8 PO Functions Common to All the Control Modes 12 5 ELECTRONIC POTENTIO
250. m 0 to 40000 Hourly turn or decreased from 40000 to O rotate Counterclockwise This parameter can be visualized in the analogical exits when 257 49 or P0260 49 Consult section 12 10 Search of Zero of the Encoder P0040 PID Process Variable P0041 PID Setpoint Value Refer to the section 20 6 Parameters P0042 Time Powered Adjustable 0 to 65535 h Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained powered This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter The content of P0042 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected P0043 Time Enabled Adjustable 00 10 0553 5 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description It indicates the total number of hours that the inverter remained enabled It indicates up to 6553 5 hours and then it gets back to zero By setting PO204 3 the value of the parameter P0043 is reset to zero This value is kept even when power is removed from the inverter The content of P0043 is recorded on the EEPROM when the condition of undervoltage on the DC Link is detected 16 7 Read Only Parameters 09 P0044 kWh Counter Adjustable 65535 kWh Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI
251. m forward and reverse torque current will be 200 96 In order that the expressions which determine the total current and the maximum torque developed by the motor sections 11 5 Torque Control and 11 8 6 Torque Current Limitation remain valid replace PO169 P0170 by P0018 to 0021 The option 3 Process Variable defines the analog input as the PID Regulator feedback signal E g pressure sensor temperature etc Therefore it is also necessary to configure the parameter P0524 PID Feedback Selection When the analog input is at its maximum limit P0018 to 21 indicating 100 96 the process variable will also be at the maximum value 100 90 The option 4 PTC not available for the 14 input configures the input for motor temperature monitoring by means of a PTC type sensor when it is present in the motor Therefore it is also necessary to configure one analog output AO as a current source for feeding the PTC More details of this function are described in the section 15 2 Motor Overtemperature Protection The option 7 PLC use configures the signal at the input to be used by the PLC11 board P0232 All Gain P0237 AI2 Gain P0242 AI3 Gain P0247 14 Gain Adjustable Range P0234 All 0 000 to 9 999 Offset P0239 AI2 Offset P0244 AI3 Offset P0249 AIA Offset Adjustable Range 100 00 to 100 00 P0235 All Filter 2 5 gt 5
252. meters in order to know how to program each one P0153 Dynamic Braking Level Adjustable 339 to 400 V Factory 0296 0 375 V Range 585 to 800 V Setting P0296 1 618 585 to 800 V P0296 2 675 V 585 to 800 V 296 3 748 V 585 to 800 V P0296 4 780 V 809 to 1000 V P0296 5 893 V 809 to 1000 V P0296 6 972 V 924 to 1200 V P0296 7 972 V 924 to 1200 V P0296 8 1174 V Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 28 Dynamic Braking Description The parameter PO153 defines the voltage level for the braking IGBT actuation and it must be compatible with the power supply voltage If P0153 is adjusted at a level very close to the overvoltage F022 actuation level the fault may occur before the Braking resistor is able to dissipate the regenerated energy 14 1 Dynamic Braking The next table presents the overvoltage trip level Table 14 1 Overvoltage 022 trip levels Inverter Vn P0296 F022 220 230 V gt 400 380 400 415 440 460 gt 1000 7 DC Link Voltage 0 004 F022 Overvoltage P0153 Dynamic braking actuation Rated U Braking Resistor Voltage DB Time Figure 14 1 Dynamic Braking actuation curve Steps to enable the dynamic braking Connect the braking resistor Refer to the item 3 2 3 2 Dynamic Braking of the user s manual Set P0154 and P0155 according to the used braking resistor Set P015
253. mperature fault at the sensor 4 M Motor high temperature Sensor 4 Temperature Fault F190 6 indicates a temperature fault at the sensor 5 Motor high temperature Sensor 5 Temperature Fault 191 indicates a temperature alarm at the sensor 1 Motor high temperature Sensor 1 Temperature A problem in the wiring connecting the sensor to the IOE Alarm 01 02 or 03 A192 09 indicates a temperature alarm at the sensor 2 M Motor high temperature Sensor 2 Temperature A problem in the wiring connecting the sensor to the Alarm 01 02 or 03 A193 9 indicates a temperature alarm at the sensor 3 Motor high temperature Sensor 3 Temperature A problem in the wiring connecting the sensor to the IOE Alarm 01 02 or 03 A194 9 indicates a temperature alarm at the sensor 4 Motor high temperature Sensor 4 Temperature A problem in the wiring connecting the sensor to the IOE Alarm 01 02 or 03 A195 09 indicates a temperature alarm at the sensor 5 Motor high temperature Sensor 5 Temperature A problem in the wiring connecting the sensor to the IOE Alarm 01 02 or 03 196 9 Sensor 1 cable alarm Shorted temperature sensor Sensor 1 Cable Alarm 197 Sensor 2 cable alarm Shorted temperature sensor Sensor 2 Cable Alarm A198 9 Sensor 3 cable alarm Shorted temperature sensor Sensor 3 Cable Alarm 199 9 Sensor 4 cable alarm Shorted temperature sensor Sensor 4 Cable Alarm A200 9 Sensor 5 c
254. mplitudes This simplifies considerably the control circuit When the vector is aligned with the motor flux it can be said that the vector control is orientated Therefore it is necessary that the motor parameters be correctly adjusted Some of those parameters must be programmed with the motor nameplate data and others obtained automatically through self tuning or from the motor data sheet supplied by the manvfacturer The figure 11 2 presents the block diagram for the vector control with encoder and the figure 11 1 for the sensorless vector control The information of the speed as well as of the currents measured by the inverter will be used to obtain the correct vector orientation In the vector with encoder control case the speed is obtained directly from the encoder signal while in the sensorless vector control there is an algorithm which estimates the speed based in the output currents and voltages The vector control measures the current separates the flux and torque portions and transforms these variables to the synchronous referential The motor control is accomplished by imposing the desired currents and comparing them with the actual values It is recommended that the motor current be greater than 1 3 of the inverter rated current 11 1 SENSORLESS CONTROL AND WITH ENCODER The Sensorless Vector Control is recommended for the majority of the applications because it allows the operation in a speed variation range of 1 100
255. n RO 09 50 18 1 1 Install App 2 Incompat App 3 App Stopped 4 App Running P1001 SoftPLC Command 0 Stop Program 0 Stop Program CFG 50 8 1 Run Program 2 Delete Program P1002 Scan Cycle Time 0 to 65535 ms RO 09 50 8 P1010 SoftPLC Parameter 1 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1011 SoftPLC Parameter 2 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1012 SoftPLC Parameter 3 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1013 SoftPLC Parameter 4 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1014 SoftPLC Parameter 5 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1015 SoftPLC Parameter 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1016 SoftPLC Parameter 7 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1017 SoftPLC Parameter 8 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1018 SoftPLC Parameter 9 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1019 SoftPLC Parameter 10 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1020 SoftPLC Parameter 11 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1021 SoftPLC Parameter 12 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1022 SoftPLC Parameter 13 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1023 SoftPLC Parameter 14 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1024 SoftPLC Parameter 15 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1025 SoftPLC Parameter 16 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1026 SoftPLC Parameter 17 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1027 SoftPLC Parameter 18 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1028 SoftPLC Parameter 19 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1029 SofttPLC Parameter 20 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1030 5 Param
256. n the commands Run Stop Direction of Rotation LOC REM and JOG are generated by the keyboard HMI or by the digital inputs Dlx P0217 Zero Speed Disable Adjustable 0 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 35 Zero Speed Logic Description When active it disables the inverter after the speed reference N and the actual speed N become lower than the value adjusted in the parameter PO291 1 96 of the motor rated speed hysteresis The inverter is enabled again when one of the conditions defined by the parameter P0218 is satisfied DANGER Be careful when approaching the motor while it is in the disable condition It may get back to operation at any moment because of the process conditions In case you want to handle or perform any type of maintenance remove power from the inverter P0218 Condition to Leave Zero Speed Disable Adjustable 0 Reference or Speed Factory 0 Range 1 Reference Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 35 Zero Speed Logic Description It specifies if the condition to leave the zero speed disable will be only the speed reference or also the actual speed Table 12 5 Condition to leave the 0 disable P0218 Inverter leaves the condition of disable by 217 1 N 0 001 gt P0291 or P0002 gt P0291 When the PID regul
257. n the inverter is operating in the I f mode i e with the motor speed below the value defined by P0182 Table 11 5 Current applied in the I f mode _ 109 19 ______ pH POH L5 109 O6 O20 __8 20 2 _ gt 29 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 In that group are the parameters that are related to the motor and can be estimated by the inverter during the self tuning routine 0408 Run Self Tuning Adjustable 0 No Factory 0 1 No Rotation Setting 2 Run for _ 3 Run for T 4 Estimate T Properties CFG Vector and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning The commands via communication network SoftPLC and PLC11 remain inactive during the self tuning Description By changing from the factory setting to one of the 4 available options it is possible to estimate the value of the parameters related to the motor being used Refer to the next description for more details on each option 11 23 Vector Control Table 11 6 Self tuning options P0408 Self tuning Control Type __ ___ 1 Sensorless vector with encoder or VVW Sensorless vector or with encoder P0412 e P0413 P0413 P0408 1 No rotation The motor stands still during the self tuning The P0410 value is obtained from a table valid for WEG motors up
258. n to zero rpm Speed control accuracy of 0 01 96 if the 14 bit analog speed reference via optional board IOA 01 is used or if digital references are used for instance via keypad HMI Profibus DP DeviceNet etc The vector control with encoder needs the accessory for the incremental encoder interface ENC 01 or ENC 02 For more details on the installation and connection refer to the optional board manual Vector Control 50 04 1 4 69104 b Juano w uizuyeuBpui 9 10d 9 92108 99 Pens 68104 10 5n 88104 49 gt DDA 89104 JoyojnBay 06104 xnj4 dpo 99108 621 19 0Z 104 Y 19991 9104 19 69108 POPW UG 19104 do 61 b y Jojo nBex 4ndin 104p nBey peeds 00 0 yuan anbioy XDW XIV 001 dg 810d 19 98109 99 n 4n5jeQ7 8 LOd 1 lt 8104 O 6 Q 58104 JopojnBey Dq Figure 11 2 Vector with encoder control block diagram 11 4 Vector Control 11 2 1 f MODE SENSORLESS NOTE It is activa
259. nce where 011 represents the least significant digit Example In case the sequence 10100010 is presented on the keypad HMI it will correspond to the following status of the Dls Table 13 8 Digital inputs status Active Inactive Active Inactive Inactive Inactive Active Inactive 24 V 0 V 24 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 24 V 0 V P0263 011 Function P0264 DI2 Function P0265 013 Function P0266 DIA Function P0267 015 Function P0268 016 Function P0269 017 Function P0270 018 Function Adjustable 0 to 31 Factory P0263 1 Range Setting 0264 8 0265 0 0266 0 267 10 268 14 269 0 270 0 13 12 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Table 13 9 Digital input functions P0264 P0265 P0266 P0267 DI2 DI3 D14 215 0 13 and 23 0 13 and 23 0 and 23 and 23 P0263 DI1 0 13 and 23 P0268 DI6 0 and 23 DI7 DI8 Not used 07 Run Stop General Enable Fast Stop FWD Run REV Run 3 Wire Start 3 Wire Stop FWD REV LOC REM ncrease E P Decrease E P Multispeed Ramp 2 Cn Cn Speed Torque OG Ext Alarm No Ext Fault Reset PLC Use Manual Auto Disable FlyStart DC Link Regul Program Off Load User 1 2 Load User 3 Timer DO3 Timer Trace Function Factory setting N N N N
260. ndard value is defined in the condition of the nominal supply voltage The voltage reference used in the regulator Maximum output voltage see the illustration 11 1 or 11 2 is directly proportional to the voltage supply If this voltage increases the output voltage will then be able to increase to the adjusted value in the parameter P0400 Nominal Motor Voltage If the voltage supply decreases the maximum output voltage will decrease in the same proportion 11 8 4 I f Control 93 P0182 Speed for I f Control Actuation Adjustable 90 rpm Factory 18 rpm Range Setting Properties Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 93 I F Control Description It defines the speed below witch the transition form the sensorless to the control I f occurs The minimum recommended speed for the sensorless vector control operation is 18 rpm for 60 Hz rated frequency IV pole motors and 15 rpm for 50 Hz rated frequency IV pole motors NOTE For PO182 lt 3 rpm the 1 function will be disabled and the inverter will remain always in the sensorless vector mode 11 22 Vector Control P0183 Current in the I f Mode Adjustable 0109 Factory 1 Setting Properties Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control LJ 93 Control Description It defines the current to be applied to the motor whe
261. ndition the motor current can be calculated by P0169 or P0170 x P0401 motor The maximum torque developed by the motor is given by T 90 P0169 or P0170 8 If the current limitation is provided by an analog input replace 169 or P0170 by P0018 P0019 P0020 or P0021 according to the programmed Alx For more details refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs NOTE Parameters PO171 PO172 and 173 are inactive 21 10 PM Vector Control 21 7 5 DC Link Regulator 96 For the deceleration of high inertia loads with short deceleration times the CFW 11 has available the DC Link Regulation function which avoids DC link overvoltage F022 inverter tripping P0184 DC Link Regulation Mode Adjustable 0 With losses Factory 1 Range 1 Without losses Setting 2 Enable Disable via Dlx Properties CFG and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 96 DC Link Regulator Description It enables or disables the Without losses function of the DC Link Regulator according to the next table Table 21 1 DC Link Regulation Modes 0 With losses Optical Braking INACTIVE If it is used F022 overvoltage may occur during the speed reduction Automatic control of the deceleration ramp The Optical Braking is inactive The deceleration ramp is 1 Without losses autimatically adjusted in order to keep the DC link belo
262. ndle the motor or to perform any type of maintenance remove the power from the inverter 20 4 MONITORING MODE SCREENS 20 8 When the PID regulator is used the monitoring mode screen can be configured to show the main variables in a numerical form or as a bar graph with the respective engineering units An example of the keypad HMI with that configuration can be seen in the figure 20 4 where the process variable and the setpoint both in BAR and the motor speed in rpm are showed Refer to the chapter 5 Programming Basic Instructions Figure 20 4 Example of the keypad HMI in the monitoring mode for the PID Regulator function PID Regulator 46 20 5 CONNECTION OF A 2 WIRE TRANSDUCER In the 2 wire configuration the transducer signal and its supply share the same wires The figure 20 5 illustrates this type of connection 15 DN Setpoint 117 DI3 via keypad 118 D4 12 COM 13 24VCC CFW 11 OFF ON e 11 DGND REF All All REF AI2 AI2 PE Process Pressure gt gt Transducer Figure 20 5 Connection of a 2 wire transducer to the CFW 11 s T U vw Pe 20 6 PARAMETERS The parameters related to the PID Regulator 46 a
263. ne 55 11 5053 2300 Fax 55 11 5052 4212 automacao weg net www weg net ri 11366249
264. ng of the Load User 1 2 function Load User 3 this function allows the selection of the user memory in a similar process than P0204 9 with the difference that the user memory is loaded from a transition of the Dlx programmed for this function When the Dlx state changes from low level to high level transition from O V to 24 V the user memory 3 is loaded provided that the contents of the inverter actual parameters had been previously transferred to the parameter memory 0204 12 icy NOTES Make sure that when using those functions the parameter sets user memory 1 2 or 3 be totally compatible with the application motors Run Stop commands etc It will not be possible to load the user memory with the inverter enabled If two or three parameter sets from different motors were saved in the user memories 1 2 and or 3 the correct current values must be adjusted at the parameters P0156 P0157 and P0158 for 13 14 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Programming Off when this function is programmed and the digital input is with 24 V parameter changes will not be allowed regardless of the values set at 000 and P0200 When the Dlx input is with O V the parameter changes will be conditioned to the POOOO and PO200 settings DO2 and Timer this function acts as a timer to activate and deactivate the relays 2 and DO2 and DO3 When the timer function for the relay 2 or 3 is prog
265. ngs use the Menu 07 I O Configuration That need functions as Flying Start Ride Through DC Braking Dynamic Braking etc access and modify C those function parameters by means of the Menu 01 Parameter Groups J 11 33 Vector Control 11 34 Action Result Display Indication Action Result Display Indication Monitoring Mode In this moment the Oriented Start up routine is initiated and the Config Press Menu right soft key status is indicated at the top left part of the keypad HMI The parameter Language Th 00 ALL group P0201 English is already PARAMETERS is already selected selected If necessary change the language by pressing Select next d The group 01 PARAMETER GROUPS is selected to select the language and then press Save Set the content of PO202 pressing Select Next press until selecting the option 003 Sensorless or 004 Encoder This change resets the contents of PO410 Then press Save The parameter Oriented Start up Note that from this moment P0317 No is already selected on the option Reset left soft key or are no longer available There 3 options to leave the Oriented Start up Executing the Self Tuning 2 Setting the parameters P0409 to P0413 manually 3 Changing P0202 from vector to scalar control Press Select The cont
266. nitoring Mode screen at the factory setting Content of the 3 parameters in form of a bar graph Selection of the parameters via PO205 P0206 and or P0207 The values are showed in percentage by means of horizontal bars This mode is illustrated in the figure 5 4 f Monitoring parameters Motor speed in rpm Motor current in Amps Output frequency in Hz default P0205 P0206 and P0207 selection of the parameters to be shown in the Monitoring Mode P0208 to P0212 Engineering unit for the speed indication Figure 5 4 Monitoring Mode screen with bar graphs In order to configure the bar graph monitoring mode access the parameters PO205 P0206 and or P0207 and select the options ended with the symbol values in the range from 11 to 20 Thus the respective variable is configured to be shown as a bar graph The figure 5 5 presented next illustrates the procedure for the modification of the display of one variable to the graph mode q Action Result Display Indication Monitoring Mode Press Menu right soft key The group 00 ALL PARAMETERS is already selected Ww The group 01 PARAMETER GROUPS is selected Press Select A new list of groups is showed on the display with the group 20 Ramps selected Press until the group 30 HMI is selected The group 30 HMI is selected Press Sel
267. ntrol 12 18 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0325 Ride Through Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 0 to 63 9 Factory 22 8 Range Setting P0326 Ride Through Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 0 128 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 44 FlyStart RideThru Description These parameters configure the vector mode Ride Through controller which is responsible for keeping the DC link voltage at the level set in PO322 R T Regulator U Ride Through P0322 ics Refer to the figure 11 1 or 11 2 P0325 P0326 Figure 12 9 Ride Through controller Normally the factory settings for PO325 and P0326 are adequate for the majority of the applications Do not change these parameters 12 8 DC BRAKING 47 NOTE DC break on the start and or stop will not be active if PO202 4 Vector with Encoder mode a NOTE The DC Braking at start does not act when the Flying Start function is active PO320 1 or 2 The DC BRAKING consists in the application of direct current to the motor allowing its fast stopping Table 12 7 Parameters related to the DC braking Control Mode DC Braking at Starting DC Braking at Stopping V f scalar P0299 and P0302 P0300 P0301 and P0302 WW P0299 and P0302 P0300 P0301 and P0302 P0299 and P0372 P0300 P0301 and P0372 12 19 Functions Common to Al
268. nverter Status Adjustable 0 Ready Factory Range Run Setting 2 Undervoltage 3 Fault 4 Self Tuning 5 Configuration 6 DC Braking 7 510 Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI 16 2 Read Only Parameters 09 Description It indicates one of the 8 possible inverter states The description of each state is presented in the next table In order to facilitate the visualization the inverter status is also showed on the top left corner of the keypad HMI figure 5 3 section 5 6 Display Indications in the Monitoring Mode Settings The states 2 to 6 are presented in an abbreviated form as follows Table 16 1 Description of the inverter status State Abbreviated form on the Dossier 3 reme eb comer HMI top left corner P EN M Redy t indicates that the inverter is It indicates that the inverter is ready to be enabled __________ to be enabled It indicates that the inverter is enabled t indicates that the inverter is with insufficient line voltage for operation Undervoltage undervoltage and does not accept enabling commands F h th Fault It indicates that the inverter is in the fault state of the occurred fault Self Tuning t indicates that the inverter is executing the self tuning routine t indicates that the inverter is in the Oriented Start up routine or with Configuration Config incompatible parameter programming Refer to the section 5
269. o an inverter Copy Function Fault with a different firmware version 0 31 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes F084 Auto diagnosis fault Defect in the inverter internal circuitry Auto diagnosis Fault A088 ndicates a problem between the keypad and control Loose keypad cable connection Comunica o Perdida board communication Electrical noise in the installation Communication Lost A090 External alarm via digital input Wiring was not connected to the digital input DIT to 018 External Alarm Note set to No external alarm t is required to set a digital input to No external alarm F091 External fault via digital input Wiring was not connected to the digital input DIT to 018 External Fault Note set to No external fault t is required to set a digital input to No external aul F099 Current measurement circuit is measuring a wrong Defect in the inverter internal circuitry Invalid Current Offset value for null current A110 Alarm related to the PTC temperature sensor installed Excessive load at the motor shaft High Motor in the motor Excessive duty cycle too many starts stops per minute Temperature Note Surrounding air temperature too high It may be disabled by setting 51 0 or 2 M Loose connection or short circuit resistance lt 100 Q in It is required to set the analog input output to the the w
270. oad regimen HD Heavy Duty nom HD Overload 1 5 x aap T minute Rectifier The input circuit of the inverters that converts the input AC voltage into DC It is formed by power diodes Pre charge Circuit It charges the DC Link capacitors with a limited current thus avoiding current peaks when powering the inverter DC Link This is the inverter intermediate circuit with DC voltage and current obtained from the rectification of the AC supply voltage or from an external source it supplies the output IGBTs inverter bridge U V and W Arm It is a set of two IGBTs of the phases U V and W at the inverter output IGBT Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor It is the basic component of the output inverter bridge It operates like an electronic switch in the saturated closed switch and cut open switch modes 2 1 General Information Braking IGBT Operates as a switch for the activation of the braking resistor It is commanded by the DC Link level PTC It s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms increases proportionally to the increase of the temperature it is used as a temperature sensor in motors NTC It s a resistor whose resistance value in ohms decreases proportionally to the temperature increase it is used as a temperature sensor in power modules Keypad HMI Human Machine Interface It is the device that allows the control of the motor the visualization and the modification of the inverter param
271. occurrence P0096 DIx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable Bit DII Factory Range Bit 1 DI2 Setting Big2 Bit 3 014 Bit 4 015 Bit 5 016 Bit 6 DI7 Bit 7 DI8 Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It indicates the state of the digital inputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code which when converted to binary will indicate the states active and inactive of the inputs through numbers 1 and 0 Example If the code presented for the parameter 0096 on the keypad HMI is 00A5 it will correspond to the sequence 10100101 indicating that the inputs 8 6 3 and 1 were active at the moment of the last fault occurrence Table 16 2 Example of correspondence the 0096 hexadecimal code and the Dix states Bis E No relati ith the DI d ES AA da QN ee eens i Inactive Active jus 24 24 P0097 DOx Status at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable BitO DOI Factory Range Bit 1 DO2 Setting Bit 2 Bit 3 004 Bit 4 005 Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI 16 13 Read Only Parameters 09 Description It indicates the state of the digital outputs at the moment of the last fault occurrence The indication is done by means of an hexadecimal code which when converted to binary will indica
272. of the code showed in P0028 for PROFIBUS DP 05 and FLASH memory module Hrs ee oe __ S P0029 Power Hardware Configuration Adjustable Bit 5 Rated Current Factory Range Bit 6 and 7 Rated Voltage Setting Bit 8 EMC Filter Bit 9 Safety Relay Bit 10 0 24V 1 DC Link Bit 11 DC Special Hardware Bit 12 Dyn Brak IGBT Bit 13 Special Bit 14 and 15 Reserved Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 42 Inverter Data Description In a similar way than parameters 027 and P0028 the parameter 029 identifies the inverter model and the present accessories The codification is formed by the combination of binary digits and presented in the keypad HMI in hexadecimal format The bits that compose the code are explained in the next table Table 6 5 Parameter P0029 code constitution Bits ES ERE e RETE ER E EE EET DER Voltage 00 200 240 V 01 380 480 V 10 500 600 V 11 660 690 V Current with 24V supply with safety relay with RFI filter 4th Hexadecimal Code 3rd Hexadecimal Code 2nd Hexadecimal Code 1st Hexadecimal Code Bits 15 14 and 13 are fixed in 110 Bit 12 it indicates the presence of the dynamic braking IGBT 0 with braking IGBT 1 without bra
273. oftPLC Parameter 45 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1055 SoftPLC Parameter 46 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1056 SoftPLC Parameter 47 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1057 SoftPLC Parameter 48 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1058 SoftPLC Parameter 49 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 P1059 SoftPLC Parameter 50 32768 to 32767 0 50 8 Notes RO Read only parameter rw Read write parameter CFG Configuration parameter value can be programmed only with motor stopped V f Available when V f control mode is chosen Adj Available when adjustable V f control mode is chosen VVW Available when VVW control mode is chosen Vector Available when a vector control mode is chosen Sless Available when sensorless control mode is chosen PM Available when permanent magnet motor control is chosen Encoder Available when vector control with encoder is chosen CFW 11M Available for Modular Drive models 0 29 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes 2006 Mains voltage imbalance too high or phase missing Phase missing at the inverter s input power supply Imbalance or in the input power supply Input voltage imbalance gt 5 96 Input Phase Loss Note For the Frame Size E If the motor is unloaded or operating with reduced Phase loss at L3 R or 13 5 may cause F021 or F185 load this fault may not occur Phase loss at L3 T will cause 006 Fault delay is set at
274. og Inputs Description The functions of the analog inputs are defined in those parameters When the option O Speed Reference is selected the analog inputs are able to supply the reference for the motor subject to the specified limits P0133 and P0134 and to the ramp action PO100 to P0103 Therefore it is also necessary to configure the parameters P0221 and or P0222 selecting the use of the desired analog input For more details refer to the description of those parameters in the section 13 2 Local and Remote Command and to the figure 13 8 in this manual The option 1 No Ramp Reference valid only for the vector mode is used generally as an additional reference signal for instance in applications using a dancer Refer to the figure 13 8 option without acceleration and deceleration ramp The option 2 Maximum Torque Current makes it possible that the forward and reverse torque current limit control be done by means of the selected analog input In this case PO169 and 0170 are not used The adjustment done at the analog input All AI2 AI3 or can be monitored via parameters P0018 P0019 P0020 or P0021 respectively The value presented at this parameter will be the maximum torque current expressed as a percentage of the motor rated current P0401 The indication range will be from 0 to 200 96 When the analog input is equal to 10 V maximum the corresponding monitoring parameter will show 200 96 and the value of the maximu
275. ommand is activated the motor magnetization will not occur a 9 NOTE For a better performance of the function the activation of the braking without losses is recommended a by setting the parameter PO185 according to the table 11 9 12 12 Functions Common to All the Control Modes P0327 ES Current Ramp 1 Adjustable 0 000 to 1 000 s Factory 0 070s Range Setting Description It defines the time for the I f current to change from 0 to 0 9xP0401 at the beginning of the frequency scan f in order to minimize the generation of transients in the motor The factory value varies according to the motor and is defined by PO327 P0412 8 P0328 Flying Start Filter Adjustable 0 000 to 1 000 s Factory 0 085 s Range Setting Description It defines an amount of time that allows eliminating the transients generated by the machine during the identification of the motor speed The factory value varies according to the motor and is defined by 28 0412 8 0 015 5 P0329 Frequency Ramp 1 ES Adjustable 2 0 to 50 0 Factory 6 0 Range Setting Properties Sless Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via 44 FlyStart RideThru Description It defines the rate of frequency variation used in the motor speed search The factory value of P0329 shown in the following table allows the operation of the function and must be optimized normally the final value adjusted is greater than the value
276. ontent of the parameter is changed to P0317 001 Yes Press Save In this moment the Oriented Start up routine is initiated and the Config status is indicated at the top left part of the keypad HMI The parameter Language P0201 English is already selected If necessary change the language by pressing Select next and to select the language and then press Save Display Indication Set the content of PO202 pressing Select Next press until selecting the option 005 VYW and then press Save If necessary change the content of P0296 according to the used line voltage Therefore press Select This change will affect P0151 P0153 P0185 P0321 P0322 P0323 and P0400 If necessary change the content of P0298 according to the inverter application Therefore press Select This change will affect P0156 P0157 P0158 P0401 and P0404 The actuation time and level of the IGBTs overload protection will be affected If necessary change the content of P0398 according to the motor service factor Therefore press Select This change will affect the value of the current and the time for the actuation of the motor overload protection If necessary change the content of P0399 according to the rated motor efficiency Therefore press Select Figure 10 2 VVW mode Oriented Start up VVW Control Action Result
277. op stop mode is programmed and the Flying Start function is not enabled d then start the motor again only if it is standing still NOTE iy Options 3 and 4 will operate only with PO202 4 or P0202 6 The difference in behavior compared to the options and 2 is in the torque current reference lq reset This reset occurs during the inverter state transition from Run to Ready after executing a Stop command The purpose of the options 3 and 4 is to avoid that a high current reference value is stored in the speed regulator when for instance using a mechanical brake to stop the motor shaft V before its speed is null J 13 31 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs gt 26109 CC Od 4 oor 2 10104 2 00 104 E dois 1504 uoupJ9 e2eq uoupas e2eq e ueiejey 010 Q dojg uny Sir 9e ueJejey 9 ueJejey G EE LOd e ueJojoy unu 04 d31OW33 9104 1V2OI 69104 1 re LOd 135430 20 0 2 20 04 9 004 duioy 4ego 12004 02004 ES 61004 16004 82uexejey 704 1940 204 62u19je dw
278. operation area P0204 7 8 or 9 it is necessary that these areas had been saved previously The operation of loading one of those memories can also be performed via digital inputs Dlx Refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs for more details regarding this programming P0204 10 11 or 12 NOTE When 204 5 or 6 the parameters PO201 Language P0295 Rated Current PO296 Line Rated Voltage P0297 Switching Frequency P0308 Serial Address PO352 Fan Control Configuration and P0359 Motor Current Stab will not be change by the factory settings P0318 Copy Function MemCard Adjustable 0 Or Factory 0 Range 1 VFD gt Setting 2 MemCard VFD Properties GEC Access groups 06 BACKUP PARAMETERS via HMI Starting up and Settings Description This function allows saving the contents of the inverter writing parameters in the FLASH Memory Module MMF or vice versa and can be used to transfer the contents of the parameters from one inverter to another Table 7 2 Parameter P0318 options P0318 O0 Inactive no action Inverter MemCard transfers the inverter current parameters contents to the MMF 2 MemCard Inverter transfers the contents of the parameters stored in the MMF to the inverter control board After the transfer has been finished an inverter reset occurs The content of P0318 returns to 0 After storing the paramet
279. or Settings of PO156 P0157 and P0158 are too low for the High Load on Motor Note t may be disabled by setting 0348 0 2 used motor Motor shaft load is excessive A047 GBT Overload Alarm 2048 GBT Overload Fault An IGBTs overload alarm occurred Note may be disabled by setting PO350 0 or 2 An IGBTs overload fault occurred Inverter output current is too high Inverter output current is too high 0 30 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes A050 A high temperature alarm was detected by the NTC Surrounding air temperature is too high 750 C 122 F IGBT High Temperature U temperature sensors located on the IGBTs and output current is too high Note Blocked or defective fan It may be disabled by setting PO353 2 or 3 Very dirty heatsink F051 high temperature fault was detected by the NTC IGBT Overtemperature U temperature sensors located on the IGBTs A053 12 Alarm of high temperature measured at the High Temperature on temperature sensors NTC of the IGBTs IGBTs V Note It can be disabled by setting P0353 2 or 3 2054 02 Fault of overtemperature measured at the Overtemperature on temperature sensors NTC of the IGBTs IGBTs V A056 12 Alarm of high temperature measured at the High Temperature on temperature sensors NTC of the IGBTs IGBTs W No
280. or the induction motors Refer to the figures 21 1 and 21 2 In the constant torque region the control determines the current reference id suitable for the specified motor Therefore the reluctance torque is added to the torque produced by the magnets and the motor accelerates with the maximum N m A ratio and fast dynamic response Above the nominal speed the control applies field weakening through the control of the armature reaction so that the motor accelerates with nominal voltage and constant power PM Vector Control 21 2 1 Sensorless PM P0202 7 The Sensorless PM control uses two rotor position estimation methods the method for low speed injects a signal with a frequency of 1 kHz which causes an increase in the acoustic noise and the method for higher speeds is based on the output voltages and currents It allows the control of torque and speed down to O zero rpm with operation in a speed range of 1 1000 and fast dynamic response lf x IPM Ua 2 5 8 5 S 3 ac d 9 Ss 5 2 5 2 gt gt 5 9 aaa o ot Lo Suede JEN 9 5 96900 Eje TE c 5 5 L 1 POT mE 5 5 go g 8 gt 1 1 a 5 60 Q 5 2 25 X A 5 0 v i SON D 59 5 5
281. or turns at low speed although the output current is different from zero t is recommended to reduce the value adjusted in P0161 until the motor behavior is correct P0163 Local Reference Offset P0164 Remote Reference Offset Adjustable 999 1o 999 Factory 0 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator Description An offset of the analog input Alx may be occasionally adjusted The value 999 is equivalent to a value of 0 1219 pu Refer to the figure 13 8 11 17 Vector Control P0165 Speed Filter Adjustable 0 012 to 1 000 s Factory 0 0125 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator Description It sets the time constant of the motor speed filter either measured by the encoder when P0202 4 or estimated when 202 3 Refer to the figure 11 1 or 11 2 NOTE Generally this parameter must not be changed The increment in its value turns the system response slower P0166 Speed Regulator Differential Gain Adjustable 0 00 to 7 99 Factory 0 00 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 90 Speed Regulator Description The differential action helps minimize the motor speed variations generate
282. ore press Select This change may affect P0122 to P0131 P0133 P0134 P0182 P0208 P0288 and P0289 If necessary change the content of P0403 according to the rated motor frequency Therefore press Select If necessary change the content of PO404 according to the rated motor power Therefore press Select This parameter will only be visible if the encoder board ENC2 or PLC11 module is connected to the inverter If there is an encoder connected to the motor change P0405 according to its number of pulses per revolution Therefore press Select If necessary change the content of 406 according to the type of motor ventilation Therefore press Select This change will affect PO156 P0157 P0158 P0399 and P0407 Figure 11 6 cont Vector mode Oriented Start up 11 35 Vector Control 11 36 5 20 Figure 11 6 cont Vector mode Oriented Start up Action Result Display Indication At this point the keypad HMI presents the option to run the Self Tuning Whenever possible the Self Tuning must be carried out Thus press Select to access P0408 and then to select the desired option Refer to the item 11 8 5 Self Tuning 05 and 94 for more detoils Next press Save After doing that the Self Tuning routine is initiated and SelfTun is indicated on the top left corner of the keypad HMI
283. orward Time Time Reverse 124 V 24 V Dlx Open Time Open Time e RAMP 2 f FAST STOP 24 V Dix Open Run Stop Motor decelerates Motor speed with ramp zero n Time Dlx ramp 2 Open PS Time 24 V P0102 4 0 03 P0100 P0101 Motor speed Dlx Fast Stop Open lim Time g LOAD USER VIA 24 V ou Load user 1 Time EY Load user 2 Open Dlx Time 13 16 Load user 3 Open Time Figure 13 6 a to g Details on the operation of the digital input functions JOG Motor speed Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs JOG Speed P0122 Acceleration ramp 124 V Run Stop Open Time 24V Dlx JOG Open 24V Time General enable Open Time i JOG and JOG JOG P0122 JOG P0123 Speed Motor speed 24V fne Dix JOG 24 General enable General enable Run Stop Run Stop Open Time RESET With Fault Inverter status Without fault Time Dlx Reset Time 24 Reset The condition that caused the error persists Time Figure 13 6 cont h to j Details on the operation of the digital input functions 13 17 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs k 3 WIRE START STOP 24 V Dlx Start Time Dlx Stop Time Motor speed Time FWD Run REV Run 24V Dlx Forward Open
284. ossible for the driven load is also obtained The use is recommended for loads that require braking torques in constant speed situation Example driving of loads with eccentric shafts such as the existent in pumpjacks EE DC Link E 69 69 Speed Voltage U Ramp Output P0151 Figure 9 12 Limitation of the DC link voltage using Ramp Hold function block diagram Scalar Control V f DC Link Voltage P0004 lt F022 Overvoltage P0151 lt DC Link Regulation Nominal U Voltage U P0004 Time Output Speed Time Figure 9 13 Example of the DC link voltage limitation working with the Ramp Acceleration function P0150 DC Regulator Type V f Adjustable 0 Ramp Hold Factory 0 Range 1 Ramp Acceleration Setting Properties V f CFG and VVW Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 27 DC Volt Limit Description It selects the DC link voltage limitation function type in the V f mode P0151 DC Link Voltage Regulation Acting Level V f Adjustable 339 to 400 V 0296 0 Range 585 to 800 V 0296 1 585 to 800 V 0296 2 800 V 585 to 800 V 0296 3 800 V Factory 400 V 585 to 800 0296 4 800 Setting 800 809 to 1000 V P0296 5 1000 V 809 to 1000 V 0296 6 1000 V 924 to 1200 V 0296 7 1000 V 924 to 1200 V 296 8 1200 V Properties V f and VVW Access groups 01 PA
285. oy 96004 duioy 1940 96004 duioy 6004 1940 6004 81004 C COd 6 Z0d 5 6 EL y Of 199 e ueuejey 3 4 Valid only for 202 ock diagram Figure 13 8 Speed Reference b 13 32 Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs LOCAL REFERENCE P0221 FORWARD REVERSE P0220 P0223 LOCAL REMOTE Selection RUN STOP P0224 LOCAL REFERENCE JOG P0225 REFERENCE gt REFERENCE REMOTE REFERENCE LOCAL COMMANDS REMOTE COMMANDS m gt COMMANDS REMOTE REFERENCE P0222 ________________ COMMANDS FORWARD REVERSE P0226 RUN STOP P0227 JOG P0228 Figure 13 9 Local Remote situation block diagram 13 3 3 WIRE COMMAND 33 The group defined as 3 Wire Command refers to the function Run Stop programmed via digital inputs With this function it is possible to activate or deactivate the motor by means of pulses at the digital inputs configured as Run DIx 6 and Stop DIx 7 is important to notice that the Stop pulse is inverted i e transition from 4 24 V to O V For a better understanding of this function it is recommended to verity the figure 13 6 13 4 FORWARD RUN REVERSE RUN COMMANDS 34 The FWD Run REV Run function can be used to comm
286. p 0 Ramp Vector 95 29 1 Step P0175 Flux Proport Gain 0 0 to 31 9 2 0 Vector 92 20 PO176 Flux Integral Gain 0 000 to 9 999 0 020 Vector 92 20 0178 Rated Flux O to 120 96 100 96 Vector 92 20 P0179 Maximum Flux O to 120 96 120 96 Vector 92 20 P0181 Magnetization Mode 0 General Enable 0 General Enable CFG and 92 21 1 Run Stop Encoder P0182 Speed for I F Activ 0 to 90 rpm 18 rpm Sless 93 22 0183 Current in I F Mode 010 9 1 Sless 93 23 P0184 DC Link Regul Mode 0 With losses 1 Without losses CFG and 96 30 1 Without losses Vector and 2 Enab Disab Dlx 21 11 P0185 DC Link Regul Level 339 to 400 V 400 V P0296 0 Vector 96 31 585 to 800 V 800 V P0296 1 and 585 to 800 V 800 V 0296 2 21 11 585 to 800 V 800 V P0296 3 585 to 800 V 800 V P0296 4 809 to 1000 V 1000 V P0296 5 809 to 1000 V 1000 V 296 6 924 to 1200 V 1000 V P0296 7 924 to 1200 V 1200 V P0296 8 P0186 DC Link Prop Gain 0 0 to 63 9 18 0 PM and 96 32 21 11 0187 DC Link Integral Gain 0 000 to 9 999 0 002 PM and 96 32 Vector and 21 11 P0188 Voltage Proport Gain 0 000 to 7 999 0 200 Vector 92 21 0189 Voltage Integral Gain 0 000 to 7 999 0 001 Vector 92 21 0190 Max Output Voltage 690 V 220 V PO296 0 PM and 92 22 0 to 690 V 380 0296 1 Vector and O to 690 V 400 V P0296 2 21 9 O to 690 V 440 V 0296 3 O to 690 V 480 V P0296 4 0 to 690 V 525 V P0296 5 0 to
287. plied by the manufacturer Refer to the item 11 7 1 Adjustment of the Parameters P0409 to P0412 Based on the Motor Data Sheet in this manual Ill Manually copying the parameters content of another CFW 11 that runs an identical motor E e Setting of specific parameters and functions for the application program the digital and analog inputs and outputs HMI keys etc according to the application needs For applications That are simple which can use the factory settings programming for the digital and analog inputs and outputs use the Menu Basic Application Refer to the item 5 2 3 Setting Basic Application Parameters of the CFW 11 user s manual That require only the digital and analog inputs and outputs with programming different from the factory settings use the Menu I O Configuration That need functions as Flying Start Ride Through DC Braking Dynamic Braking etc access and modify those function parameters by means of the Menu Parameter Groups J VVW Control Action Result 10 6 Monitoring Mode Press Menu right soft key The group 00 ALL PARAMETERS is already selected The group 01 PARAMETER GROUPS is selected The group 02 ORIENTED START UP is then selected Press Select The parameter Oriented Start up 0317 is already selected Press Select The content of P0317 000 No is showed The c
288. point Desired value process variable Alx feedback x 100 9 Sensor full scale value gain 20 5 PID Regulator 46 Example Given a pressure transducer with a 4 to 20 mA output and a full scale of 25 bar i e 4 0 bar and 20 mA 25 bar and P0237 22 000 If it is wished to control 10 bar the following setpoint must be entered 1 Setpoint 90 x2x 100 80 In case the setpoint is defined via analog input for instance 231 must be contigured O Signal Function Speed reference and P0233 Signal Type according to the type of signal to be read by the input if current or voltage Do not program P0221 and or P0222 7 E P 6 To set the speed limits Adjust PO133 and P0134 according to the application The readings exhibited automatically when the inverter is powered are Reading 1 P0041 PID Setpoint Reading 2 P0040 Process Variable Reading P0002 Motor Speed 7 Indication Refer to the chapter 5 Programming Basic Instructions in this manual Those variables can also be visualized at the analog outputs AOx provided that the parameters that define the function of those outputs be programmed accordingly Starting up 1 Manual Operation open DI3 keeping the DI3 open Manual check the process variable indication on the keypad HMI P0040 based on an external measurement of the feedback signal value transducer at AI2 Next vary th
289. pter 15 Faults and Alarms in this manual and the chapter 6 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of the user s manual 16 1 FAULT HISTORY 08 In this group are described the parameters that record the last faults occurred in the inverter together with other relevant information for the fault interpretation as date hour motor speed etc NOTE If the fault occurs simultaneously with the CFW 11 power up or reset the parameters regarding this fault as date hour motor speed etc may contain invalid information P0050 Last Fault P0054 Second Fault P0058 Third Fault P0062 Fourth Fault 0066 Fifth Fault P0070 Sixth Fault P0074 Seventh Fault P0078 Eighth Fault P0082 Ninth Fault P0086 Tenth Fault Adjustable 0 to 999 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description They indicate the codes from the last to the tenth fault that have occurred The recording system is the following Fxxx P0050 P0054 P0058 P0062 P0066 P0070 P0074 P0078 P0082 P0086 16 9 P0051 Last Fault Day Month P0055 Second Fault Day Month P0059 Third Fault Day Month P0063 Fourth Fault Day Month P0067 Fifth Fault Day Month P0071 Sixth Fault Day Month P0075 Seventh Fault Day Month P0079 Eighth Fault Day Month P0083 Ninth Fault Day Month 2 zm d 3 a Q 9 P0087 Ten
290. put Voltage 0 0 to 100 0 96 100 0 96 CFG and Adj 24 9 6 0143 Interm Output Voltage 0 0 to 100 0 96 50 0 96 CFG and Adj 24 9 6 0144 3Hz Output Voltage 0 0 to 100 0 96 8 0 96 CFG and Adj 24 9 6 P0145 Field Weakening Speed O to 18000 rpm 1800 rpm CFG and Adj 24 9 6 0146 Intermediate Speed 010 18000 rpm 900 rpm CFG and Adj 24 9 6 P0150 DC Regul Type V f 0 Ramp Hold 0 Ramp Hold CFG V f and 27 9 12 1 Ramp VVW P0151 DC Regul Level V f 339 to 400 V 400 V 296 0 V f and VVW 27 9 12 585 to 800 V 800 V 0296 1 585 to 800 V 800 V 0296 2 585 to 800 V 800 V 296 3 585 to 800 V 800 V P0296 4 809 to 1000 V 1000 V 296 5 809 to 1000 V 1000 V 296 6 924 to 1200 V 1000 V P0296 7 924 to 1200 V 1200 V 296 8 P0152 DC Link Regul P Gain 0 00 to 9 99 1 50 V f and VVW 27 9 13 P0153 Dyn Braking Level 339 to 400 V 375 0296 0 28 14 1 585 to 800 V 618 V 296 1 585 to 800 V 675 V P0296 2 585 to 800 V 748 V P0296 3 585 to 800 V 780 V P0296 4 809 to 1000 V 893 V P0296 5 809 to 1000 V 972 V 0296 6 924 to 1200 V 972 V 0296 7 924 to 1200 V 1174 V P0296 8 P0154 Dyn Braking Resistor 0 0 to 500 0 ohm 0 0 ohm 28 14 2 P0155 Dyn B Resist Power 0 02 to 650 00 kW 2 60 kW 28 14 3 P0156 Overl Curr 100 Speed 0 1 to 1 5xl cup 5 45 15 5 0157 Overl Curr 50 Speed 0 1 to 1 5 up 0O 9xl 45 15 5 P0158 Overl Curr 5 Speed 0 1 to 1 5
291. r 5 REV Run without PO263 P0270 programmed for 6 3 Wire Start without PO263 P0270 programmed for 263 0270 programmed for 7 3 Wire Stop without 263 0270 programmed for 3 Wire Start P0221 or P0222 programmed for 8 Multispeed without Dix 266 268 programmed for 13 Multispeed P0221 or P0222 not programmed for 8 Multispeed with Dlx PO266 P0268 programmed for 13 Multispeed 25 26 a 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification P0221 or P0222 programmed for 7 AND without Dlx PO263 P0270 programmed for 11 Increase OR without PO263 P0270 programmed for 12 Decrease E P P0221 and P0222 not programmed for 7 E P AND with Dlx 263 270 programmed for 11 Increase OR with Dlx PO263 P0270 programmed for 12 Decrease P0202 programmed for 0 60Hz OR 1 V f 50Hz OR 2 Adiustable OR 5 VVW AND P0231 Ramp Ref OR P0231 2 Max Torque Cur OR 236 1 No Ramp Ref OR P0236 2 Max Torque Cur OR P0241 1 No Ramp Ref OR P0241 2 Max Torque Cur OR 246 1 No Ramp Ref 246 2 Max Torque Cur P0202 programmed for O V f 60Hz OR 1 2 V f 50Hz OR 2 Adjustable OR 5 2 VVW AND Dlx 263 0270 programmed for 16 JOG OR 17 JOG P0203 programmed for 1
292. r 2 Figure 15 1 a to connection examples 15 3 Faults and Alarms d AO2 B EX 3 0241 4 Set 53 1 OFF 0 to 10 V and Program P0243 0 or 2 Figure 15 1 d PIC connection examples cont 15 3 PROTECTIONS 45 The parameters related to motor and inverter protections are found in this group Adjustable 20 010 150 0 C Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description These parameters present in Celsius degrees the heatsink temperature on the U V and W arms POO31 and P0032 of the rectifier P0033 and also of the internal air P0034 They are useful to monitor the temperature on the main inverter sections in case of an occasional inverter overheating 5 4 Faults and Alarms P0156 Motor Overload Current at 100 of its Rated Speed P0157 Motor Overload Current at 50 of its Rated Speed P0158 Motor Overload Current at 5 of its Rated Speed Adjustable Factory 156 1 05 Setting PO157 0 9x1 0158 0 65 Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description These parameters are used for the motor overload protection I x t F072 The motor overload current 0156 P0157 and P
293. r filter without safety relay and without external 24 V supply the hexadecimal code presented in the keypad HMI for the parameter P0029 is C544 refer to the table 6 7 6 6 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification Table 6 7 Example of the code at P0029 for a specific inverter model 1 a 4 4 5 P0295 ND HD VFD Rated Current Factory Setting LIII lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 44086329 4 Q lt AKC AEE LL GB IN COR ENON e QUO 4C 4C S 8 CN ToO Or 7 CENERE m EEN E EENEN oes O OI st ucc m S oO c us s est pes pst me m NNN 09 SE SE LO P P 00 00 St St 00 00 NN NSO CN CO NN NN L0 SO P P 00 ELE E E E EE E E IEEE UE EE ME E E EE E UE E ME TIE UE IE E UE IE ME E E EMI UE IE TE E E EE E A I CO CN CO t LO SO P 00 O x LO SO P 00 O CO E LO SO T 00 O CO LO SO P 00 Os CO E LO SO P 00 CO xE LO SO P AMT CN 02 00 00 CO SE E SE SE SE SE SE SE SE SE UO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO LO SO SO SO O SO Adjustable Range 6 7 Inverter Model and Accessories Identification 05 ISAS ISA 66 17A
294. r nameplate data For V f and VVW controls the setting range goes up to 300 Hz For vector control the setting range is from 30 Hz to 120 Hz P0404 Motor Rated Power Adjustable to 58 refer to the next table Factory Motor Range Setting Properties ere Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 43 Motor Data Description Set it according to the used motor nameplate data 11 12 Vector Control Table 11 1 P0404 Motor Rated Power setting Motor Rated Motor Rated Power hp Power hp 270 0 300 0 350 0 380 0 400 0 30 EE 39 SEES 2 88 430 0 36 SESS 38 4 0 50 99 alo M w 1 30 32 99 34 BS 36 440 0 7 450 0 38 475 0 9 500 0 40 540 0 4 600 0 42 620 0 43 670 0 44 700 0 45 760 0 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 Tong ES ee o Cn 20 0 25 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 850 0 900 0 000 0 100 0 250 0 42 43 4 _45 46 800 0 __47 __48 a 50 a 75 0 N N Cn 400 0 125 0 500 0 150 0 600 0 52 ETE 254 175 0 7788 1800 0 56 Caz _58 NTN 180 0 2000 0 200 0 2300 0 220 0 2500 0 250 0 aa N __ 6 8 7 __22 26 28 C N When adjusted via keypa
295. ral Enabling ON 1 Run Stop Applies magnetizing current after Run Stop Run In the sensorless vector control mode the magnetizing current is permanently active In order to disable it when the motor is stopped a digital input programmed for General Enabling can be used There is also the possibility of programming P0217 in 1 active Refer to the section 12 6 Zero Speed Logic Besides this a delay for disabling the magnetizing current can be set by programming P0219 bigger than zero P0188 Proportional Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator 189 Integral Gain of the Maximum Output Voltage Regulator Adjustable 0 000 to 7 999 Factory P0188 0 200 Range Setting P0189 0 001 Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 92 Flux Regulator Description These parameters adjust the maximum output voltage regulator gains In general the factory setting is adequate for the majority of the applications Refer to the figure 11 1 or 11 2 11 21 Vector Control P0190 Maximum Output Voltage Adjustable 0 to 690 V Factory 0 95 x P0296 Range Setting Automatic setting during the Oriented Start up Routine 0 95 x P0400 Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 92 Flux Regulator Description This parameter defines the value of the maximum output voltage Its sta
296. rammed at any Dlx and a transition from V to 24 V occurs the programmed relay will be activated with the delay set in P0283 002 or P0285 003 When a transition from 24 V to occurs the programmed relay will be deactivated with the delay adjusted in P0284 002 or P0286 DO3 After the transition of the Dlx either for activating or deactivating the programmed relay it is necessary that the remains in ON or OFF during at least the time set in PO283 P0285 or P0284 P0286 Otherwise the timer will be reset Refer to the figure 13 5 Note In order to enable that function it is also necessary to program P0276 and or P0277 29 Timer 24 V DO2 RL2 DO3 RL3 PO283 PO285 284 0286 P0283 P0285 P0284 P0286 Figure 13 5 Operation of the timer function DO2 RL2 RL3 Multispeed the setting of the parameters P0266 and or P0267 and or 268 13 requires that the parameters P0221 and or P0222 be programmed in 8 Refer to the description of the parameters P0124 to PO131 in the section 12 4 Multispeed Trace Function it triggers the data acquisition at the channels selected with that function when the three following conditions were fulfilled If the Dlx is with 24 V Trigger condition set in P0552 6 Dlx Function waiting for the trigger PO576 1 Waiting For more details refer to the chapter 19 Trace Function No External Alarm This function will indicate External
297. re Sensor 5 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0393 Highest Temp Sens 20 to 200 C RO 09 45 5 18 P0397 Slip Compens Regen 0 Off 1 25 10 3 1 VVW P0398 Motor Service Factor 1 00 to 1 50 1 00 CFG 05 43 94 1 10 and 21 6 P0399 Motor Rated Eff 50 0 to 99 9 96 67 0 96 CFG and 05 43 94 10 3 VVW P0400 Motor Rated Voltage 0 to 690 V 220 V 0296 0 CFG 05 43 94 11 11 0 to 690 V 440 V PO296 1 and 0 to 690 V 440 V 0296 2 21 6 0 to 690 V 440 V 0296 3 0 to 690 V 440 V PO296 4 0 to 690 V 575 V 0296 5 690 V 575 V 0296 6 690 V 575 V 0296 7 690 V 690 V 0296 8 P0401 Motor Rated Current Oto 1 3xl 150xl is CFG 05 43 94 11 11 21 6 402 Motor Rated Speed 010 18000 rpm 1750 1458 rpm CFG 05 43 94 11 11 and 21 6 P0403 Motor Rated Frequency 0 300 Hz 60 50 Hz CFG 05 43 94 11 12 21 6 0 20 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms ipie is pi ree 404 Motor Rated Power 0 0 33hp 0 25kW Motor 05 43 94 11 12 1 0 5hp 0 37kW 2 0 75hp 0 55kW 3 1hp 0 75kW 4 1 5hp 1 1kW 5 2hp 1 5kW 6 3hp 2 2kW 7 4hp 3kW 8 Shp 3 7kW 9 5 5hp 4kW 0 6hp 4 5kW 1 7 5hp 5 5kW 2 10hp 7 5kW 3 12 5hp 9kW 4 15hp 11kW 5 20hp 15kW 6 25hp 18 5kW 7 30hp 22kW 8 4 30kW 9 50hp 37kW 20 60hp 45kW 21 75hp 55kW 22 100hp 75kW 23 125hp 90kW 24 150hp 110kW
298. re now described in a detail form P0040 PID Process Variable Adjustable 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description It is a read only parameter that presents in percentage the PID Regulator process variable value P0041 PID Setpoint Value Adjustable 0 0 to 100 0 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 PID Regulator Description It is a read only parameter that presents in percentage the value of the PID Regulator setpoint reference PID Regulator 46 P0203 Special Function Selection Adjustable 0 None Factory 0 Range 1 PID Regulator Setting Properties GEC Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 46 Regulador PID Description It enables the use of the PID Regulator special function when set to 1 When P0203 is changed to 1 the following parameters are changed automatically 205 10 Reading Parameter Selection 1 PO206 9 Reading Parameter Selection 2 PO207 2 Reading Parameter Selection 3 223 0 FORWARD REVERSE Selection LOCAL Situation Always FORWARD 225 0 JOG Selection LOCAL Situation Disabled 226 0 FORWARD REVERSE Selection REMOTE Situation Always FORWARD 228 0 JOG Selection REMOTE Situation Disabled P0236 3 12 Signal Function Process Variab
299. rol is done by means of the motor speed variation keeping the value of the process variable the one to be controlled at the desired value Application examples the control of flow or pressure in a piping of the temperature in a furnace or in a greenhouse or of the chemicals dosage in tanks In order to define the terms used by a PID control we are going to use a simple example An electro pump is used in a water pumping system where the pressure in the pump output pipe has to be controlled pressure transducer is installed in the pipe and supplies an analog feedback signal to the CFW 11 which is proportional to the water pressure This signal is called the process variable and can be visualized at the parameter P0040 A setpoint is programmed in the CFW 11 via the keypad HMI P0525 or adjusted through an analog input as a O to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal The setpoint is the desired water pressure value that the pump is supposed to produce regardless of the consumption variations at the pump output at any time The CFW 11 will compare the setpoint with the process variable and control the motor speed trying to eliminate any error and keeping the process variable equal to the setpoint The setting of the P and D gains determines how fast the inverter will respond to eliminate this error 20 1 10504
300. rotections Description The inverter overload function operates separately from the motor overload protection and it has the purpose of protecting the IGBTs and rectifiers in case of overload avoiding that damage due to overtemperature at their junctions occurs Thus the parameter P0350 allows configuring the desired protection level for this function even with the automatic reduction of the switching frequency in order to avoid the fault occurrence The next table describes each of the available options 15 10 3 Faults and Alarms Table 15 3 Actions for the parameter P0350 options It enables F048 IGBT Overload Fault In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault the switching frequency is reduced automatically to 2 5 kHz It enables the fault F048 and the alarm A047 IGBT Overload Alarm In order to avoid the occurrence of the fault the switching frequency is reduced automatically to 2 5 kHz It enables F048 Without the reduction of the switching frequency It enables the alarm A047 and the fault F048 Without the reduction of the switching frequency It reduces the switching frequency when The output current exceeds 1 5 x luo 1 1 x lap OF The temperature at the IGBT case is less than 10 C from the maximum temperature and P0297 2 5 kHz P0351 Motor Overtemperature Protection Adjustable OR Factory 1 Range 1 Fault Alarm Setting 2 Fouk 3 Alarm Properties
301. rties GEC Access groups 06 BACKUP PARAMETERS via HMI Description The Copy Function HMI is similar to the previous and it is also used to transfer the contents of the parameters from one inverter to another others The inverters have the same software version If the versions are different by programming P0319 2 the HMI will show the message Incompatible software version during 3 seconds After removing the message from the HMI the content of P0319 returns to zero 7 3 Starting up and Settings Table 7 3 Parameter P0319 options 0319 Action 50 Inactive no action Inverter gt HMI transfers the inverter current parameters and the user memories 1 2 and contents to the keypad HMI nonvolatile memory EEPROM The inverter current parameters remain unchanged 0 2 HMI Inverter transfers the content of the keypad HMI nonvolatile memory EEPROM to the current inverter parameters and to the user memories 1 2 and 3 After the transfer has been finished an inverter reset occurs 1 The content of PO319 returns to zero NOTE In case the keypad had been previously loaded with parameters from a version different from that of the inverter where is trying to copy the parameters the operation will not be carried out and the keypad HMI will indicate the fault F082 Copy Function Fault It is understood as different versions those that differ in the x an
302. s AC Alternating Current DC Direct Current General Information CFM cubic feet per minute it is a flow measurement unit hp Horse Power 746 Watts power measurement unit normally used to indicate the mechanical power of electric motors Hz Hertz 1 5 liters per second kg kilogram 1000 gram kHz kilohettz 1000 Hz mA milliamp 0 001 Amp min minute ms millisecond 0 001 second Nm Newton meter torque measurement unit rms Root mean square effective value rpm revolutions per minute speed measurement unit s second V volt Q ohm 2 2 2 Numerical Representation The decimal numbers are represented by means of digits without suffix Hexadecimal numbers are represented with the letter h after the number 2 2 3 Symbols for the Parameter Properties Description RO Reading only parameter CFG Parameter that can be changed only with a stopped motor he keypad HM he keypad HM V f Parameter visible on Adj Parameter visible on Vector Parameter visible on the keypad HMI VVW Parameter visible on Sless Parame Encoder Parame CFW 11M Parame PM Parame er visible on er visible on er visible on er visible on he keypad HM he keypad HM he keypad HM he keypad HM only in the V f mode 202 0 1 or 2 only in the V f adjustable mode 202 2 only in the vector modes with encoder or sensorless PO202 3 or 4 only in the VVW
303. s jis rete com te P0276 002 Function RL2 0 Not Used 2 gt 13 19 1 N gt Nx 2 gt lt 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 15 gt Ix 7 15 lt lx 8 Torque gt Tx 9 Torque lt Tx 0 Remote Run 2 Ready 3 No Fault 4 No F070 5 No F071 6 No F006 21 22 7 No F051 54 57 8 No F072 9 4 20mA OK 20 P0695 Value 21 Forward 22 Proc V gt PVx 23 Proc V lt PW 24 Ride Through 25 Pre Charge OK 26 Fault 27 Time Enab Hx 28 SoftPLC 29 Timer 30 gt Nx Nt gt Nx 31 F gt Fx 1 32 F gt Fx 2 33 STO 34 No F160 35 No Alarm 36 No Fault Alarm 37 38 No Fault IOE 39 No Alarm IOE 40 No Cable IOE 4 No A cable IOE 42 No F cable IOE P0277 Function See options in P0276 1 gt Nx CFG 4 13 19 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms P0278 DOA Function 0 Not Used 0 Not Used 13 19 1 gt Nx 2 gt 3 N lt Ny 4 N N 5 Zero Speed 6 ls gt Ix 7 15 lt 1 8 Torque gt Tx 9 Torque lt Tx 0 Remote 1 Run 2 Ready 3 No Fault 4 No F070 5 No F071 6 No F006 21 22 7 No F051 54 57 8 No F072 9 4 20mA OK 20 P0695 Value 21 Forward 22 Proc V gt PVx 23 Proc V lt PVy 24 Ride Through 25 Pre Charge OK 26 Fault 27
304. standard configuration are available 2 analog outputs 1 and AO2 and 2 more AO3 and AOA can be added with the 01 accessory The parameters related to those outputs are described next NOTE The parameter associated with the and AO4 analog outputs will be showed on the HMI only when the 01 module is connected into the Slot 1 XC41 P0014 AOI Value P0015 AO2 Value Adjustable 0 00 to 100 00 96 Factory Range Setting P0016 AO3 Value P0017 AO4 Value Adjustable 100 00 to 100 00 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 07 I O CONFIGURATION or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 39 Analog Outputs 39 Analog Outputs Description Those read only parameters indicate the value of the analog outputs to AO4 as a percentage of the full scale The indicated values are those obtained after the multiplication by the gain Refer to the description of the parameters P0251 to P0261 13 6 P0251 AOI Function P0254 AO2 Function Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs Adjustable Range Speed Reference Total Reference Real Speed Torque Current Reference Torque Current Output Current Process Variable Active Current Output Power PID Setpoint Torque Current gt 0 Motor Torque SoftPLC WN OOONAaAKRWN O 8 14 Not Used 15 Not Used 16 Motor lxt 17 Encoder Speed 18 P0696 Value 19 P0697 Value
305. stics 4 s hot motor blocked rotor time l l 7 7 821 7 8 x 10 8 A 84 2 A SF 1 15 one gets 84 2 x 100 678 Overload Current x SF 10 8 x 1 15 Overload Time 45 Atter this it is only necessary to plot the calculated values on the motor overload graph figures 15 3 a or 15 3 b and to select the thermal class curve immediately below the calculated point Overload Time 100000 10000 1000 Class 45 Class 40 Class 35 Class 30 Class 25 Class 20 Class 15 Class 10 Class 5 T T T T Current x In for ES 1 00 10 Current x In for ES 1 15 4x 5x x 7 8 9 10x x Col 4 Figure 15 3 Cold motor overload curves for loads of the HD and ND types 15 7 Faults and Alarms Overload Time 100000 10000 1000 100 10 1 0 1 i i 1 i i 1 i i i 1 Current x In for ES 1 00 0 52 5 3 26 7 8 1 9 10 t Current x In for ES 1 15 Ix 2x 3x 5 x 7x 8 9 10x Figure 15 3 b Hot motor overload curves for loads of the HD and ND types For the previous example by plotting the 678 value x axis of the Overload Current with the 4 seconds y axis of the Overload Time in the graph of the figure 15 3 b hot motor the thermal class to be selected will be the class 15 t15 P03
306. suggested Table 12 6 P0329 value in function of PO404 P0404 0 20 21 23 24 26 27 29 30 32 33 37 29 40 70 80 100 10 P0404 38 40 51 58 P0329 12 13 Functions Common to All the Control Modes The frequency variation rate is determined by P0329 x P0412 General Enable with Run Stop on or Run Stop with General Enable on 0 9 x P0401 a 24 V time 1 lt Vt Vector Li N i 0134 1 1 1 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 1 gt gt 3 2xP0412 4xP0412 P0134 1 1 1 5 i I k Vector i 1 0134 41 P0329xP0412 1 1 time 4 412 15 1 i i 1 1 d 1 P0327 1 1 1 LI 1 1 time Figura 12 6 a to d Influence of PO327 and P0329 during Flying Start PO202 3 If it is wished to deactivate momentarily the Flying Start function one can program one of the digital inputs PO263 to 270 as 24 Disab FlyStart Refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs 12 7 2 2 202 4 During the time period when the motor is being magnetized the identification of the motor speed occurs Once the magnetization is finished the motor will be operated starting from that speed until reaching the speed reference indicated in 0001 The parameters P0327 to P0329 P0331 and P0332 are not used
307. t Automatic Current IxR P0139 Figure 9 3 Torque Boost block diagram Output Voltage Nominal 1 2 Nominal Compensation Zone gt Speed N 2 Figure 9 4 Effect 0137 on curve PO202 0 2 P0138 Slip Compensation Adjustable 10 0 to 10 0 96 Factory 0 0 Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 23 V t Control Description The parameter P0138 is used in the motor slip compensation function when adjusted to positive values In this case it compensates the drop in the speed due to the application of load to the motor shaft It increases the output frequency in function of the increase in the motor active current The setting of P0138 allows regulating the slip compensation precisely Once P0138 is adjusted the inverter will keep the speed constant even with load variations by adjusting the voltage and frequency automatically Negative values are used in special applications where one wants to reduce the output speed in function of the increase in the motor current E g Load distribution in motors operated in parallel 9 3 Scalar Control V f Total Reference x Refer to figure 9 1 Speed T Output Sli i AF y Slip Compensation Active Current P0139 P0138 Figure 9 5 Slip compensation block diagram Output
308. t Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 P0084 Ninth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 10 0085 Ninth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 POO86 Tenth Fault 0 to 999 RO 08 16 9 P0087 Tenth Fault Day Month 00 00 to 31 12 RO 08 6 10 0088 Tenth Fault Year 00 to 99 RO 08 6 11 POO89 Tenth Fault Time 00 00 to 23 59 RO 08 6 11 090 Current At Last Fault 0 0 to 4500 0A RO 08 6 11 P0091 DC Link At Last Fault O to 2000 V RO 08 6 12 P0092 Speed At Last Fault 0 to 18000 rpm RO 08 6 12 P0093 Reference Last Faul O to 18000 rpm RO 08 6 12 P0094 Frequency Last Fault 0 0 to 1020 Hz RO 08 6 12 P0095 Motor Volt Last Fault O to 2000 V RO 08 6 13 P0096 Dix Status Last Faul BitO DII RO 08 6 13 Bit 1 DI2 Bit 2 DI3 Bit 3 014 Bit 4 05 5 016 Bit 6 017 Bit 7 DI8 P0097 DOx Status Last Fault Bit 0 DO RO 08 16 13 Bit 1 002 Bit 2 DO3 Bit 3 DO4 Bit 4 005 P0100 Acceleration Time 0 0 to 999 0 s 20 05 04 20 2 1 P0101 Deceleration Time 0 0 to 999 0 s 20 05 04 20 2 1 0102 Acceleration Time 2 0 0 to 999 0 s 20 05 20 2 1 PO103 Deceleration Time 2 0 0 to 999 0 s 20 0s 20 2 1 P0104 5 Ramp 0 Off 0 Off 20 2 2 1 50 2 100 P0105 151 2 Ramp Select 0 1 Ramp 2 Dix CFG 20 2 3 1 2 Ramp 2 Dix 3 Serial USB 4 Anybus CC 5 CANOpen DeviceNet 6 SoftPLC 7 PLC11 0120 Speed Ref Backup 0 Of 1 On 21 2 3 On P0121 Keypad Reference 010 18000 rpm 90 rpm 21 2 4 P0122 JOG JOG
309. t of the last fault occurrence Read Only Parameters 09 P0091 DC Link Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable to 2000 V Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the inverter DC link voltage at the moment of the last fault occurrence P0092 Speed at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the motor speed at the moment of the last fault occurrence P0093 Reference at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable 18000 rpm Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the speed reference at the moment of the last fault occurrence P0094 Frequency at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable 0 0 to 1020 Hz Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the inverter output frequency at the moment of the last fault occurrence Read Only Parameters 09 P0095 Motor Voltage at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable 2000 V Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the motor voltage at the moment of the last fault
310. table 0 00 to 99 99 s Factory 0 00s Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 05 SELF TUNING via HMI 29 Vector Control or 94 Self tuning Description This parameter is automatically adjusted during the self tuning The P0413 setting determines the speed regulator gains 0161 and 162 When P0408 1 or 2 it must be observed If 413 0 the time constant will be obtained in function of the inertia of the programmed motor table value If 413 gt 0 the value of P0413 will not be changed by the self tuning Sensorless vector control P0202 3 When the P0413 value obtained through the self tuning provides inadequate speed regulator gains PO161 and P0162 it is possible to change them by setting P0413 via keypad HMI The PO161 gain provided by the self tuning or through P0413 change will be limited to the range 6 0 lt P0161 lt 9 0 The P0162 value varies in function of the PO161 value In case it be necessary to increase even more these gains they must be adjusted directly at P0161 and P0162 Note Values of 0161 gt 12 0 may turn the torque current and the motor speed unstable oscillating Vector control with encoder P0202 4 The load may be coupled to the motor shaft for this step of the routine The P0413 value is estimated by the self tuning when 408 3 or 4 The measurement procedure consists in accelerating the motor up to 50 of the
311. te It can be disabled by setting P0353 2 or 3 2057 12 Fault of overtemperature measured at the Overtemperature on temperature sensors NTC of the IGBTs IGBTs W F067 Fault related to the phase relation of the encoder Output motor cables U V W are inverted Incorrect Encoder signals if PO202 4 and P0408 2 3or 4 Encoder channels A and B are inverted Motor Wiring Note Encoder was not properly mounted This fault can only happen during the self tuning routine It is not possible to reset this fault In this case turn off the power supply solve the problem and then turn it on again F070 Overcurrent or short circuit detected at the output Short circuit between two motor phases Overcurrent in the DC bus or at the braking resistor Short circuit between the connection cables of the Short circuit dynamic braking resistor IGBT modules are shorted F071 The inverter output current was too high for too long Excessive load inertia or acceleration time too short Output Overcurrent Settings of P0135 or P0169 P0170 0171 and P0172 are too high F072 The motor overload protection operated Settings of P0156 P0157 and P0158 are too low for the Motor Overload Note used motor It may be disabled by setting 348 0 or 3 Motor shaft load is excessive F074 A ground fault occured either in the cable between Shorted wiring in one or more of the output phases Ground Fault the inverter and the motor or in the motor itse
312. te the states active and inactive of the outputs through numbers 1 and O Example If the code presented for the parameter P0097 on the keypad HMI is 001 it will correspond to the sequence 00011100 indicating that the outputs 5 4 and 3 were active at the moment of the last fault occurrence Table 16 3 Example of correspondence between the P0097 hexadecimal code and the DOx states D D DO2 DOI No relation with the DOx No relation with the DOx es Active Active Active Inactive Inactive 24 V 24 V 24 V 0 V 0 V always zero always zero P0800 Phase U Book 1 Temperature P0801 Phase V Book 1 Temperature P0802 Phase W Book 1 Temperature P0803 Phase U Book 2 Temperature P0804 Phase V Book 2 Temperature P0805 Phase W Book 2 Temperature P0806 Phase U Book 3 Temperature P0807 Phase V Book 3 Temperature P0808 Phase W Book 3 Temperature P0809 Phase U Book 4 Temperature P0810 Phase V Book 4 Temperature P0811 Phase W Book 4 Temperature 812 Phase U Book 5 Temperature P0813 Phase V Book 5 Temperature P0814 Phase W Book 5 Temperature P0834 DIMI and DIM2 Status Refer to the section 15 3 Protections for more details 16 14 Communication 49 COMMUNICATION 49 For the exchange of information through communication networks the CFW 11 has several standardized communication protocols like MODBUS CANopen DeviceNet and Ethern
313. ted Start up 21 15 PM Vector Control If necessary change the content of PO401 according to the rated motor current Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0156 P0157 and P0158 If necessary change the content of P0402 according to the rated motor speed Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0122 to P0131 P0133 P0134 PO208 P0288 P0289 and P0403 P0403 is automatically adjusted according to P0403 P0402 x P0431 120 Therefore press Selec If necessary change the content of PO404 according to the rated motor power Therefore press Selec This parameter will only be visible if the encoder board or the PLC11 module is connected to the inverter If there is an encoder connected to the motor change P0405 according to its number of pulses per revolution Therefore press Selec Set P0409 according to the motor data sheet Therefore press Selec If the information is not available keep the setting equal to zero Adjust P0431 equal to 6 for the standard Wmagnet motor Therefore press Selec This change will affect P0403 Adjust P0433 according to the nameplate data Therefore press Selec Adjust P0434 according to the nameplate data Therefore press Selec Adjust P0435 according to the nameplate data Therefore press Selec Figure 21
314. ted automatically at low speeds if PO182 gt 3 and when the Control Mode is Sensorless Vector P0202 3 The operation at the low speed region may present instability In this region the motor operation voltage is also very low being difficult to be measured accurately In order to keep a stable operation of the inverter in that region the automatic commutation occurs from sensorless mode to the so called 1 mode which is a scalar control with imposed current Scalar control with imposed current means a current control with a constant reference value adjusted in a parameter and controlling only the frequency in an open loop The parameter PO182 defines the speed below which the transition to f mode occurs and the parameter P0183 defines the value of the current to be applied to the motor The minimum speed recommended for the operation of the Sensorless Vector Mode is 18 rpm for 60 Hz IV pole motors and 15 rpm for 50 Hz IV pole motors If PO182x3 rpm the inverter will always operate in Sensorless Vector mode i e the f function will be disabled 11 3 SELF TUNING Some motor parameters that are not available on the motor nameplate necessary for the operation of the sensorless vector or vector with encoder control are estimated stator resistance motor flux leakage inductance rotor time constant T the rated magnetizing current of the motor and the mechanic time constant of the motor and the driven load These parameters
315. temperature protection is disabled No faults or alarms will be generated generate the fault F186 F187 F188 F189 F190 will exhibit the arm A191 A192 A193 A194 A195 or the broken cable alarm A196 A197 A198 A199 A200 generate the fault F186 F187 F188 F189 F1 broken cable alarm A196 A197 A198 A199 A200 90 or will exhibit the 93 A194 A195 or the 90 or will exhibit the 90 93 A194 A195 exhibit the broken cable alarm 196 197 198 199 200 The next parameters will be shown on the HMI when the IOE 01 module is connected into the slot 1 XC41 connector Refer to the figure 3 1 P0373 PTC 1 Sensor Type P0376 PTC 2 Sensor Type P0382 PTC 4 Sensor Type P0379 PTC 3 Sensor Type P0385 PTC 5 Sensor Type Adjustable 0 Single PTC Range 1 Triple PTC Properties GEG 01 PARAMETER Access groups GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description These allow selecting the type of used PTC sensor single or triple Factory Setting 1 Triple PTC Faults and Alarms 15 4 2 PT100 or KTY84 Temperature Sensor Type The parameters described in this section will be shown on the HMI when the IOE 02 or IOE 03 optional module is connected into the slot 1 XC41 connector Refer to the figure 3 1 P0375 Sensor 1 Fault Alarm Temperature Setting P0378 Sensor 2 Fault Alarm Temperature Setting P0381 Sensor 3 Fault Alarm Temperature Set
316. th Fault Day Month Adjustable 00 00 to 31 12 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description They indicate the day and the month of the last to the tenth fault occurrence P0052 Last Fault Year P0056 Second Fault Year P0060 Third Fault Year P0064 Fourth Fault Year POO68 Fifth Fault Year P0072 Sixth Fault Year P0076 Seventh Fault Year P0080 Eighth Fault Year P0084 Ninth Fault Year 16 10 Read Only Parameters 09 POOS88 Tenth Fault Year Adjustable 00 to 99 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description They indicate the year of the last to the tenth fault occurrence P0053 Last Fault Time P0057 Second Fault Time P0061 Third Fault Time P0065 Fourth Fault Time P0069 Fifth Fault Time P0073 Sixth Fault Time P0077 Seventh Fault Time P0081 Eighth Fault Time P0085 Ninth Fault Time P0089 Tenth Fault Time Adjustable 00 00 to 23 59 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description They indicate the time of the last to the tenth fault occurrence P0090 Current at the Moment of the Last Fault Adjustable 0 0 to 4500 0 A Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 08 FAULT HISTORY via HMI Description It is the record of the current supplied by the inverter at the momen
317. the overload protection tripping level Only the fault FO72 will be generated when the motor overload reaches the overload protection 2 Fault trip level and the inverter will be disabled Only the alarm A046 is generated when the motor overload reaches the value programmed in 3 Alarm P0349 and the inverter continues operating The trip level of the overload protection is calculated internally by the CFW 11 taking into account the motor current its thermal class and its service factor Refer to the parameter 159 in this section P0349 Motor Overload Alarm Level Adjustable 70 to 100 96 Factory 85 Range Setting Properties ene Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Description This parameter defines the level for the motor overload protection alarm actuation A046 it is expressed as a percentage of the trip level of the overload integrator It will only be effective if PO348 is programmed in 1 Fault Alarm or 3 Alarm P0350 Inverter Overload Protection IGBTs Adjustable 0 Fault is active with switching frequency reduction Factory 1 Range 1 Fault and alarm are active with switching frequency Setting reduction 2 Fault is active without switching frequency reduction 3 Fault and alarm are active without switching frequency reduction Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 P
318. ting P0384 Sensor 4 Fault Alarm Temperature Setting P0387 Sensor 5 Fault Alarm Temperature Setting Adjustable 20 to 200 C Factory 130 C Range Setting Properties Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI m 45 Protections Description These parameters allow adjusting the temperature for each sensor at which temperature fault alarm will occur P0388 Sensor 1 Temperature P0389 Sensor 2 Temperature P0390 Sensor 3 Temperature P0391 Sensor 4 Temperature P0392 Sensor 5 Temperature Description These parameters indicate in Celsius degrees the PT100 or KTY84 sensor temperatures P0393 Highest Sensor Temperature Adjustable 2010 200 C Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections 15 18 Description Faults and Alarms This parameter indicates in Celsius degrees the highest temperature among the PT100 or KTY84 used sensors NOTE or If any of the temperature fault alarm configuration parameters P0374 P0377 P0380 P0383 and or P0386 is programmed with the Inactive option the respective read only parameter P0388 P0389 P0390 P0391 and or P0392 indicates zero not showing the actual sensor temperature These inactive sensor inputs do not interfere with the P0393 indication When all the read only parameters indicate zero P0393 will also indicate zero The table 15 9 shows the
319. to 12 poles NOTE Therefore P0410 must be equal to zero before initiating the self tuning If PO410 0 the self tuning routine will keep the existent value Note When using another brand of motor PO410 must be adjusted with the adequate value no load motor current before initiating the self tuning P0408 2 Run for The P0410 value is estimated with the motor rotating It must be executed without load coupled to the motor P0409 P0411 to P0413 are estimated with the motor standing still ATTENTION If the option PO408 2 Run for lI is performed with the load coupled to the motor an incorrect value of P0410 l may be estimated This will implicate in estimation error for P0412 rotor time constant T and for P0413 mechanic time constant T Overcurrent fault F071 may also occur during the inverter operation Note The term load includes everything that might be coupled to the motor shaft for instance gearbox inertia disk etc 408 3 Run for The value of P0413 Mechanic time constant is estimated with the motor rotating It must done preferably with the load coupled to the motor P0409 to P0412 are estimated with the motor standing still and P0410 is estimated in the same manner as with PO408 1 0408 4 Estimate T_ it estimates only the P0413 Mechanic time constant value with the motor rotating It must be done preferably with the load coupled to the motor
320. ture at IGBT V B3 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 3 V phase F322 00 Overtemperature at IGBT V B3 Overtemperature fault measured with he temperature sensor NTC of the book 3 V phase IGBT A324 09 High Temperature at IGBT W B3 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 3 W phase F325 10 Overtemperature at IGBT W B3 Overtemperature fault measured with sensor NTC of the book 3 W phase he temperature GBT A327 89 igh Temperature at IGBT U B4 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book h the 4 U phase F328 09 Overtemperature at IGBT U B4 Overtemperature fault measured with he temperature sensor NTC of the book 4 U phase IGBT A330 9 igh Temperature at IGBT V B4 High temperature alarm measured wit temperature sensor NTC of the book IGBT h the 4 V phase High ambient temperature and high output current Blocked or defective fan Fins of the book heatsink too dirty impairing the air flow 0 35 Quick Parameter Reference Faults and Alarms Fault Alarm Description Possible Causes 2331 09 Overtemperature at IGBT V B4 Overtemperature fault measured with the temperature sensor NTC of the book 4 V phase IGBT A333 9 High Temperature at IGBT W B4
321. ty 15 PLC11 FORWARD 1e REVERSE Properties CRE Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 31 Local Command 32 Remote Command Description They define the origin of the Speed Direction command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation where FWD Means Forward Default situation REV Means Reverse Default situation Dlx Refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs P0224 Run Stop Selection LOCAL Situation P0227 Run Stop Selection REMOTE Situation Adjustable Factory 0224 0 K Range Mic 0 Setting 0227 1 2 Serial USB 3 Anybus CC 4 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP 5 S 6 Properties ene Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 31 Local Command 32 Remote Command Description They define the origin of the Run Stop command in the LOCAL situation and in the REMOTE situation Digital and Analog Inputs and Outputs P0225 Selection LOCAL Situation P0228 JOG Selection REMOTE Situation Adjustable 0 Disabled Factory 0225 1 Range 1 JOG Key Setting 0228 2 2 Dh 3 Serial USB 4 Anybus CC 5 CANopen DeviceNet Profibus DP 6 SoftPLC 7 PACI Properties CFG Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS or 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 31 Local Command 3
322. urrent PO169 and P0170 become inactive and the current limitation will be specitied by the Alx In this case the limitation value can be monitored at the parameter correspondent to the programmed Alx P0018 21 NOTE The maximum value that those parameters may assume is internally limited at 1 8 x 295 HD In the torque limitation condition the motor current can be calculated by 2 ba ee 1 0 o P0410 100 The maximum torque developed by the motor is given by P0401 x P0169 or P0170 100 Troal 100 P0401 2 x B 100 In case that the current limitation be provided by an analog input replace 169 or P0170 by P0018 P0019 P0020 or P0021 according to the programmed Alx For more details refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs For the applications of torque control some recommendations of adjustments of P0169 and 0170 are provided in section 11 5 Torque Control 11 28 Vector Control P0171 Maximum Torque Current at Maximum Speed P0172 Maximum Torque Current at Maximum Speed Adjustable 0 0 to 350 0 96 Factory 125 0 Range Setting Properties Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 95 Torque Curr Limit Description Torque current limitation in function of the speed Torque current limitation 170 0169 20173 0
323. uts Description Through this parameter it is possible to visualize the status of the 2 digital inputs of the Modular Drive interface board The indication is done by means of the numbers O and 1 representing respectively the states No Fault Alarm or With Fault Alarm at the inputs The state of each input is considered as digit in the sequence where DIM1 represents the least significant digit Refer to the CFW 11M user s manual to obtain more information 15 4 MOTOR OVERTEMPERATURE PROTECTION USING THE IOE 01 IOE 02 OR IOE 03 MODULE For each type of temperature sensor PTC PT100 or KTY84 there is an optional module associated IOE 01 IOE 02 or 03 respectively P0374 Sensor 1 Temperature Fault Alarm Configuration P0377 Sensor 2 Temperature Fault Alarm Configuration P0380 Sensor 3 Temperature Fault Alarm Configuration P0383 Sensor 4 Temperature Fault Alarm Configuration P0386 Sensor 5 Temperature Fault Alarm Configuration Adjustable 0 Inactive Factory 1 Range 1 Temperature Fault Temperature Alarm Cable Alarm Setting 2 Temperature Fault Cable Alarm 3 Temperature Alarm Cable Alarm 4 Temperature Fault Temperature Alarm 5 Temperature Fault 6 Temperature Alarm 7 Cable Alarm Properties en Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 45 Protections Faults and Alarms Description These parameters allow selecting the type of desired action temp
324. value read in POOO7 21 7 PM VECTOR CONTROL 29 21 7 1 Speed Regulator 90 The parameters related to the CFW 11 speed regulator are presented in this group P0160 Speed Regulator Configuration P0161 Speed Regulator Proportional Gain P0162 Speed Regulator Integral Gain P0163 Local Reference Offset P0164 Remote Reference Offset 0165 Speed Filter P0166 Speed Regulator Differential Gain 1 8 21 7 2 Current Regulator 91 PM Vector Control The parameters related to the CFW 11 current regulator are presented in this group P0438 Iq Current Regulator Proportional Gain P0440 Id Current Regulator Proportional Gain Adjustable Range 0 00 to 1 99 Factory P0438 0 80 Setting 0440 0 50 P0439 Current Regulator Integral Gain P0441 Current Regulator Integral Gain Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI 0 1 999 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 29 Vector Control 91 Current Regulator 21 7 3 Flux Regulator 92 P0190 Maximum Output Voltage Adjustable Range Properties Access groups via HMI O to 690 V PM and Vector 01 PARAMETER GROUPS 29 Vector Control 92 Flux Regulator Factory 0 005 Setting Factory 0 95 x P0296 Setting Automatic setting during the Oriented Start up Routine 0 95 x P0400 21 PM Vector Control
325. voiding an overvoltage fault F022 The setting of the DC link regulation can be done in two manners 1 With loss optimal break set PO184 0 1 1 PO404 20 60 hp In this way the current flux is modulated in a way to increase the losses of the motor increasing the break torque better operation can be obtained with motors of smaller efficiency small motors 1 2 P0404 20 60 hp the current flux will be increased up to the maximum value defined on P0169 or P0170 as the speed is reduced The break torque in the weakness field area is small 2 Without losses set P0184 1 Activates only the DC link voltage regulation NOTE The factory setting for PO185 is adjusted at the maximum which disables the DC link voltage regulation In order to activate it set 185 according to the table 11 9 Table 11 9 DC link voltage regulation recommended levels inven 200 400 440 500 550 660 ub Bd 40 800 28 er poze 1 11 31 Vector Control P0186 DC Link Voltage Regulation Proportional Gain Adjustable 0 0 to 63 9 Factory 18 0 Range Setting P0187 DC Link Voltage Regulation Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 0 002 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI 29 Vector Control 96 DC Link Regulator Description These parameters adjust the DC link voltage r
326. w the level adjusted PO185 This procedure avoid the overvoltage fault at the DC link F022 It can also be used with accentric loads 01 24 V Braking actuates as described for 184 1 2 Enable Disable via Dlx DIx 0 V The Without Losses Braking stays inactive The DC link voltage will be controlled by the parameter P0153 Dynamic Braking P0185 DC Link Voltage Regulation Level P0186 DC Link Voltage Regulation Proportional Gain P0187 DC Link Voltage Regulation Integral Gain 21 7 6 Flying Start Ride Through 44 21 11 PM Vector Control P0326 Ride Through Integral Gain Adjustable 0 000 to 9 999 Factory 0 128 Range Setting Properties PM and Vector Access groups 01 PARAMETER GROUPS via HMI FlyStart RideThru Description These parameters configure the vector mode Ride Through PI controller which is responsible for keeping the DC link voltage at the level set in PO322 Regulator R T Us Ride Through P0322 Figure 21 1 and 21 2 P0325 P0326 Us Figure 21 3 Ride Through controller Normally the factory settings for P0325 and P0326 are adequate for the majority of the applications Do not change these parameters 21 7 7 DC Braking 47 21 7 8 Encoder Zero Position Search These functions are inactive 21 8 PM VECTOR CONTROL MODE START UP NOTE Read the entire CFW 11 user s manual before installing powering up or operating the inverter
327. x P0011 Seeing that 1 732 P0003 is the output current measured P0007 is the reference output voltage or estimated POO11 is the value of the cosine vector angle of the reference output voltage vector angle of the output current measured 16 4 Read Only Parameters 09 P0011 Cos Phi of the Output Adjustable 0 00 to 1 00 Factory Range Setting Properties RO Access groups 09 READ ONLY PARAMETERS via HMI Description This parameter indicates the value of the cosine of the angle between the voltage and output current The electric motor are inductive loads and therefore consumes reactive power This power is exchanged between the motor and the inverter and does not produce useful power According to the operating condition of the motor the ratio reactive power active power may increase resulting in a reduction of the output cosine P0012 018 to 011 Status Refer to the item 13 1 3 Digital Inputs P0013 DO5 to Status Refer to the item 13 1 4 Digital Outputs Relays P0014 AO Value P0015 AO2 Value P0016 AO3 Value P0017 AO4 Value Refer to the item 13 1 2 Analog Outputs P0018 Value P0019 Al2 Value P0020 Value P0021 AIA Value Refer to the item 13 1 1 Analog Inputs P0023 Software Version Refer to the section 6 1 Inverter Dota for more details P0027 Accessories Configuration 1 P0028 Accessories Configuration

CFW11 - Programming Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents